Prisma Plus System P

Prisma Plus LV Switchboards
Certified for more safety
Catalogue
P System
Cubicles
General contents
Index
Prisma System P
General presentation
Installation and connection in the switchboard
Choice of enclosure
Partitioning
Current distribution and accessories
103
Dimensions
164
Standards
171
Characteristics
179
Index
Cat. no Designation
Pages
03000
03342
03343
03344
03345
03352
03353
03354
03358
03401
20 M4 clip-nuts for DIN rails

20 M4 clip-nuts for slotted mounting plates
4 M5 hexagonal spacers, H=9mm
20 captive nuts for M6 hexagonal spacers
4 M8 hexagonal spacers, H=40+10mm
Modular front plate, 2 modules
Blanking strip, L=1000mm
4 divisible blanking plates, W=90mm
Front plate for INS250 source changeover system
with rotary handles
Front plate for 3-4 vertical Vigi NS250 devices with
toggles
Front plate for 3-4 vertical NS250 devices
Front plate for 3-4 vertical Vigi NS250 devices with
rotary handles or motor mechanisms
Front plate for vertical NS250 source changeover
system with rotary handles
Front plate for INS250 complete source
changeover assembly
Front plate for vertical INS250
Blanking plate for vertical NS-INS250
Front plate for vertical NS630 with toggle
Front plate for vertical INS630
Front plate for vertical NS630 with rotary handle or
motor mechanism
Front plate for vertical Vigi NS630 with toggle
Front plate for vertical Vigi NS630 with rotary
handle or motor mechanism
Front plate for vertical INF32/40, 3P
Front plate for INF32/40, 4P and horizontal 3P
Front plate for INF63-160, 3P and vertical INV63,
3P
Front plate for vertical INF63, 4P and vertical
INF160
Transparent front plate, 4 modules
Transparent front plate, 4 modules,W=250mm
4 lead-sealable front plate screws
Modular device rail
03402
Adjustable modular device rail
03411
Mounting plate for horizontal fixed NS250 with

toggle, 3P
Mounting plate for horizontal fixed NS-INS250 with
toggle, 4P
Mounting plate for horizontal fixed or plug-in
NS250 with rotary handle or motor mechanism, 3P
Mounting plate for horizontal fixed or plug-in
NS250 with rotary handle or motor mechanism, 4P
Mounting plate for horizontal withdrawable NS250,
3P or 4P
03164
03165
03166
03180
03181
03182
03185
03186
03187
03194
03195
03196
03197
03198
03199
03202
03203
03204
03205
03220
03221
03235
03241
03243
03244
03245
03247
03248
03249
03273
03274
03275
03276
03277
03312
03313
03314
03315
03412
03413
03414
03415
72
72
72
72
72
72
72
72
72
72
72
72
72
72
72
63
53, 58, 63
53, 54
54, 58
56, 98
56, 98
48
33, 35
33, 35, 37, 39
37, 39
46
49
43
98
33, 35, 39
43
37, 39
33, 35, 39
37, 39
51
50
50, 51
51
58, 73
59, 73
73
73
73
73
73
98
53, 54, 58, 63,
71
54, 58, 59, 71,
133
32
32, 42
34, 36
34, 36
38
Cat. no Designation
03417 Mounting plate for horizontal NS250 source
changeover system with motor mechanism
03420 Mounting plate for 3-4 vertical fixed NS-INS250
devices with toggles
03421 Mounting plate for 3-4 vertical withdrawable
NS250 devices
03422 Mounting plate for 3-4 vertical fixed NS250 devices
03428 Mounting plate for vertical NS-INS250 source
changeover system with rotary handles
03451 Mounting plate for horizontal fixed NS630 with
toggle
03452 Mounting plate for horizontal fixed NS-INS630 with
toggle, 4P
03453 Mounting plate for horizontal NS630, 3P
03454 Mounting plate for horizontal NS630, 4P
03458 Mounting plate for horizontal NS-INS630 source
03461 Mounting plate for 2 vertical NS630 or 1 vertical
INS630
03462 Mounting plate for horizontal withdrawable NS630,
3P or 4P
03480 Mounting plate for horizontal fixed NS1600 with
toggle or rotary handle, 4P
03482 Mounting plate for vertical fixed NS1600
03483 Mounting plate for withdrawable NS1600-NT
03484 Mounting plate for vertical fixed NT
03500 Mounting plate for NW
03501 Mounting plate for NS3200-INS2500
03538 Mounting plate for horizontal INF400
03539 Mounting plate for horizontal INF630/800
03540 Mounting plate for INF32/40
03541 Mounting plate for INF63-160
03542 Mounting plate for vertical INF250-800
03543 Mounting plate for horizontal INF250
03561 Canalis support
03570 Plain backplate, 36 modules
03571 Slotted mounting plate, 4 modules
03576 Mounting plate for Tego Power
03581 2 universal angle brackets
03584 2 lateral cross-members, W=400mm, for
D=400mm
03586
2 lateral cross-members, W=200mm, for
D=600mm
03587 2 longitudinal cross-members, W=650mm
03590 Rear modular device rail, W=650mm
03593 2 slide rails + angle brackets
03595 System G adapter, W=500mm
03596 System G adapter, W=250mm
03611 Front plate for horizontal NS250 with toggle, 3P
03612 Front plate for horizontal NS250 with toggle, 4P
03613 Front plate for horizontal NS250 with rotary handle
or motor mechanism, 3P
03614 Front plate for horizontal NS250 with rotary handle
or motor mechanism, 4P
03616 Front plate for horizontal NS250 source
03617 Front plate for horizontal INS250
03618 Front plate for horizontal withdrawable NS250
03620 Front plate for 3-4 vertical INS250 devices
03651 Front plate for horizontal fixed or plug-in NS630
with toggle, 3P
with toggle, 4P
with rotary handle or motor mechanism, 3P
Pages
47
33, 43
35, 37, 39
37
46, 48, 49
32
32, 42
34, 36
34, 36
47
46, 48, 49
33, 35, 37, 39,
43
38
29
31
27, 31
27
46
25
28, 40
50
50
50, 51
50, 51
51
50
24, 26, 30
69
59, 62, 70
59, 62, 70
70
59
70, 73, 133
68, 133
68
68
71
69
74
74
32, 34
32, 34
36
36
47
42
38
43
32, 34
32, 34
36
Index
Cat. no Designation
with rotary handle or motor mechanism, 4P
03657 Front plate for horizontal withdrawable NS630
03658 Front plate for horizontal INS630
03659 Front plate for horizontal NS-INS630 source
03661 Front plate for horizontal NS-INS630 complete
source changeover assembly
03663 Front plate for vertical 2NS630
03664 Front plate for vertical fixed or plug-in Vigi 2NS630
with toggle
03665 Front plate for vertical fixed or plug-in Vigi 2NS630
with rotary handle or motor mechanism
03671 Front plate for UA or BA
03687 Front plate for horizontal fixed NS1600 with toggle
or rotary handle, 4P
03690 Front plate for vertical fixed NS1600
03691 Front plate for withdrawable NS1600-NT
03692 Front plate for vertical fixed NT
03710 Front plate for withdrawable NW
03711 Front plate for fixed NW
03713 Front plate for INS1600, 3P
03714 Front plate for INS1600, 4P
03715 Front plate for INS2500, 3P or 4P
03716 Front plate for NS3200
03717 Front plate for IN2500, 3P or 4P
03727 Front plate for horizontal INF250
03728 Front plate for vertical INF250-800
03729 Front plate for horizontal INF400
03730 Front plate for horizontal INF630/800
03801 Plain front plate, 1 module
03802
03803
03804
03805
03806
03807
03808
03811
03812
03813
03814
03815
03816
03817
03890
03891
03895
03900
03901
03902
03903
03904
03907
03908
03910
Pages
36
47
38
42
46, 48
49
33, 35, 37, 39
33, 35, 39
37, 39
47
29
31
27, 31
27
46
25
25
40
40
40
28
40
50
51
50
50
27, 33, 35, 37,
39, 43, 51, 58,
59, 73
Plain front plate, 2 modules
27, 31, 33, 35,
37, 39, 46, 48,
49, 51, 62, 73
25, 27, 28, 31,
33, 35, 37, 39,
40, 46, 51, 58,
73, 133
25, 27, 31, 33,
35, 37, 39, 40,
59, 62, 73
25, 27, 28, 31,
59, 73, 133
27, 31, 59, 73,
133
73
73
Plain front plate, 1 module, W=250mm
73
Plain front plate, 2 modules, W=250mm
73
73
73
73
73
73
Front plate for fan or grill
100
IP30 ventilated front plate, 1 module
101
IP30 ventilated front plate, 3 modules
101
Plain mounting plate for 72x72mm meter
60
Plain mounting plate for 96x96mm meter
60
Mounting plate with cut-out for 72x72mm meter
60
Mounting plate with cut-out for 96x96mm meter
60
Front plate with cut-outs for meter mounting plates 60
Blanking plate, 72x72mm
61
Blanking plate, 96x96mm, for meters
61
Front plate with cut-outs for 72x72mm meters
61
Cat. no Designation
03911 Front plate with cut-outs for 96x96mm meters
03912 Front plate with cut-outs for 144x144mm + 4
72x72mm meters
03914 Front plate with holes for 22mm dia. pushbuttons
and lamps
03916 Front plate for DMB 300
03917 Front plate for DMC 300
03918 Front plate for Powerlogic CM3000-4000
03928 Visor for human/switchboard interface (HSI)
03930 Mounting plate for Vigilohm XM200-300C
03931 Mounting plate for Vigilohm XML308-316
03932 Front plate for Vigilohm XM200-300C
03933 Front plate for Vigilohm XML308-316
03934 Front plate for Vigilohm TR22A+6 72x72mm
meters
03970 Door with cut-outs for power factor correction
equipment, W=650mm
03976 Mounting plate for S or H power factor correction
module
Pages
61, 62
61
61
62
62
62
60
63
63
63
63
63
66
65
04000
04004
04008
04012
04013
04014
04018
04021
04029
04031
04033
04034
04045
04046
04047
04052
04053
04054
04055
04060
04061
04062
04064
04070
04071
04073
04074
04103
04104
04107
04108
04111
04112
04113
04114
04116
04117
04118
04119
04121
04122
04123
04124
04126
Multiclip distribution block, 4P, 80A, 1 row

Multiclip distribution block, 4P, 63A, 1/2 row
Multiclip distribution block, 4P, 160A, 1/2 row
Powerclip busbar connection for 200A Multiclip
distribution block
Rear busbar connection for 200A Multiclip
distribution block
Polybloc distribution block, 1P, 160A
Distribloc 125
Distribloc 160+connections
4 NG-INS125 connections for Distribloc
Multi-stage distribution block, 4P, 160A
Power supply block for horizontal NS250
Universal power supply block, 250A
Connection between vertical NS-INS250 and
universal power supply block
Connection between vertical NS-INS250 in duct
and universal power supply block
Connection between vertical NS-INS400-630 in
duct and universal power supply block
Universal power supply block, 400-630A
Powerclip busbars, 125A, 3P, L=450mm
56, 154
56, 154
56, 155
56, 155
56, 155
56, 155
56, 125
127
151
150
150
56, 148
56, 148
149
152
152
152
152
125
125
125
125
125
125
125
125
124
124
124
124
125
125
125
125
125
125
125
125
125
125
125
125
125
Index
Cat. no
04127
04128
04129
04145
04146
04146
04150
04151
04152
04155
04156
04158
04161
04162
04163
04171
04172
04173
04190
04191
04194
04195
04198
04200
04201
04202
04203
04205
04210
04214
04215
04224
04226
04228
04229
04233
04234
04235
04239
04243
04255
04257
04262
04263
04265
04267
04390
04403
04404
04405
04406
04407
04408
04423
04424
04425
04426
04427
Designation
4 connections, 125A
4 connections 160 A
4 connections, 160A
8 IPxxB covers for Powerclip busbars
12 Powerclip tap-off blocks with 6mm + 10mm
terminals
12 Powerclip tap-off blocks with 16mm terminals
Additional 35mm block, 3P
Additional 35mm block, 4P
20 screws for Powerclip busbars
4 bars with threaded holes, 160A, L=1000mm
4 copper angle brackets, 250A
Rear busbar support
20 M6x20mm bolts for 5mm bars
40 M6x16mm screws for bars with threaded holes,
less than 630A
Rear busbar barrier
Earth bar, 24 modules
Earth bar for direct earth blocks, 12x3mm
2 earth bars, 12 modules
Four-pole auxiliary bus duct
2 supports for earth bar on DIN rail
Kit for neutral bar
4 earth blocks with 12x4mm spring terminals
4 earth blocks with 3x16mm spring terminals
5 Practic raisers
Modular device rail, L=1600mm
Terminal block for auxiliaries
20 voltage tap-offs for tab connectors, M10
Trunking for door, L=2000mm
10 grommets for wiring through front
Flexible trunking for wiring to door
12 horizontal cable straps
4 covers for horizontal cable straps
12 horizontal trunking supports
4 horizontal trunking sections, L=450mm, +
supports
12 vertical cable straps
2 covers for vertical cable straps, L=1000mm
12 vertical trunking supports
Vertical trunking, L=2000mm
Rf 04390 dans fichier 100F22200.rtf pas trouv
dans indexe
Polypact for fixed devices with toggles, 3P
Polypact for fixed devices with toggles, 4P
Polypact for fixed or plug-in devices with flexible
connection, 3P
Polypact for fixed or plug-in devices with flexible
connection, 4P
Polypact for fixed or plug-in devices without
connection, 3P
Polypact for fixed or plug-in devices without
connection, 4P
250A connection for horizontal fixed NS250 with
toggle, 3P
toggle, 4P
Connection transfer assembly for fixed NS250 with
toggle, 3P
toggle, 4P
250A connection for horizontal NS-INS250, 3P
Pages
125
125
125
124, 127
127
125
125
125
125
125, 151
125, 151
125
127
127
127
127
127
127
127
127
127
127
127
131
131
131
163
131
131
131
131
72
71, 133
163
130
163
163
163
56, 161
56, 162
56, 162
56, 163
56, 161
56, 161
162
56, 163
159
33, 156
33, 43, 156
35, 37, 156
35, 37, 156
33, 35, 37, 156
33, 35, 37, 43,
156
32
32
32
Cat. no
04428
04429
04430
04453
04640
04641
04642
Designation
250A connection for horizontal NS-INS250, 4P
Connection transfer assembly, 250A, 3P
toggle, 3P
toggle, 4P
toggle, 3P
toggle, 4P
1000A connection for horizontal fixed NS with
1000A connection for horizontal fixed NS with
1250A connection for vertical fixed NT, 3P
1250A connection for vertical withdrawable
NS1600-NT, 3P
NS1600-NT, 4P
1600A connection for INS1600, 3P
1600A connection for INS1600, 4P
Connection transfer assembly for horizontal
NS1600, 3P
Connection transfer assembly for horizontal
NS1600, 4P
1250A connection for vertical fixed NS1600, 3P
NS1600-NT, 3P
NS1600-NT, 4P
Linergy vertical busbar, 630A
PE bar with holes, 25x5mm
PE bar with holes, 50x5mm
Vertical busbar with holes, 60x5mm
Horizontal busbar without holes, 60x5mm
1000A connection plate for 5mm horizontal bar to
lateral Linergy busbar
3200A connection plate for 10mm horizontal bars
to vertical flat bar
Joint for 50/60mm horizontal busbars
Joint for 80/100mm horizontal busbars
Mounting hardware for joint > 80mm
04651
04652
Support for lateral vertical Linergy busbars

Support for rear vertical Linergy busbars
04454
04455
04456
04459
04460
04473
04474
04475
04476
04477
04478
04481
04482
04483
04484
04485
04486
04487
04488
04489
04490
04491
04492
04502
04503
04504
04505
04506
04512
04515
04516
04518
04525
04526
04528
04536
04538
04545
04546
04548
04550
04634
04635
04636
04637
32
34, 36, 38, 42
Pages
34, 36, 38, 42
32, 34, 36, 38
32, 34, 36, 38
32
32
32
32
32, 34, 36, 38
32, 34, 36, 38
29
29
27
27
27, 31
27, 31
40
40
29
29
31
31
31
31
27
27
27, 31
27, 31
112, 114, 122
112, 114, 122
112, 114
112, 114
112, 114
122
122
118, 120
118, 120
119, 121
119, 121
119, 121
106
106
107
107
107
107
113
113, 115, 120
113, 115, 119,
120, 121
119
106, 107
106, 107
113, 115, 119,
120, 121
113
114
Index
Cat. no
04653
04656
04657
04661
04662
Designation
Support for rear vertical 5/10mm busbars
Linergy vertical PEN kit
3 Linergy vertical PE supports
Fixed support for lateral vertical 5/10mm busbars
Free support for 5/10mm busbars
04663
04664
04667
04669
04671
04672
04691
04693
04694
04703
04704
04711
04712
04713
04714
04715
04716
04725
04726
04735
04736
04742
04743
04746
04751
04752
04753
04759
04766
04767
04772
Bottom support for lateral vertical 5/10mm busbars

Support for 5/10mm horizontal busbars
2 horizontal PE supports
100 5mm mounting chocks for busbars
Support mounting hardware for bars > 80mm
2 connection plates for horizontal/vertical PE bars
Spacing rods for edgewise bars
Connection support, 70mm between centres
Connection support, 115mm between centres
Canalis interface, 1600A, 3P
Canalis interface, 1600A, 4P
Canalis connection for front-connected NS-NT, 3P
Canalis connection for front-connected NS-NT, 4P
Canalis connection for rear-connected NS-NT, 3P
Canalis connection for rear-connected NS-NT, 4P
Canalis connection, 1600A, NW, 3P
Insulated flexible bar 20x2mm, L=1800mm
20 M8 torque nuts
20 bolts for lug connection to Linergy busbars
20 bolts for bar connection to Linergy busbars
20 washers for insulated flexible bars,
diameter=20mm
diameter=24mm
diameter=28mm
20 bolts for bars, M8x20mm
12 Linergy markers
Polypact tooth-caps
04773
04774
04782
04783
04784
04785
04786
04787
04788
04794
04809
04842
04844
04851
04852
04853
04854
04861
04863
04871
04901
04911
04913
04914
Pages
120, 121
123
122
118, 119
25, 27, 28, 31,
40, 106, 107,
118, 119, 120,
121
118, 119
106, 107
122
120, 121, 130
107
122
26, 30
26, 30, 40
24, 28
26, 30
26, 30
26, 30
26, 30
26, 30
26, 30
24
24
24
24
24
24
128
128
128
128
128
128
130
115, 122
115
115, 130
115, 130
115, 130
130
130
130
130
130
130
130
115
33, 35, 37, 43,
157
Connection cover for horizontal fixed NS1600
29
Rear connection cover for horizontal fixed NS1600 29
Front connection cover for vertical fixed NS1600 30, 135
Front connection cover for vertical NS1600-NT
26, 30, 135
Rear connection cover for vertical fixed NS1600
30, 135
Rear connection cover for vertical NS1600-NT
26, 30, 135
Front connection cover for NW
24, 135
Rear connection cover for NW
24, 135
Canalis cover
24, 26, 30, 135
Form 3 horizontal partition
139
Inter-cubicle partition, D=400mm
67, 144
Form 2 cover for horizontal busbars, W=300mm, 137
D=400mm
Form 2 cover for horizontal busbars, W=400mm, 137
D=400mm
Cat. no Designation
04916 Form 2 cover for horizontal busbars, W=650mm,
D=400mm
D=400mm
04921 Form 2 front barrier for lateral vertical busbars
04922 Form 2 side barrier for lateral vertical busbars
04924 Form 2 restoration kit for side barrier cut-out
04926 Cover for connection to vertical device > 800A,
W=650mm
04927 Additional cover for connection, L=650mm,
D=600mm
04931 Inter-cubicle partition, D=600mm
D=600mm
D=600mm
D=600mm
D=600mm
04943 Rear support for Form 3 partition
04946 Form 4 backplate for front connection, D=600mm
04951 Form 4 gland plate, 3 or 4 modules
04952 Form 4 gland plate, 5 or 6 modules
04953 Form 4 cover for connection transfer assembly, 3
to 5 modules
04954 Form 4 cover for connection transfer assembly, 4
to 6 modules
04955 Form 3 vertical partition for rear connection, 3 or 4
modules
04956 Form 3 vertical partition for rear connection, 5 or 6
modules
Pages
137
137
137
137
137
25, 27, 28, 31,
40, 134
25, 28, 134
67, 144
137
137
137
137
139
142
142, 143
142, 143
142, 143
142, 143
139
139
08000
08403
08404
08406
08407
08408
08433
08434
08436
08438
08453
08454
08456
08458
08476
08483
08484
08486
08487
08488
08493
08494
08496
08497
08498
08506
08513
08514
08516
08518
08523
08524
08526
08528
08536
08538
Framework, W=300mm, D=400mm

Framework, W=650+150mm, D=400mm
IP30 plain roof, W=300mm, D=400mm
IP30 ventilated roof, W=650mm, D=400mm
IP55 plain gland plate, W=300mm, D=400mm
IP55 plain gland plate, W=650+150mm,
D=400mm
IP30 2-part gland plate, W=300mm, D=400mm
IP30 2-part gland plate, W=650+150mm,
D=400mm
Hinged front plate support frame, W=650mm
IP30 plain door, W=300mm
IP30 transparent door, W=650mm
86
86
86
86
86
89
89
89
89
91
91
91
91
66, 101
92
92
92
92
92
92
92
92
92
92
86
88, 89
88, 89
88, 89
88, 89
90, 91
90, 91
90, 91
90, 91
88
88
Index
Cat. no
08546
08548
08556
08558
08584
08593
08594
08603
08604
08606
08607
08608
08633
08634
08636
08638
08653
08654
08656
08658
08676
08683
08684
08686
08687
08688
08693
08694
08696
08697
08698
08700
08701
08702
08703
08704
08707
08711
08713
08717
08719
08720
08721
08723
08724
08726
08728
08733
08734
08736
08738
08743
08744
08746
08748
08750
08755
08756
08760
08765
08773
08774
08776
08778
Designation
IP30 cover frame, W=650mm
IP30 cover frame, W=800mm
Front plate hinge kit
IP30 door with cut-out for human/switchboard
interface (HSI), W=300mm
IP30 door with cut-out for human/switchboard
interface (HSI), W=400mm
Framework, W=650+150mm, D=600mm
IP30 ventilated roof, W=650mm, D=600mm
IP55 plain gland plate, W=650+150mm,
D=600mm
IP30 2-part gland plate, W=650+150mm,
D=600mm
4 lifting rings
Stabiliser kit
Levelling kit
False floor fixing kit
Floor/wall fixing kit
Door stopper
IP31 sealing kit
IP30 right-angle kit
IP55 sealing kit for side-by-side combinations
Double depth combination kit
2 side plates for plinth, D=400mm
2 side plates for plinth, D=600mm
Plinth, H=100mm, W=300mm, D=400mm
IP30 rear panel, W=300mm
2 IP30 side panels, W=400mm
2 IP55 combination side panels, W=400mm
4 cable tie supports, W=300mm
Pages
90
90
88
88
98
88
88
86
86
86
86
86
89
89
89
89
91
91
91
91
66, 101
92
92
92
92
92
92
92
92
92
92
94
94
95
94
95
93
89
93
87
87
92
92
92
92
92
92
89
89
89
89
91
91
91
91
89
91
89, 91
89
91
160
160
160
160
Cat. no
08794
08796
08900
08903
08904
08905
08906
08907
08908
08910
08911
08913
08914
08915
08916
08917
08918
08921
08930
08932
08933
08938
08940
08941
08942
08943
08944
08945
08946
08947
08948
08949
08950
08951
08952
08953
08955
08961
08962
08963
08964
08965
08986
08987
08988
08989
08990
08992
08993
08994
08998
Designation
4 cable tie supports, D=400mm
4 cable tie supports, D=600mm
Switchboard identification plate
12 adhesive label holders, H=24mm, W=432mm
Earthing braid, 6mm
Earthing wire, 6mm
12 clip-on labels, 18x35mm
12 engraving plates, 18x35mm
20 screws + wing nuts for framework
Standard handle without insert
EURO handle without insert
ASSA handle without insert
Handle padlocking kit
Barrel lock no. 405
Barrel lock no. 455
Barrel lock no. 1242E
Barrel lock no. 3113A
Barrel lock no. 2433A
DIN double bar insert
Screwdriver slot insert
6.5mm male triangle insert
7mm male triangle insert
6mm male square insert
6mm female square insert
Touch-up paint brush
Touch-up spray paint
Adhesive drawing holder
Switchboard lighting
Switchboard portable lamp
Roof fan
Fan
Grill with filter
5 standard filters
5 fine filters
Resistor, 55W
Resistor, 90W
Resistor, 250W
Thermostat
Pages
160
160
99
99
99
99
99
99
99
97
97
99
99
99
99
99
99
65, 87
96
96
96
96
96
96
96
96
96
96
96
96
96
96
96
96
96
96
96
97
97
97
97
97
66, 101
100
100
100
100
101
101
101
101
13000
13735
13736
10 self-adhesive label sheets for common symbols 99

10 self-adhesive label sheets for special symbols 99
System P contents
Electrical switchboards up to 3200 A

Examples of switchboard configurations
The functions of an electrical switchboard
8
10
18
Cat. no. selection
20
Typical configuration with catalogue numbers

Determining catalogue numbers
20
22
Functional units
24
Masterpact NW08 to NW32

Masterpact NT06 to NT16
Compact NS1600b to 3200
Compact NS630b to NS1000
Compact NS100 to NS630
Interpact INS-INV630b to 2500
Interpact INS-INV250 to 630
Source-changeover systems Compact / Masterpact
Manual source-changeover system
Remote-operated source-changeover systems
Manual source-changeover systems
Fupact INF
Modular devices
NG125 circuit breakers
NSA125/160 circuit breakers
INS40/160 switch-disconnectors
Industrial control devices
Human-switchboard interface
Power factor correction equipment
Other devices
Fixing accessories
Fixing accessories reserve space
System G adapter
24
26
28
29
30
32
40
42
44
46
47
Enclosures
76
IP30/31/55 cubicles
Presentation
Cover panels
Cubicles
Installation accessories
Enclosure accessories
Enclosure accessories switchboard lighting
Front plate accessories
Air-conditioning accessories
76
82
86
94
96
97
98
100
48
50
52
58
60
64
68
72
73
74
Electrical switchboards
up to 3200 A
System P
Presentation
The Prisma Plus functional

system
PD390342
The Prisma Plus functional system can be used for all types of low-voltage
distribution switchboards (main, subdistribution and final) up to 3200 A, in
commercial and industrial environments.
PD390321
Switchboard design is very simple.

A metal structure
The switchboard is made up of one or more frameworks combined side-by-side or
back-to-back, on which a complete selection of cover panels and doors can be
mounted.
A distribution system
Horizontal busbars or vertical busbars positioned in a lateral compartment or at the
rear of the cubicle are used to distribute electricity throughout the switchboard.
Complete functional units
Each device is part of a functional unit comprising:
b a dedicated mounting plate for device installation
b a front plate to block direct access to live parts
b prefabricated busbar connections
b devices for on-site connections.
Each functional unit contributes to a function in the switchboard.
The functional units are modular and are arranged rationally, one on top of another,
within the enclosure.
The system includes everything required for functional unit mounting, supply and onsite connection.
The components of the Prisma Plus system and those of the functional units in
particular have been designed and tested taking into account device characteristics.
This design approach ensures a high degree of reliability in system operation and
optimum safety for personnel.
Functional units are arranged rationally, one on top of another.
System P
Electrical switchboards
up to 3200 A
Presentation
b Applications:
v indoor cubicles for main or subdistribution low-voltage switchboards for
commercial and industrial applications
v supplied in kit form, can be combined side-by-side and back-to-back
b rated operational current: 3200 A
b steel sheet metal
b electrophoresis treatment + hot-polymerised polyester epoxy powder, white colour
RAL 9001.
b can be dismantled
b can be combined side-by-side and back-to-back
b degree of protection:
v IP30: with IP30 cover panels including a door or a cover frame
v IP31: with IP30 cover panels including a door + gasket
v IP55: with IP55 cover panels
b degree of protection against mechanical impacts:
v IK07: with cover frame
v IK08: with IP30 door
v IK10: with IP55 door
b framework dimensions:
v four widths:
- W = 300: cable compartment
- W = 400: cable compartment or device compartment
- W = 650: device compartment or cable compartment
- W = 800: device compartment with busbar compartment or cable compartment
v two depths: 400, 600 mm
v height: 2000 mm
b indoor cubicles
Advantages of Prisma Plus

switchboards
A dependable electrical installation

The total compatibility of Schneider devices with the Prisma Plus system is a key
advantage in ensuring a high level of installation dependability.
System design has been validated by type tests as per standard IEC 60439-1 and
benefits from the combined experience of Schneider customers over many years.
PD390338
Prisma Plus enclosures
An upgradeable electrical installation

Thanks to modular design, Prisma Plus switchboards can be modified easily to
integrate new functional units as needed.
Maintenance operations, carried out with the switchboard de-energised, are fast and
straight-forward due to easy access to devices.
Total safety for personnel
Work in a switchboard must be carried out by authorised persons in compliance with
all applicable safety regulations.
To increase the safety of personnel, devices are installed behind protective front
plates; only the operating handles are accessible. Additional internal protection
(partitions, barriers) is available to create form 2, 3 or 4 separation to protect against
direct contacts with live parts.
Terminal shields are mandatory for installation of Compact NS and INS/INV devices
in Prisma Plus enclosures.
Electrical switchboards built using the Prisma Plus functional system and
Schneider recommendations fully comply with international standard
IEC 60439-1.
Electrical characteristics
Use of the components in the Prisma Plus functional system ensures the creation of
switchboards complying with standards IEC 50298, EN 50298, IEC 60439-1 and
EN 60439-1, as well as local versions with the following electrical characteristics:
b rated insulation level of main busbars: 1000 V
b rated operational current Ie: 3200 A
b rated peak withstand current Ipk: 187 k
b rated short-time withstand current Icw: 85 kA rms / 1 second
b frequency: 50/60 Hz.
Examples of switchboard
configurations
System P
Presentation
PD390342
Incomer
Compact NS1000 4P
Fixed, front connection
Toggle
Supply via cables
Distribution
Linergy busbars
Outgoing devices
Compact NS250
Horizontal
Toggle
Supply
Connection
Compact NS250
Vertical
Toggle
Supply
Connection
Multi 9 devices
Supply
Cable running
Connection
Prefabricated connection
Transferred to cable compartment,
W = 300 mm
Polypact distribution block

Direct via cables
80 A Multiclip
200 A Multiclip
Comb busbars
Cable straps
Trunking
Terminal block in the cable
compartment, W = 300 mm
PD390323
Cable compartment
W = 800 mm
D = 400 mm
W = 300 mm
D = 400 mm
PD390322
Enclosure
Cubicle for devices
Prefabricated connection between Linergy

busbars and an NS250.
10
Prefabricated connection between an

incoming device and Linergy busbars.
PD390325
PD390324
Fixed Compact NS1000, front connected with

cables.
Connection transfer assembly for connection

in a cable compartment.
configurations
System P
PD390327
PD390326
PD390338
Presentation
Supply of a row of Multi 9 devices by a 200 A

Multiclip.
PD390329
PD390328
Two vertically mounted Compact NS250

devices supplied by a Polypact.
A device supplying a group of outgoers

via an 80 A Multiclip.
Terminal block for Multi 9 devices in the cable

compartment.
11
configurations
System P
Presentation
PD390368
Incomer
Compact NS630 4P
Motor mechanism
Direct supply via cables
Distribution
Powerclip busbars
Outgoing devices
Multi 9 devices
Supply
Cable running
Connection
80 A Multiclip
200 A Multiclip
Comb busbars
Cable straps
Trunking
Terminal block + earth bar at
bottom of the switchboard
Enclosure
12
PD390563
PD390562
Cubicle, W = 650 mm, D = 400 mm
configurations
System P
PD390367
Presentation
13
configurations
System P
Presentation
PD390374
Incomer
Compact NS1000 4P
Toggle
Supply via Canalis
Distribution
Linergy busbars
Outgoing devices
Compact NS250
Horizontal
Toggle
Supply
Connection
Compact NS400
Horizontal
Toggle
Supply
Connection
W = 300 mm
W = 300 mm
Multi 9 devices
Supply
Cable running
Comb busbars
Cable straps
Trunking
Connection
Terminal block at bottom of cubicle
Motor protection devices
Supply
Comb busbars
Cable running
Cable straps
Trunking
Connection
Cable compartment
14
W = 800/650 mm
D = 400 mm
W = 300 mm
D = 400 mm
PD390373
Enclosure
Cubicle for devices
configurations
System P
Presentation
PD390376
Incomer
Masterpact NT1000 3P
Drawout, front connection
Supply via Canalis
Distribution
Linergy busbars
Outgoing devices
Compact NS250
Vertical
Toggle
Supply
Connection
Compact NS250
Horizontal
Toggle
Supply
Connection
Compact NS400
Horizontal
Toggle
Supply
Connection

Direct via cables
W = 400 mm
W = 400 mm
80 A Multiclip
Comb busbars
Cable running
Cable straps
Trunking
Connection
Supply
Comb busbars
Cable running
Cable straps
Trunking
Connection
PD390375
Multi 9 devices
Supply
Enclosure
Cubicle for devices
Cable compartment
W = 800/650 mm
D = 400 mm
W = 300/400 mm
D = 400 mm
15
configurations
System P
DD382274
Presentation
Incomer
Outgoing devices
Masterpact NW/20 4P
Drawout, front connection
Supply via Canalis
Distribution
Double vertical flat 10 mm busbars
Horizontal flat 10 mm busbars
Enclosure
Cubicle for devices
Cable compartment
16
W = 800/800 mm
D = 600 mm
W = 300 mm
D = 600 mm
Compact NS
Horizontal
Toggle
Supply
Connection
Compact NS250
Vertical
Toggle
Supply
Connection
Compact NS400
Horizontal
Rotary handle
Supply
Connection
Multi 9 devices
Supply
Cable running
Connection
Supply
Cable running
Flexible bars
Direct via cables

Direct via cables
Flexible bars
Transferred to cable compartment, W = 300 mm
200 A Multiclip
Trunking
Terminal block in the cable compartment, W = 300 mm
Comb busbars
Cable straps
configurations
System P
DD382278
Presentation
Incomer
Outgoing devices
Masterpact NW32 4P
Drawout, rear connection
Supply via Canalis
Distribution
Vertical Linergy busbars
Double horizontal flat 10 mm busbars
Enclosure
Cubicle for devices
W = 800/800 mm
D = 1000 mm
Compact NS250
Vertical
Fixed, rear connection
Toggle
Supply
Connection
Compact NS250
Horizontal
Toggle
Supply
Connection
Compact NS400
Horizontal
Toggle
Supply
Connection
Multi 9 devices
Supply
Cable running
Supply
Cable running

Direct via cables
Direct via cables
Direct via cables
200 A Multiclip
Trunking
Comb busbars
Cable straps
17
System P
The functions of an electrical

switchboard
PD390564
Presentation
Incoming function
Connection via Canalis
Distribution function
Linergy busbars in busbar compartment,
W = 150 mm
Horizontal busbars
See page 26
Powerclip busbars
See page 124
Device compartment, W = 650 mm
See page 86
Connection compartment, W = 300 mm
See page 86
Connection compartment, W = 400 mm
See page 86
1
2
18
See page 108
See page 106
System P
The functions of an electrical

switchboard
PD390668
Presentation
Hinged front plate support frame
See page 86
Roof
See page 89
Rear panels
See page 89
Front doors
See page 88
Gland plates
See page 92
Side panels
See page 89
19
Cat. no. selection

System P
Typical configuration with

catalogue numbers
PD390669
Catalogue numbers
Framework, W = 800, D = 400
08407 See page 86
14 Front plate for vertical NS630b/ 03690 See page 31
Framework, W = 300, D = 400
08403 See page 86
15 Connection for fixed NS630b/
04486 See page 31
Side panel, D = 400
08750 See page 89
16
04424 See page 32
Rear panel, W = 800
08738 See page 89
17
Rear panel, W = 300
08733 See page 89
18
Roof, W = 800, D = 400
08438 See page 89
19
Roof, W = 300, D = 400
08433 See page 89
20
1600
IP30 gland plate, W = 800,

08497 See page 92
D = 400
08493 See page 92
9 IP30 gland plate, W = 300,
D = 400
10 Hinged front plate support frame 08506 See page 86
11 Transparent door, W = 800
08538 See page 88
12 Plain door, W = 300
08513 See page 88
13 Mounting plate for vertical fixed 03482 See page 31

NS630b/1600
20
1250, 4P
Connection for horizontal
NS250
Connection transfer assembly
for NS250
Polypact for 4P fixed NS250
devices with toggles
Powerclip busbars, 250 A, 4P,
L = 1000
200 A Multiclip, 4P
04426 See page 32

04404 See page 156
04122 See page 125
04014 See page 155
21 80 A Multiclip, 4P
04004 See page 154
22 12 horizontal cable straps
04239 See page 161
23 4 covers for horizontal cable
04243 See page 162
straps
24 4 horizontal trunking sections,
60 x 30
25 1000 A Linergy busbars
26 Linergy busbar supports
04257 See page 163

04504 See page 112
04651 See page 113
Typical configuration with

catalogue numbers
Cat. no. selection

System P
PD390336
Catalogue numbers
21
Cat. no. selection

System P
Starting with the electrical

diagram: IP30 switchboard
DD380886
Catalogue numbers
NS250
NS250
INS
NS250
NS1000
Front conn. using cables
Device installation
DD381987
Device
Front
conn.
Arc-chute
cover
Vert.
conn.
adapters
Cable-lug
adapters
GV2
Cable
cover
Spacing
rod
Fixed device
Device
No of Mounting
vert. plate
mod
Upstream
front plate
Cut-out
front plate
Downstream
front plate
Fixed device
front conn.
Connection
DD380874
Installation
DD380875
DD380824
Order:
b mounting plates and
front plates
b distribution block
b connection
accessories.
Linergy BB connection
DD380876
DD380877
22
Connection
DD381988
DD381989
Device
DD381991
Device
Prefabricated
connection
Capot for BB
connectors
No of vertical
modules
Mounting plate
Cut-out front plate
Fixed Compact NS and Vigicompact NS
Front connection
Long terminal
shields (set of 2)
Device
or Connection transfer
assembly
Rear connection
Short terminal shields
(set of 2)
Fixed Compact NS
DD381992
2
DD380873
DD380823
Order:
front plates
b busbar connections
b connection
accessories.
Installation
Front
connectors
Fixed device
Device
DD381993
see page 32
1
DD380872
Install the Compact devices
Device
Device
DD381994
DD380871
DD381990
DD380870
DD380822
Order:
b connection
components
front plates
b busbar connections.
C60
see page 30
DD380878
Install the incomer
DD381986
C60
No. of
devices
No. of
vertical
modules
Mounting
plate
Cut-out
front plate
Upstream
front plate
Downstream
front plate
Fixed, Compact NS
No. of devices
Polypact with connection
Device
Front connection
Long terminal shields
(set of 2)
Rear connection
(set of 2)
Cat. no. selection

System P
Multi 9
see page 53
Device
No. of
vertical
modules
Modular rail
Modular front plate
All Multi 9 devices

All supply systems (comb busbars,
Multiclip) with cable straps
and trunking sections
Multi 9 devices
Connection via 63/80 A Multiclip or
comb busbars with cable straps
GV2 circuit breaker

see page 58
Device
No. of
vertical
modules
Useful
rail length
Modular rail
Cut-out front plate
DD381919
DD381996
DD380825
Order the mounting

plates and front plates
taking into account:
b supply to the rows
b cable running.
1
DD380879
Install the modular devices
DD381995
Catalogue numbers
b Multiclip distribution block, see page 154

b cable running, see page 161
Determine the size of the switchboard

b count the number
of modules occupied
b determine the number
of cubicles
b order the additional
plain front plate.
The capacity of a cubicle is 36 modules.
Linergy busbars
500 mm wide plain front plate
Permissible Linergy busbars

current (A) for switchboard
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
10mm
6mm
10mm
6mm
10mm
6mm
10mm
Powerclip busbars
see page 125
Hinged front plate support

frame
Doors
DD382002
DD382003
Frameworks
DD382004
DD380827
Side panels
Rooves
Plinth, gland plates,

finishing parts, etc.
DD382005
Rear panels
DD382006
No. of supports
Icw (kA rms / 1 s)
Cat. no.
Designation
Powerclip busbars
Three-pole
Four-pole
W
W
W
W
Framework width
Cat. no.
W
W
W
W
W
Designation
Cat. no.
Hinged front plate support frame, W = 650 mm
Cat. no.
Designation
Transparent door
Plain door
DD382007
Select the enclosures
Cat. no.
Busbar supports
DD380881
6mm
DD3820001
DD382000
DD381997
Plain front plate

see page 73
DD381998
1 cubicle
DD380880
DD380826
Plan the distribution system
32 modules
W
W
W
W
Cat. no.
Designation
Rear panel
W
W
W
W
Designation
Set of two side panels
Cat. no.
D
D
Cat. no.
Designation
IP30 roof, D = 400 mm
W
W
23
Functional units
System P
Catalogue numbers
Device
Vertical rear
connectors
DD380830
DD380838
Cable connection
DD380790
Front connection
Terminal extension bar

support
Cable cover
04694 x 2
04861
Fixed/drawout device
b
NW08/32
Device
Vertical rear
connectors
DD380832
DD380831
DD380830
DD380838
DD380791
Canalis connection
Terminal
extension
bar support
Canalis
support
Canalis/
device
interface +
connection
Canalis
cover
04694 x 2
04694 x 2
04694 x 2
04694 x 2
04694 x 2
04694 x 2
03561
03561
03561
03561
03561
03561
04715
04716
04725
04726
04735
04736
04871 + 04861
04871 + 04861
04871 + 04861
04871 + 04861
04871 + 04861
04871 + 04861
NW08/16
NW20/25
NW32
b
b
b
b
b
b
Device
Vertical rear
connectors
DD380830
DD380838
Cable connection
DD380792
Rear connection
3P
4P
3P
4P
3P
4P

support
Cable cover
04694 x 2
04863
NW08/32
Device
Vertical rear
connectors
DD380832
DD380831
DD380830
DD380838
DD380793
Canalis connection
Terminal
extension
bar support
Canalis
support
Canalis/
device
interface +
connection
Canalis
cover
04694 x 2
04694 x 2
04694 x 2
04694 x 2
04694 x 2
04694 x 2
03561
03561
03561
03561
03561
03561
04715
04716
04725
04726
04735
04736
04871 + 04863
04871 + 04863
04871 + 04863
04871 + 04863
04871 + 04863
04871 + 04863
NW08/16 3P
4P
NW20/25 3P
4P
NW32
3P
4P
24
b
b
b
b
b
b
Functional units
System P
Catalogue numbers
Device
DD380835
DD380834
DD380833
DD380836
DD380644
Device installation
No. of Mounting
vert. plate
mod.
Cut-out
front plate
Upstream
front plate
Downstream
front plate
03804
03805 +
03804 x 2
03805
03805
Fixed device
NW08/16
front conn.
cables
Canalis
18
27
03500
03500
03711
03711
NW08/16
rear conn.
cables
Canalis
14
16
03500
03500
03711
03711
NW20/32
front conn.
cables
Canalis
19
28
03500
03500
03711
03711
NW20/32
rear conn.
cables
Canalis
14
16
03500
03500
03711
03711
NW08/16
rear conn.
cables
Canalis
cables
Canalis
19
27
15
17
03500
03500
03500
03500
03710
03710
03710
03710
NW20/32
front conn.
cables
Canalis
20
28
03500
03500
03710
03710
NW20/32
rear conn.
cables
Canalis
15
17
03500
03500
03710
03710
03805
03804 +
03803
03805
03804 +
03805 x 2
03805
03805
03805
03804 +
03803
Drawout device
NW08/16
front conn.
03805
03805
03805
03804 +
03803
03805
03805 +
03804 x 2
03805
03805
03805
03804 +
03803
Device
Front
connectors
DD380840
DD380839
DD380837
Flat or Linergy busbars
DD380681
Distribution
03804
03804 x 3
Connection
Free support for Cover for BB

BB connection
connection
must be made
04662 x 2 (1)
NW08/16
3P
(2)
4P
must be made
04662 x 2 (1)
(2)
NW20/32
3P
must be made
04662 x 2 (1)
(2)
4P
must be made
04662 x 2 (1)
DD380646
(2)
04926 +
04927
04926 +
04927
04926 +
04927
04926 +
04927
(1) For an Icw u 75 kA rms, use three free supports (04662 x 3).
(2) For the connection to flat busbars > 1600 A, order one joint per phase:
v 1 joint for busbars, W = 50/60 mm (04640)
v 1 joint for busbars, W = 80/100 mm (04641)
Note: To make measurements:
b install the CTs preferably upstream, on the supply terminal extension bars
b or install the CTs on the horizontal busbars (busbar connection). In this case, add one module
and a plain front plate (03801)
b or install a Micrologic control unit capable of displaying the values.
Selection of Linergy busbars: see page 112.
Selection of flat busbars: see page 118.
25
Functional units
System P

Toggle and motor mechanism
Catalogue numbers
Device
Front
conn.
Arc-chute
cover
Vert. conn. Cable-lug

adapters
adapters
b
b
b
b
47335
47336
47335
47336
33642
33643
33642
33643
DD380845
DD380844
DD380843
DD380842
DD380841
Cable connection
DD380794
Front connection
Spacing
rods
Cable
cover
04691
04691
04852
04852
04852
04852
04691
04691
04852
04852
04852
04852
Fixed device
NT06/10
NT12/16
3P
4P
3P
4P
33644
33645
Drawout device
NT06/10
NT12/16
3P
4P
3P
4P
b
b
b
b
33642
33643
33642
33643
33644
33645
DD380847
DD380848
DD380846
DD380842
DD380841
DD380795
Canalis connection
Front
conn.
Arc-chute
cover
Canalis
support
Canalis
interfaces
Canalis/
device
connection
Canalis
cover
3P
47335
03561
04703
04711
4P
47336
03561
04704
04712
04871 +
04852
04871 +
04852
Device
Fixed device
NT06/12
Drawout device
NT06/12
03561
04703
04711
4P
03561
04704
04712
04871 +
04852
04871 +
04852
Device
Vertical rear
connectors

support
DD380850
Cable connection
DD380849
DD380796
Rear connection
3P
Cable cover
b
NT06/16
04693 x 2
04854
Device
Vertical
rear
conn.
DD380847
DD380848
DD380846
DD380850
DD380849
DD380797
Canalis connection
Terminal
extension
bar
support
Canalis
support
Canalis
interfaces
Canalis/
device
connection
Canalis
cover
04871 +
04854
04871 +
04854
NT06/16
26
3P
04693 x 2
03561
04703
04713
4P
04693 x 2
03561
04704
04714
Functional units
System P

Toggle and motor mechanism
Catalogue numbers
Device
DD380854
DD380853
DD380852
DD380836
DD380647
Device installation
No. of Mounting
vert. plate
mod.
Cut-out
front plate
Upstream
front plate
Downstream
front plate
03803
03803
Fixed device
NT06/10
front conn.
cables
Canalis
12
17
03484
03484
03692
03692
NT12
front conn.
cables
Canalis
14
17
03484
03484
03692
03692
NT16
front conn.
NT06/16
rear conn.
cables
14
03484
03692
03802
03804 +
03803
03804
03804 +
03803
03804
cables
Canalis
11
16
03484
03484
03692
03692
03801
03806
03803
03803
03803
03803
03803
03803
03803
Drawout device
cables
Canalis
13
18
03483
03483
03691
03691
NT12
front conn.
cables
Canalis
15
18
03483
03483
03691
03691
NT16
front conn.
NT06/16
rear conn.
cables
15
03483
03691
03802
03804 +
03803
03804
03804 +
03803
03804
cables
Canalis
11
16
03483
03483
03691
03691
03805
03803
03803
03803
03803
03803
Device
DD380856
DD380855
Linergy busbars
DD380648
Distribution
NT06/10
front conn.
Front connectors Prefabricated

connection
Cover for BB
connection
b
b
b
b
04926
04926
04926
04926
Fixed device
NT06/12
NT16
3P
4P
3P
4P
04475
04476
04489
04490
Drawout device
3P
b
04477
04926
4P
b
04478
04926
NT16
3P
b
04491
04926
4P
b
04492
04926
b install the CTs on the horizontal busbars (busbar connection); in this case, an additional
module is required; add a plain front plate (03801)
NT06/12
Device
DD380840
DD380857
Flat busbars
DD380855
DD380649
Front connectors Connection

BB connection connection
04662 x 2
Fixed device
NT06/16
must be made
04926
Drawout device
NT06/16
b
must be made
04662 x 2
04926
27
Functional units
System P
Catalogue numbers
Device
DD380830
DD380851
Front connection using cables
DD380798
Connection
Front
connectors
Verticalconnection
adapters
Terminal
extension bar
support
Cubicle depth
(mm)
b
b
b
b
b
b
33975
33976
33975
33976
04694
04694
04694
04694
04694
04694
400
400
600
600
600
600
Fixed device
NS1600b
NS2000/2500
NS3200
3P
4P
3P
4P
3P
4P
NS3200.
Device installation
DD381646
Device
No. of
vertical
modules
Mounting
plate
Cut-out front Upstream

plate
front plate
Downstream
front plate
14
03501
03716
03805
Fixed device
NS1600b/3200
03803
NS1600b.
Distribution
DD381647
Device
Connection
Free support for

BB connection
Cover for BB connection
Fixed device
NS1600b/3200
must be made 04662 x 2
04926 + 04927
NS1600b.
28
Functional units
System P

Horizontal mounting
Toggle and rotary handle
Catalogue numbers
Connection
Front connection
Connection transfer
assembly + cover
Device
Rear connection
Rear connection cover
Fixed Compact NS
3P
04483 (1)
04844
4P
04484 (1)
04844
(1) Three 300 mm or six 185 mm cables can be connected per phase with lugs that are not of
the two-metal type.
NS630b/1000
Connection transfer assembly.
Installation
DD380690
Device
No. of vertical modules Mounting plate
Cut-out front plate
Fixed Compact NS
NS630b/1000
Distribution
3P/4P 7
03687
Connection cover
Arc-chute cover
04842
04842
33596
33597
Connection cover
Arc-chute cover
04842
04842
33596
33597
Linergy busbars
Device
DD380691
03480
Prefabricated
connection
Fixed Compact NS
NS630b/1000
3P
04473
4P
04474
Selection of Linergy busbars: see page 112
DD380507
Prefabricated connection + cover.
Flat busbars
Device
Connection
Fixed Compact NS, front connection

NS630b/1000
3P
must be made
4P
must be made
29
DD380842
Cable connection
DD380794
Front connection
Device
Front
conn.
Arc-chute
cover
Vert. conn. Cable-lug

adapters
adapters
b
b
b
b
33596
33597
33596
33597
33642
33643
33642
33643
DD380845
Catalogue numbers
Toggle, rotary handle and motor

mechanism
DD380844
System P

Vertical mounting
DD380843
Functional units
Spacing
rods
Cable
cover
04691
04691
04851
04851
04851
04851
04691
04691
04852
04852
04852
04852
Fixed device
NS630b/1000 3P
4P
NS1250/1600 3P
4P
33644
33645
Drawout device
NS630b/1000 3P
4P
NS1250/1600 3P
4P
b
b
b
b
33642
33643
33642
33643
33644
33645
Device
DD380847
DD380848
DD380846
DD380842
DD380795
Canalis connection
Front
conn.
Arc-chute
cover
Canalis
support
Canalis
interfaces
Canalis/
device
connection
Canalis
cover
NS630b/1250 3P
33596
03561
04703
04712
4P
33597
03561
04704
04712
04871 +
04851
04871 +
04851
Fixed device
Drawout device
b
03561
04703
04711
4P
03561
04704
04712
04871 +
04852
04871 +
04852
Device
Vertical rear
connectors

support
DD380850
Cable connection
DD380849
DD380796
Rear connection
NS630b/1250 3P
Cable cover
Fixed device
b
NS630b/1600
04693 x 2
04853
04693 x 2
04854
Drawout device
b
NS630b/1600
Device
DD380847
DD380848
DD380846
DD380850
DD380849
DD380797
Canalis connection
Vert. rear Terminal

conn.
extension
bar support
Canalis
support
Canalis
interfaces
Canalis/
device
connection
Canalis
cover
NS630b/1600 3P
04693 x 2
03561
04703
04713
4P
04693 x 2
03561
04704
04714
04871 +
04853
04871 +
04853
Fixed device
Drawout device
30
NS630b/1600 3P
04693 x 2
03561
04703
04713
4P
04693 x 2
03561
04704
04714
04871 +
04854
04871 +
04854
Functional units
System P
Catalogue numbers

Vertical mounting
Toggle, rotary handle and motor
mechanism
DD380854
DD380853
DD380852
DD380836
H
DD380650
Device installation
No. of Mounting
vert. plate
mod.
Cut-out
front plate
Upstream
front plate
Downstream
front plate
NS630b/1000 cables
front conn.
Canalis
12
17
03482
03482
03690
03690
03803
03803
NS1250
front conn.
cables
Canalis
14
17
03482
03482
03690
03690
NS1600
cables
front conn.
NS630b/1600 cables
rear conn.
Canalis
14
03482
03690
03802
03804 +
03803
03804
03804 +
03803
03804
10
16
03482
03482
03690
03690
03806
NS630b/1000 cables
front conn.
Canalis
13
18
03483
03483
03691
03691
NS1250
front conn.
cables
Canalis
15
18
03483
03483
03691
03691
NS1600
cables
front conn.
NS630b/1600 cables
rear conn.
Canalis
15
03483
03691
03802
03804 +
03803
03804
03804 +
03803
03804
11
16
03483
03483
03691
03691
03805
Device
Fixed device
DD380647
Fixed Compact NS.
03803
03803
03803
03803
03803
Drawout device
03803
03803
03803
03803
03803
03803
03803
Withdrawable Compact NS.
Device
DD380856
DD380855
Linergy busbars
DD380648
Distribution
Front
connectors
Prefabricated
connection
Cover for BB
connection
b
b
b
b
04485
04486
04487
04488
04926
04926
04926
04926
Fixed device
NS630b/1250
NS1600
3P
4P
3P
4P
Withdrawable device
3P b
04477
04926
4P b
04478
04926
NS1600
3P b
04491
04926
4P b
04492
04926
v install a Micrologic control unit capable of displaying the values
v or install the CTs on the horizontal busbars; in this case, an additional module is required; add
a plain front plate downstream(03801).
NS630b/1250
Device
DD380840
DD380857
Flat busbars
DD380855
DD380649
Front
connectors
Connection

BB connection connection
must be made
04662 x 2
Fixed device
NS630b/1600
04926
Withdrawable device
NS630b/1600
b
must be made
04662 x 2
04926
v install a Micrologic control unit capable of displaying the values
v or install the CTs on the horizontal busbars; in this case, an additional module is required; add
a plain front plate downstream (03801).
31
Functional units
System P
Catalogue numbers

Horizontal
Toggle
Fixed
Installation
DD380500
Device
No. of vertical
modules
Mounting plate
Cut-out front plate

NS100/250
NS400/630
Busbar connection
3P
4P
3P
4P
03411
03412
03451
03452
03611
03612
03651
03652
Linergy busbars
Device
DD380513
3
4
4
5

NS100/250
NS400/630
3P
4P
3P
4P
04423
04424
04453
04454
DD380693
Flat busbars
Device
Connection

(set of 2)

NS100/250
3P must be made
4P must be made
NS400/630
3P must be made
4P must be made
Selection of flexible bars for the connection: see page 128.
29321
29322
32562
32563
Short terminal shields.
DD380694
Connection
Front connection
Long terminal
shields (set of 2)
Device
Rear connection
or Connection transfer Short terminal shields
assembly
(set of 2)
Fixed Compact NS
NS100/250
NS400/630
3P
4P
3P
4P
29323
29324
32564
32565
04425
04426
04455
04456
29321 (1)
29322 (1)
32562 (1)
32563 (1)
Fixed Vigicompact NS
3P 29323
04429 (2) + 29321
29321 (1)
4P 29324
04430 (2) + 29322
29322 (1)
Vigi NS400/630
3P 32564
04459 (2) + 32562
32562 (1)
4P 32565
04460 (2) + 32563
32563 (1)
(1) Protection of terminals is ensured by Form 4 partitioning: see page 140.
(2) No connection.
Vigi NS100/250
Connection transfer assembly.
32

Vertical
Toggle
Fixed
Functional units
System P
Catalogue numbers
Installation
DD380506
Device
No. of
devices
No. of
vertical
modules
Mounting
plate

plate
front plate
Downstream
front plate
03420
03420
03461
03461
03461
03461
03243
03243
03273
03663
03273
03663
03801
03802
03801
03803
03802
03804
(1)
Fixed Compact NS
NS100/160
NS250
NS400
NS400
NS630
NS630
3/4
3/4
1
2
1
2
6
7
11
11
13
13
03801
03802
03802
03803
DD380701
Vigi NS100/160 3/4

8
03420
03241
03801
Vigi NS250
3/4
9
03420
03241
03802
Vigi NS400
1
13
03461
03276
03802
Vigi NS400
2
13
03461
03664
03802
03803
Vigi NS630
1
15
03461
03276
03801
03803
Vigi NS630
2
15
03461
03664
03803
03804
(1) For the Compact NS100/250, the number of modules indicated is for supply via a Polypact
distribution block. For supply via cables, two additional modules are required; add an upstream
plain front plate (03802).
DD381339
Accessories
Blanking plates: see page 98.
Busbar connection
Linergy busbars
DD380508
Device
No. of devices
Polypact with connection

NS100/250
4 x 3P
3 x 4P
04403
04404
No. of devices
Polypact without connection
Flat busbars
Device

NS100/250
4 x 3P
3 x 4P
Accessories
Insulated distribution block with connection.
04407
04408
Cat. no.
Polypact tooth-caps
Polypact distribution block: see page 156.
04809
DD380696
Connection
Device
Front connection
(set of 2)
Rear connection
(set of 2)

3P
29323
29321 (1)
4P
29324
29322 (1)
NS400/630
3P
32564
32562 (1)
4P
32565
32563 (1)
(1) Size reduced one module downstream.
Protection of terminals is ensured by Form 4 partitioning: see page 140.
NS100/250
Front connection with terminal shields.
33

Horizontal
Toggle
Plug-in
Functional units
System P
Catalogue numbers
Installation
DD380501
Device
No. of vertical
modules
Mounting plate
Cut-out front plate
Plug-in Compact NS and Vigicompact NS

NS100/250
NS400/630
Busbar connection
3P
4P
3P
4P
3
4
4
5
03413
03414
03453
03454
03611
03612
03651
03652
Linergy busbars
DD380502
Device
Terminal shields (set of 2)

NS100/250
NS400/630
3P
4P
3P
4P
04427
04428
must be made
must be made
29332
29333
32584 + 32562
32585 + 32563
Connection
Prefabricated connection + terminal shields.
DD380806
Flat busbars
Device

3P
must be made
4P
must be made
NS400/630
3P
must be made
4P
must be made
NS100/250
29332
29333
32584 + 32562
32585 + 32563
Terminal shields.
DD380515
Connection
Front connection
Long terminal
or transfer assembly
shields
(w/o connection) +
(set of 2)
long terminal shields
Device
Rear connection
Long insulated
terminals

H
G
H
Transfer assembly (w/o connection)+ long terminal shields.
34
04429 + 29332
29276 (1)
04430 + 29333
29277 (1)
NS400/630
04459 + 32584 +
32526 (1)
32562
4P
32589
04460 + 32585 +
32527 (1)
32563
NS100/250
3P
4P
3P
29332
29333
32588

Vertical
Toggle
Plug-in
Functional units
System P
Catalogue numbers
Installation
DD380517
Device
No. of
devices
No. of
Mounting
vertical
plate
modules (1)

plate
front plate
Downstream
front plate
7
8
11
11
13
13
03243
03243
03273
03663
03273
03663
03801
03802
03801
03803
03802
03804
Plug-in Compact NS
NS100/160
NS250
NS400
NS400
NS630
NS630
3/4
3/4
1
2
1
2
03421
03421
03461
03461
03461
03461
03801
03801
03801
03802
03802
03803
Plug-in Vigicompact NS
Vigi NS100/160 3/4
9
03421
03241
03801
03801
Vigi NS250
3/4
10
03421
03241
03801
03802
Vigi NS400
1
13
03461
03276
03802
Vigi NS400
2
13
03461
03664
03802
03803
Vigi NS630
1
15
03461
03276
03801
03803
Vigi NS630
2
15
03461
03664
03803
03804
DD381339
Accessories
Busbar connection
Linergy busbars
DD380520
Device
No. of devices
Polypact (with connection)

NS100/250
4 x 3P
3 x 4P
04405
04406
No. of devices
Polypact (w/o connection)
Flat busbars
Device
A

NS100/250
4 x 3P
3 x 4P
Accessories
04407
04408
Cat. no.
Polypact tooth-caps
04809
DD381209
Connection
Device
Front connection
Long terminal shields (set of 2)
Rear connection
Long insulated terminals

3P
29332
29276 (1)
4P
29333
29277 (1)
NS400/630
3P
32588
32526 (1)
4P
32589
32527 (1)
NS100/250
Front connection with long terminal shields.
35
Functional units
System P
Catalogue numbers

Horizontal
Rotary handle, motor mechanism
Fixed, plug-in
Installation
DD380511
Device
No. of vertical
modules
Mounting plate
Cut-out front
plate
03413
03414
03453
03454
03613
03614
03653
03654
Collar and raiser
Fixed or plug-in Compact NS

NS100/250
NS400/630 (1)
3P
4P
3P
4P
3
4
4
5
Fixed or plug-in Vigicompact NS

NS100/250
3P
3
03413
03613
29285
Rotary handle
4P
4
03414
03614
29285
NS100/250
3P
3
03413
03613
29285
Motor mech.
4P
4
03414
03614
29285
NS400/630 (1)
3P
4
03453
03653
29285
Rotary handle
4P
5
03454
03654
29285
(1) For direct installation under horizontal busbars, the busbars must be covered: see page 137.
Busbar connection
Linergy busbars
DD380698
Device

NS100/250
NS400/630
3P
4P
3P
4P
04427
04428
must be made
must be made
29321
29322
32562
32563

NS100/250
NS400/630
3P
4P
3P
4P
04427
04428
must be made
must be made
29332
29333
32584 + 32562
32585 + 32563
Connection
DD380699
Flat busbars
Device

NS100/250
NS400/630
3P
4P
3P
4P
must be made
must be made
must be made
must be made
29321
29322
32562
32563

NS100/250
Terminal shields.
3P
must be made
4P
must be made
NS400/630
3P
must be made
4P
must be made
29332
29333
32584 + 32562
32585 + 32563
DD380700
Connection
Front connection
Long terminal or transfer assembly
shields
(w/o connection) +
(set of 2)
terminal shields
Device
Rear connection
Short terminal Long
shields
insulated
(set of 2)
terminals

NS100/250
Vigi NS100/250
NS400/630
Vigi NS400/630
3P
4P
3P
4P
29323
29324
32564
32565
04429 + 29321
04430 + 29322
04459 + 32562
04460 + 32563
29321
29322
32562
32563
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)

NS100/250
Vigi NS100/250
NS400/630
36
3P
4P
3P
29332
29333
32588
04429 + 29332
04430 + 29333
04459 + 32584 +
32562
Vigi NS400/630
4P
32589
04460+ 32585 +
32563
29276 (1)
29277 (1)
32526 (1)
32527 (1)
Functional units
System P
Catalogue numbers

Vertical
Rotary handle, motor mechanism
Fixed, plug-in
Installation
DD380516
Device
No. No. of
dev. vertical
modules (1)
Mounting
plate
Cut-out
Upstream Downst.
front plate front plate front plate
03422
03422
03461
03461
03461
03461
03243
03243
03275
03663
03275
03663
03422
03422
03461
03461
03461
03461
03421
03421
03461
03461
03461
03461
Collar
and
raiser
Fixed Compact NS
NS100/160
NS250
NS400
NS400
NS630
NS630
3/4
3/4
1
2
1
2
6
7
11
11
13
13
03801
03802
03802
03803
03801
03802
03801
03803
03802
03804
03244
03244
03277
03665
03277
03665
03802
03801
03803
03801
03802
03802
03803
03803
03804
03243
03243
03275
03663
03275
03663
03801
03801
03801
03802
03802
03803
03801
03802
03801
03803
03802
03804
Vigi NS100/160
Vigi NS250
Vigi NS400 (rot.)
Vigi NS400 (rot.)
Vigi NS630 (rot.)
Vigi NS630 (rot.)
3/4
3/4
1
2
1
2
8
9
13
13
15
15
29285
29285
29285
29285
29285
29285
Plug-in Compact NS
DD3813000
NS100/160
NS250
NS400
NS400
NS630
NS630
3/4
3/4
1
2
1
2
7
8
11
11
13
13
Plug-in Vigicompact NS
Vigi NS100/160 3/4 9
03421
03244
03801
03801
29285
Vigi NS250
3/4 10
03421
03244
03801
03802
29285
Vigi NS400 (rot.) 1
13
03461
03277
03802
29285
Vigi NS400 (rot.) 2
13
03461
03665
03802
03803
29285
Vigi NS630 (rot.) 1
15
03461
03277
03801
03803
29285
Vigi NS630 (rot.) 2
15
03461
03665
03803
03804
29285
Accessories
Busbar connection
Linergy busbars
DD380519
Device
No. of devices
Fixed or plug-in Compact NS and Vigicompact NS

NS100/250
4 x 3P
3 x 4P
04405
04406
No. of devices
Flat busbars
Device
Fixed or plug-in Compact NS and Vigicompact NS

NS100/250
4 x 3P
3 x 4P
Accessories
Insulated distribution block with connection.
04407
04408
Cat. no.
Polypact tooth-caps
04809
DD380702
Connection
Front connection
Device
Rear connection
Short terminal
Long insulated
shields (set of 2) terminals
NS400/630
3P
4P
3P
4P
29323
29324
32564
32565
29321 (1)
29322 (1)
32562 (1)
32563 (1)
NS100/250

NS100/250
NS400/630
Front connection with long terminal shields.
3P
4P
3P
29332
29333
32588
4P
32589
29276 (1)
29277 (1)
32526 (1)
32527 (1)
37
Functional units
System P
Catalogue numbers

Horizontal
All controls
Withdrawable
Installation
DD380538
Device
No. of
devices
No. of vertical
modules
Mounting plate Cut-out front

plate
1
1
5
6
03415
03462
03618
03657
5
6
03415
03462
03618
03657
Collar and
raiser
Compact NS
NS100/250
NS400/630
Vigicompact NS
Vigi NS100/250 1
Vigi NS400/630 1
toggle, rotary
handle
Busbar connection
Linergy busbars
Device
DD380540
29285
29285
Compact NS and Vigicompact NS

NS100/250
NS400/630
3P
4P
3P
4P
04427
04428
must be made
must be made
29332
29333
32588
32589
Connection

DD380541
Flat busbars
Device

NS100/250
3P
must be made
4P
must be made
NS400/630
3P
must be made
4P
must be made
29332
29333
32588
32589
Long terminal shields.
DD380542
Connection
Device
Front connection
Long terminal
shields
(set of 2)
or transfer assembly
(w/o connection) +
long terminal shields
Rear connection
Long insulated
terminals

3P
29332
04429 + 29332
29276 (1)
4P
29333
04430 + 29333
29277 (1)
NS400/630
3P
32588
04459 + 32588
32526 (1)
4P
32589
04460 + 32589
32527 (1)
NS100/250
38
Functional units
System P
Catalogue numbers

Vertical
All controls
Withdrawable
Installation
DD380539
Device
No. of
devices
No. of Mounting Cut-out

Upstream Downst.
Collar and
vert.
plate
front plate front plate front plate raiser
mod.
(1 per device)
2
2
1
8
9
11
03421
03421
03461
03243
03243
03273
03802
03802
03801
03801
03802
03801
11
03461
03275
03801
03801
2
1
11
13
03461
03461
03663
03273
03802
03802
03803
03802
13
03461
03275
03802
03802
13
03461
03663
03803
03804
32534 (1)
Vigi NS100/160 2
10
03421
03244
03802
03801
Vigi NS250
11
03421
03244
03802
03802
03461
03276
03802
03461
03277
03802
29285
+ 29284 (1)
29285
+ 29284 (1)
29285
+ 32534
29285
03461
03664
03802
03803
03461
03665
03802
03803
03461
03276
03801
03803
03461
03277
03801
03803
03461
03664
03803
03804
03461
03665
03803
03804
Compact NS
NS100/160
NS250
NS400
toggle
NS400
rotary handle,
motor mech.
NS400
NS630
toggle
NS630
rotary handle,
motor mech.
NS630
29284 (1)
29284 (1)
32534
32534 (1)
32534
Vigicompact NS
Vigi NS400
1
13
toggle
Vigi NS400
1
13
rotary handle
Vigi NS400
2
13
toggle
Vigi NS400
2
13
rotary handle
Vigi NS630
1
15
toggle
Vigi NS630
1
15
rotary handle
Vigi NS630
2
15
toggle
Vigi NS630
2
15
rotary handle
(1) For devices with toggle only.
29285
+ 32534
29285
29285
+ 32534
29285
29285
+ 32534
29285
DD381157
Connection
Device
Front connection
Rear connection
Long insulated terminals
Withdrawable Compact NS and Vigicompact NS

3P
29332
29276 (1)
4P
29333
29277 (1)
NS400/630
3P
32588
32526 (1)
4P
32589
32527 (1)
NS100/250
39
Functional units
Interpact INS-INV630b to 1600
System P
Catalogue numbers
Connection
Cable connection
DD382444
Device
Vert. conn.
adapters
Verticalconnection
adapters
Cable-lug
adapters
Terminal extension
bar support
Interpact INS-INV
INS-INV630b/
1600
IN2500
3P
4P
3P
4P
31301
31302
33644
33645
33975
33976
04693
04693
INS-INV630b/1600.
Device installation
DD380551
Device
No. of
modules
Mounting
plate

plate
front plate
Downstream
front plate
14
14
14
03501
03501
03501
03713
03714
03717
03804
03804
03803
Interpact INS-INV
INS-INV630b/
1600
IN2500
Distribution
3P
4P
3P/4P

Device
DD380552
03804
03804
03803
Connection
Free supports
Cover for BB
connection
Interpact INS-INV
INS-INV630b/
1600
IN2500
3P
4P
04481 (Linergy)
04482 (Linergy)
must be made
(1) Protection of devices must be made.

40
04662 x 2
04926 (1)
04926 (1)
04926 (1)
41
Functional units
System P

Horizontal
Front handle
Catalogue numbers
Installation
DD380543
Device
No. of vertical
modules
Mounting plate
Cut-out front plate
Interpact INS-INV switch-disconnector

INS-INV250
INS-INV320/630
Busbar connection
4
5
03617
03658

(set of 2)
Linergy busbars
Device
DD380544
03412
03452

INS-INV250
INS-INV320/630
3P
4P
3P
4P
04427
04428
must be made
must be made
29322
29322
32563
32563
Connection

(set of 2)
DD381423
Flat busbars
Device

INS-INV250
INS-INV320/630
must be made
must be made
29322
32563
Front connection
(set of 2)
Rear connection (1)

(set of 2)
DD380545
Connection
Device

INS-INV250
29324
29322
INS-INV320/630
32565
32563
(1) For rear connection, protection of terminals is ensured by Form 4 partitioning: see page 140.
42

Vertical
Front handle
Functional units
System P
Catalogue numbers
Installation
DD380546
Device
No. of
devices
No. of
Mounting
vertical
plate
modules (1)

plate
front plate
Downstream
front plate

INS-INV250 1
7
03420
03248
03801
03801
INS-INV250 3
7
03420
03620
03801
03801
INS-INV320/ 1
10
03461
03274
400
INS-INV500/ 1
11
03461
03274
03801
630
(1) For the Interpact INS-INV250, the number of modules indicated is for supply via a Polypact
distribution block. For supply via cables, two additional modules are required; add a plain front
plate upstream (03802).
DD381340
Accessories
Busbar connection
Linergy busbars
DD380547
Device

INS-INV250
04404
INS-INV320/630
must be made
Accessories
32565
Catalogue number
Polypact tooth-caps
04809
DD380548
Flat busbars
Device

INS-INV250
04408
INS-INV320/630
must be made
Accessories
32565
Catalogue number
Polypact tooth-caps
04809
DD380549
Connection
Device
Front connection
Rear connection (1)


INS-INV250
29324
29322
INS-INV320/630
32565
32563
(1) For rear connection, size reduced one module; a plain downstream front plate (03801) is not
needed. Protection of terminals is ensured by Form 4 partitioning: see page 140.
43
Functional units
System P
Source-changeover systems
Compact / Masterpact
Catalogue numbers
Source changeover
General
DD381669
To ensure the supply of energy at all times, certain electrical installations are
connected to two sources:
b the normal source
b the replacement source that steps in to supply the installation if the normal source
is not available.
A mechanical and/or electrical interlocking system between two Interpact, Compact
or Masterpact switch-disconnectors or circuit breakers (or a mixture) avoids
simultaneous connection of the two sources during switching.
The source-changeover system can be:
b manual when the devices are mechanically interlocked
b remote operated when there is also an electrical interlocking system
b automatic, by adding an automatic controller that manages switching from one
source to another according to a number of external parameters.
Manual source-changeover system

This is the most simple system. A human operator is required and consequently, the
transfer from the normal source to the replacement source is delayed.
A manual source-changeover system comprises two or three manually controlled
devices (circuit breakers or switch-disconnectors) that are mechanically interlocked.
The interlocking system avoids simultaneous connection (even transient) of the two
sources.
Remote-operated source-changeover system

This is the most commonly used system. No human intervention is required.
The transfer from the normal to the replacement source is managed electrically.
A remote-operated source-changeover system is made up of two or three devices
linked by an electrical interlocking system implemented in a number of manners.
Device control is backed up by a mechanical interlocking system that protects
against the consequences of an electrical malfunction and inhibits incorrect manual
operation.
Automatic source-changeover system

When a remote-operated source-changeover system is combined with an automatic
controller, the sources can be controlled automatically according to a number of
programmed operating modes.
This solution provides optimum energy management:
b switching to a replacement source depending on any external conditions
b management of sources
b regulation
b emergency source replacement, etc.
A communications function for dialogue with a supervisor is available for the
automatic controller.
See catalogue ref. : ART 29770 "Source-changeover systems for circuit breakers
and switch disconnectors 40 to 5000 A".
44
Remote operated
source-changeover system
Masterpact NW08 to 32, NT06 to 16
Functional units
System P
Catalogue numbers
Device layout
HH
HH
HH
DD381535
For source changeover system cover panels and installation, refer to the pages
dealing with the corresponding devices. A fixed device and a withdrawable or
drawout device can be installed in the same cubicle.
DD381617
NS630b/1600 devices stacked in a cubicle
Devices side by side in two adjacent cubicles, see page 47.
45
Functional units
System P
Catalogue numbers
NS100 to 630
Manual source-changeover
system
Compact NS100/630, NS630b/1600
Masterpact NW08/32, NT06/16
Interlocking of rotary handles
DD381529
The devices are equipped with a rotary handle.

They are mounted on a dedicated mounting plate:
b vertically for NS100/250
b horizontally for NS100/630.
No. of vertical
modules
ON
I
reset
O
OFF
Cut-out
front plate
Upstream
front plate
Downstream
front plate
03428
03458
03245
03659
03802
03803
Compact NS, rotary handle

NS100/250
NS400/630
NS100/250.
Mounting
plate
10
10
Designation
Devices
Long terminal shields NS100/250
NS400/630
Short terminal shields NS100/250
NS400/630
Shields for spreaders NS400/630
Mechanical interlock NS100/250
NS400/630
Coupling accessory NS100/250
NS400/630
Connection must be made.
For 3P deviceFor 4P device

29323
29324
32564
32565
29321
29322
32562
32563
32582
32583
29369
29369
32621
32621
29358
29359
32619
32620
DD381530
NS630b/1000 horizontal
Interlocking of rotary handles
DD381534
The devices are equipped with an extended rotary handle.

They are mounted horizontally on a dedicated mounting plate.
No. of vertical
modules
Mounting plate
Cut-out front plate
03491
03695
Compact NS, fixed front connection

NS630b/1000
Rotary handle
Designation
Mechanical interlock
13
Catalogue number
33890
33628 (for 3P device)
NS630b/1000.
Other devices
Device installation
Devices mounted vertically:
Masterpact NW08/32: see page 25
Masterpact NT06/16: see page 27
Compact NS630b/1600, drawout: see page 31
Mechanical interlocking using cables.
Allows combinations of all devices.
46
Remote-operated
source-changeover systems
Compact NS100/630, NS630b/1600
Masterpact NW08/32, NT06/16
Functional units
System P
Catalogue numbers
NS100 to 630
DD381531
Device installation
Devices mounted horizontally and equipped with an electrical
interlocking unit.
No. of vertical
modules
Mounting
plate
Cut-out
front plate
03417 (1)
03457 (2)
03616
03656
Compact NS, fixed, or plug-in

NS100/250
NS400/630
8
10
Designation
Devices
For 3P deviceFor 4P device
Long terminal shields NS100/250
29323
29324
NS400/630
32564
32565
Short terminal shields NS100/250
29321
29322
NS400/630
32562
32563
Shields for spreaders NS400/630
32582
32583
(1) Order cat. no. 29350 (AC) or 29351 (DC).
(2) Order cat. no. 32610 (AC) or 32611 (DC).
DD381532
Addition of an automatic controller

When a UA or BA automatic controller is added, the sources can be controlled
automatically according to a number of programmed operating modes.
No. of vertical
modules
Mounting
plate
Cut-out
front plate
03417
03671
UA or BA controller
4
DD381533
UA or BA controller
MERLIN GERIN
Other devices
MERLIN GERIN
NS400/630.
Device installation
DD381617
Devices mounted vertically:

Masterpact NW08/32: see page 25
Masterpact NT06/16: see page 27
Compact NS630b/1600, drawout: see page 31
Device mounted vertically and equipped with an electrical
interlocking unit: see page 31.
Devices side by side in two adjacent cubicles.
47
Functional units
System P
Catalogue numbers
system with mechanical
interlocking
systems
Rotary handle
Interpact INS-INV250
Devices mounted vertically
Device
No. of vertical
modules

plate
Upstream
front plate
Downstream
front plate
03802
03802
DD381537

INS-INV250
Designation
Mechanical
interlock
Long terminal
shields (set of 2)
Coupling
accessory
Cat. no.
31073
03428
03235
29324
INS-INV250.
DD381538
Interpact INS-INV320/630
Devices mounted horizontally
Device
A
No. of vertical
modules

plate
INS-INV320/630.
48
INS-INV320/630
10
Designation
Mechanical
interlock
Long terminal
shields (set of 2)
Coupling
accessory
Cat. no.
31074
03458
32565
03659
Functional units
System P
system
Catalogue numbers
Complete source-changeover
assembly
Interpact INS-INV250
Devices mounted vertically
DD381539
Device
No. of vertical
modules

plate
Upstream
front plate
Downstream
front plate
03802
03802

INS-INV250
03428
03247
Designation
Complete
sourcechangeover
assembly
Rating
100 A
160 A
200 A
250 A
For 3P device
31140
31144
31142
31146
For 4P device
31141
31145
31143
31147
Designation
Coupling
accessory
Long terminal
shields (set of 2)
Cat. no.
29324
DD381540
Interpact INS-INV320/630
Devices mounted horizontally
Device
A
No. of vertical
modules

plate

INS-INV320/630
Designation
INS-INV320/630.
10
03458
03661
Rating
For 3P
device
31148
31150
31152
31154
For 4P
device
31149
31151
31153
31155
Complete
sourcechangeover
assembly
320 A
400 A
500 A
630 A
Designation
Coupling
accessory
Long terminal
shields (set of 2)
Cat. no.
32619 ((for 3P device)
32620 ((for 4P device)
32625
49
Functional units
System P
Fupact INF
Horizontal
Direct rotary handle
Catalogue numbers
Installation
DD382491
Device
No. of
devices
per row
No. of
vertical
modules
Mounting Cut-out
plate
front
plate
Upst.
front
plate
Downst.
front
plate
Long
terminal
shields
Switch-disconnecteur fuses
INF32/40
INF63
INF100/160
INF250
INF400
DD382492
INF630
INF800
Busbar connection
1 x 3/4P
1 x 3P
1 x 4P
1 x 3P
1 x 4P
1 x 3P
1 x 4P
1 x 3P
1 x 4P
1 x 3P
1 x 4P
1 x 3P
1 x 4P
3
5
5
5
5
7
7
8
8
11
11
11
11
03540
03541
03541
03541
03541
03543
03543
03538
03538
03539
03539
03539
03539
03313
03314
03314
03314
03314
03727
03727
03729
03729
03730
03730
03730
03730
Linergy or flat busbars
DD382493
Connection made by the customer.

Choice of flexible bars to be used for the connection: See page 128.
50
49658
49658 x 2
49659 x 6
49659 x 8
49255 x 6
49255 x 8
49255 x 6
49255 x 8
49257 x 6
49257 x 8
49257 x 6
49257 x 8
Functional units
System P
Fupact INF
Vertical
Direct rotary handle
Catalogue numbers
Installation
DD382495
Device
No. of
devices
per row
No. of
vertical
modules
Mounting Cut-out
plate
front
plate
Upst.
front
plate
Downst.
front
plate
Long
terminal
shields (qty
per device)
Switch-disconnecteur fuses
INF32/40
INF63
INF100/160
INF250
INF400
DD382496
INF630
INF800
DD382497
Busbar connection
4 x 3P
3 x 4P
3 x 3P
2 x 4P
2 x 3P
2 x 4P
1 x 3P
1 x 4P
1 x 3P
1 x 4P
1 x 3P
1 x 4P
1 x 3P
1 x 4P
3
3
5
5
5
5
9
9
9
9
11
11
11
11
03540
03540
03541
03541
03541
03541
03542
03542
03542
03542
03542
03542
03542
03542
03312
03314
03314
03315
03315
03315
03728
03728
03728
03728
03728
03728
03728
03728
03801
03801
03801
03801
03802
03802
03802
03802
03802
03802
03802
03802
03803
03803
03803
03803
49658
49658 x 2
49659 x 6
49659 x 8
49255 x 6
49255 x 8
49255 x 6
49255 x 8
49257 x 6
49257 x 8
49257 x 6
49257 x 8
Linergy or flat busbars

Connection made by the customer.
Choice of flexible bars to be used for the connection: See page 128.
51
Functional units
System P
Catalogue numbers
Presentation
Modular devices
Presentation
PD390566
A rigid modular rail

Made using an aluminium alloy, the rail design is extremely rigid. The rail supports
are crimp mounted.
Fast mounting
The rail supports have positioning studs to guide the rail on the framework.
Only two mounting screws are required.
Multiple functions
A number of devices clip directly onto the rails, including 80 A and 200 A Multiclip
distribution blocks, all horizontal cable-running accessories such as cable straps and
trunking supports, as well as the supports for earth bars.
What is more, for cable running to the terminal block at the top or bottom of the
cubicle, the supports are designed to allow the passage to two vertical trunking
sections on the left and right.
Supply from all directions
Supply to the rows, using comb busbars or Multiclip distribution blocks, can be via:
b flat or Powerclip insulated busbars installed behind the devices
b flat or Linergy busbars installed in a busbar compartment.
Distribution
80 and 200 A Multiclip distribution blocks
b fast and secure front connection using spring terminals
b reliable connections, will not loosen over time, insensitive to vibrations and thermal
variations
b all types of modular devices can be mixed
b easy balancing of phases
b interchangeable devices
b easy installation upgrades
b fully insulated (IPxxB).
Compact NS400 with motor mechanism, supplying rows of

Multi 9 devices via Powerclip insulated busbars.
Comb busbars
b direct connection to device terminals or via a connector
b fully insulated
b can be cut to length.
Cable running
PD390567
Straps
b easy and fast to install
b low cost
b perfectly organised and integrated cable running
b professional finish.
Trunking
b traditional solution.
52
Functional units
System P
Catalogue numbers
Modular devices
Multi 9 devices
DD380771
Device
No. of
vertical
modules
Modular rail
Modular front plate
03401
03204
03401
03203
All Multi 9 devices

4
All supply systems (comb busbars,
Multiclip) with cable straps and trunking
sections
Multi 9 devices y 40 A
Connection via 63/80 A Multiclip or
comb busbars with cable straps
Capacity of modular rail: 48 Multi 9 modules.

Note: For a modular row with a 160 A (half row) and 200 A Multiclip distribution block positioned
directly below a non-modular mounting plate (Compact, Interpact, etc.), or at the top of a
switchboard: add one module (i.e. 4 + 1) and a plain upstream front plate (03801).
DD380772
200 A Multiclip.
Cable running: trunking.
Mounting requires 4 vertical modules.
DD381305
Comb busbars.
Cable running: cable straps.
80 A Multiclip.
Cable running: cable straps.
53
Functional units
System P
Catalogue numbers
DD382416
Disjoncteur NG125
Modular devices
Device
No. of
vertical
modules
Modular rail
Modular front plate
03401
03205
Disjoncteur NG125
NG125, Vigi NG125
Direct supply via cables.

Note: Width of NG125 circuit breakers:
NG125 3P: 9 Multi 9 modules

NG125 4P: 12 Multi 9 modules
Vigi NG125 3P: 18 Multi 9 modules
Vigi NG125 4P: 21 Multi 9 modules
NSA125/160 circuit breaker

DD380769
Device
No. of
vertical
modules
Modular rail
(adjustable)
Modular front plate
5
5
03402
03402 + 28041
03205
03205
NSA125/160 circuit breaker

NSA125/160 and Vigi
NSA125/160 and Vigi + modular
devices

Note: Width of devices:
NSA125/160 3P: 10 Multi 9 modules

NSA125/160 4P: 14 Multi 9 modules
Vigi NSA125/160 3P: 24 Multi 9 modules
Vigi NSA125/160 4P: 27 Multi 9 modules.
INS switch-disconnector
DD380770
Device
No. of
vertical
modules
Modular rail
Modular front plate
4
5
03401
03401
03204
03205
INS160
INS40/160
INS100/160 with long terminal shields

Note: Width of devices:
54
INS40/80: width 10 Multi 9 modules

INS100/160: width 15 Multi 9 modules
System P
DD381306
Distribution via Powerclip

busbars
DD381160
Catalogue numbers
DD381161
Modular devices
Functional units
Universal power supply block for the

Powerclip insulated busbars.
DD381162
Powerclip tap-off blocks.
200 A Multiclip connection (04021).
Presentation
The Powerclip insulated busbars are mounted using a System G adapter (03595)
made up of four lateral cross-members and two longitudinal cross-members.
The busbars can be positioned at precisely the desired spot, to the left (preferably),
in the middle or to the right of the row of devices.
The depth adjustment of the longitudinal cross-members facilitates connections for
all types of devices (fixed/withdrawable, toggle/rotary handle/motor mechanism,
etc.).
For busbars:
b y 800 mm long, order one System G adapter (03595)
b > 800 mm long, order two System G adapters (03595 x 2).
Cat. no. selection
Designation
Powerclip insulated busbars
System G adapter, W= 500 mm (03595)
DD381163
Distribution via rear busbars
see page 124

see page 74
Installation
Solution 1
The rear flat busbars are mounted using a System G adapter (03595) made up of
four lateral cross-members and two longitudinal cross-members.
The depth adjustment of the longitudinal cross-members facilitates connections for
all types of devices (fixed/withdrawable, toggle/rotary handle/motor mechanism,
etc.).
The number of adapters that must be ordered depends on the required number of
supports.
Solution 2
The support for the busbars clips to the rear of the modular rail.
Cat. no. selection
Designation
Rear busbars
System G adapter, L = 500 mm (03595)
see page 126

see page 74
55
Functional units
System P
Catalogue numbers
Modular devices
Distribloc distribution block

Designation
DD381308
125 A Distribloc distribution block

see page 148
Cat. no.
04045
04046
Multiclip distribution blocks

Designation
DD380675
Multiclip, 63 A, 4P, 1/2 row

Multiclip, 80 A, 4P
Multiclip, 160 A, 4P, 1/2 row
Multiclip, 200 A, 2P
Connection between 200 A Multiclip 4P and Powerclip insulated busbars
see page 154
Cat. no.
04008
04004
04018
04012
04013
04014
04021
Comb busbars
DD380755
For C60 circuit breakers

Designation
1P
2P
3P
4P
24-module comb busbar (9 mm modules)

Two 48-module comb busbars (9 mm modules)
For C120 and NG125 circuit breakers

Designation
1P
2P
3P
4P
(W = 430 mm, 16 poles)

(W = 430 mm, 16 poles)
(W = 430 mm, 16 poles)
(W = 430 mm, 16 poles)
Thoot caps (set of 20)
Cat. no.
14481
14891
14482
14892
14483
14893
14484
14894
Cat. no.
14811
14812
14813
14814
14818
Cable running
Designation
DD380811
Cable straps
12 vertical cable straps
2 covers, 1-meter long, for vertical cable straps
12 horizontal cable straps
4 covers, 430 mm long, for horizontal cable straps
Trunking
4 horizontal sections, 60 x 30 mm, L = 450 mm
Vertical section, 80 x 60 mm, L = 2 m
see page 161
Cat. no.
04262
04263
04239
04243
04257
04255
04267
Blanking plates
Designation
DD380805
Blanking strip, H = 46 mm, L = 1 m

4 divisible blanking plates, H = 46 mm, L = 90 mm
see page 98
56
Cat. no.
03220
03221
57
Functional units
System P
Catalogue numbers
Series D and K contactors

DD381159
Device
Series D and K
contactors y 40 A
No. of
vertical
modules
Useful rail
length
Modular rail
(adjustable)
Plain front plate
432 mm
03402
03803
No. of
vertical
modules
Useful rail
length
Modular rail
Cut-out front
plate
GV2/GV3 circuit breakers

DD381164
Device
03203
03205
DD381426
GV2
3
432 mm
03401
GV3
5
432 mm
03402
Width of devices without lateral auxiliaries: 45 mm.
Modular blanking plates: see page 98
GV2 + contactor combination

DD381165
Device
No. of
vertical
modules
Useful rail
length
Modular rail
(adjustable)
Transparent
front plate
Downstream
front plate
03342
03801
Combination GV2 + Series D or K contactor y 40 A

GV2 + contactor
5
432 mm
03402
GV2 motor circuit breaker + Series K contactor combination.
TeSys U model
DD381166
Device
No. of
vertical
modules
Useful rail
length
Modular rail
(adjustable)
Transparent front plate
TeSys U model
TeSys U model
4
432 mm
03402
58
03342
Functional units
System P
Catalogue numbers
Tego Power
DD382624
Device
No. of
vertical
modules
Mounting
plate
Transparent
front plate
Upstream
front plate
Downstream
front plate
03576
03343
03801
03801
No. of
vertical
modules
Useful rail
length
Modular rail
(adjustable)
Plain front plate
Tego Power
Tego Power 2 to 8
feeders
LH4 soft starters

DD382625
Device
LH4 starter on a modular rail or a slotted plate

LH4 N1
LH4 N2
Width of devices:
432 mm
03402
03804
Modular rail
(adjustable)
Plain front plate
LH4 N1: 45 mm
LH4 N2: 90 mm
ATS soft starters

DD382603
Device
No. of
vertical
modules
Useful rail
length
On a modular rail
ATS01N103/106FT 4
432 mm
03402
ATS01N109/112FT 5
432 mm
03402
ATS01N206 to 212 5
432 mm
03402
ATS01N222 to 232 6
432 mm
03402
ATS01N 230LY
5
432 mm
03402
ATS01N 244LY
5
432 mm
03402
ATS01N 244Q
5
432 mm
03402
Width of devices:
ATS01N103/106FT: 22.5 mm
ATS01N109/112FT: 45 mm
ATS01N206 to 212: 45 mm
ATS01N222 to 232: 45 mm
DD382604
Device
No. of
vertical
modules
03804
03805
03805
03806
03805
03805
03805
ATS01N230LY: 180 mm
ATS01N244LY: 180 mm
ATS01N244Q: 180 mm
Plain front plate
Slotted
mounting
plate
On a slotted plate
ATS01N272LY
ATS01N285LY
ATS01N272Q
ATS01N285Q
Width of devices:
6
03572
6
03572
6
03572
6
03572
ATS01N272LY: 180 mm
ATS01N285LY: 180 mm
03806
03806
03806
03806
ATS01N272Q: 180 mm
ATS01N285Q: 180 mm
LV/LV transformer
DD382626
Device
No. of
vertical
modules
Slotted
mounting
plate
Plain front plate
03571
03804
03571
03804
03571
03804
LV/LV transformer
ABL-6 TS/TD
up to 2500 VA
ABL-6 TS/TD
up to 960 W
ABL-6 TS/TD
up to 480 W
Comb busbars
Cable running
see page 154
see the technical documentation
see page 161

DD382640
Multiclip distribution blocks

DD382639
DD382638
Cable running and

distribution accessories
59
Functional units
System P
Catalogue numbers
Measurement devices with interface

and plastic mounting plates
DD381705
Presentation
The interface for 72 x 72 and 96 x 96 mm measurement devices is made up of:
b a special front plate with cut-outs (03904) for plastic mounting plates
b plastic mounting plates for the 72 x 72 or 96 x 96 mm devices.
The front plate can be equipped with:
b five mounting plates with cut-outs for 72 x 72 mm devices
b four mounting plates with cut-outs for 96 x 96 mm devices.
It can also be equipped with plain plastic mounting plates to blank off any unused
positions. The plain mounting plates can be easily cut out for lamps, pushbuttons or
72 x 72 mm devices.
Each mounting plate has a cable-running system for auxiliary wires and can be
identified by a label.
Front plate with cut-outs, four mounting plates and one plain
mounting plate for 72 x 72 mm devices.
DD381684
Installation
The interface for 72 x 72 and 96 x 96 mm devices is installed similar to a front plate
on a door with cut-outs in a 300 or 400 mm wide cubicle.
The degree of protection for installed devices is IP30.
60
40
10
0
60
40
10
0
60
Cat. no. selection

Designation
Cat. no.
Front plate (3 modules) for five 72 x 72 mm or four 96 x 96 mm devices

Mounting plate for 72 x 72 mm
with cut-outs
device
plain
Mounting plate for 96 x 96 mm
with cut-outs
device
plain
03904
03902
03900
03903
03901
40
10
0
Doors with cut-outs for the measurement-device interface
60
40
10
0
W = 300 mm (08593)
W = 400 mm (08594)
see page 88
DD381688
Mounting on a cubicle door cut-out.
for cubicles
DD381687
Door with cut-outs
The mounting plates have guides for auxiliary

wires.
Mounting plates can be identified by a label

(not supplied).
Note: For degree of protection IP55, devices must be installed behind a transparent door.
DD380862
Visor for measurement devices

Presentation
The interface with the plastic mounting plates for 72 x 72 mm and 96 x 96 mm
devices can be mounted on a visor.
The visor can be installed on 300 and 400 mm wide doors with cut-outs in cubicles.
It is supplied with a drilling diagram for mounting on a plain door.
40
40
10
0
60
40
10
0
60
40
10
0
60
40
10
0
60
10
0
60
Visor mounted on a cubicle door cut-out.
60
Cat. no. selection

Designation
Cat. no.
Visor for measurement devices
03928
Functional units
System P
Catalogue numbers
Measurement devices on a metal

front plate
Installation
The 72 x 72 mm or 96 x 96 mm measurement devices are installed directly on a front
plate with cut-outs, H = 150 mm (3 modules):
b in the device zone of cubicles
b on a door with cut-outs in a 300 or 400 mm wide cubicle.
The degree of protection for installed devices is IP30.
Unused positions are blanked off using blanking plates.
DD381689
Device
No. of vertical modules
Cut-out front
plate
Measurement device
Six 72 x 72 mm measurement devices
3
Four 96 x 96 mm measurement devices
3
One 144 x 144 mm device + four 72 x 72 devices 4
03910
03911
03912
03910.
DD381711
Accessories
DD381712
03911.
03907
03908
DD381691
72 x 72 mm blanking plate
96 x 96 mm blanking plate
Blanking plates have knock-outs for 22 mm lamps or pushbuttons.
03912.
Pushbuttons or lamps
Installation in the device zone on a metal front plate with cut-outs.
DD381690
Device
Cut-out front
plate
03914
Pushbuttons
12 pushbuttons or lamps (22 mm diameter)
03914.
61
Functional units
System P
Catalogue numbers
Powerlogic system
DD381692
Device
Cut-out front plate
03911
PowerMeter PM
Power Meter PM700/500/800
(96 x 96 mm case)
Installation in the device compartment.
DD381716
Device
No. of
vertical
modules

plate
Plain front plate
4
6
03571
03572
03802
03804
Circuit Monitor CM
Circuit Monitor CM3000
Circuit Monitor CM4000
03918
03918
ic system
Powerlog
4000
CM
DD381694
Device
No. of
vertical
modules
Cut-out front
plate
3
4
03916
03917
DMB300/400
DMB300
DMC300/400
com
Digipa
ct DMB3
00
1
2
I
select
DD381717
03916.
com
Alarm
Digipa
ct DM
C300
03917.
DD381693
Device
No. of vertical Slotted

Plain front
modules
mounting plate plate
Digipact
DC150 data concentrator + SC150 4
indication and control module
CLS150, UM100, IM100
see page 60
(72 x 72 mm cases)
03571
03804
DD380858
Installation in the device compartment or the connection compartment.
Data concentrator in a 300 mm wide compartment.
62
Functional units
System P
Catalogue numbers
Vigilohm system
DD381754
Device
No. of vertical
modules
Mounting
plate
Cut-out front
plate
03930
03932
03931
03933
03931
03933
No. of vertical
modules
Modular rail Cut-out front

plate
Vigilohm
7
MERLIN
10
GERIN
Vigirex
RM12
DD381698
03930 + 03932.
XM200 or XM300C with 3 XD301

or with 2 XD312
or with XD301 +
XD312
XML308/316 or XM300C
with two interfaces
XLI300
or XTU300
or XAS
or XD308C
XML308/316 or XM300C with XL308
or with XL316
03931 + 03933.
Vigilohm
DD381699
Device
60
Vigilohm
40
10
0
TR22A/AH (1 TR + 6 measurement
devices, 72 x 72 mm)
EM9, TR5A, SM21 (modular devices)
03934
03401
03203
No. of vertical
modules
Modular rail
Cut-out front
plate
3
see page 60
see page 60
03401
03203
3
see page 60
03401
03203
No. of vertical
modules
Modular rail
Cut-out front
plate
2
3
03401
03401
03202
03203
03934.
Vigirex
DD381720
Device
Vigirex
RH10/RH21/RH99 relays
Modular device
72 x 72 mm cases
RHU relay (72 x 72 mm cases)
RMH relay and RM12T multiplexer
RMH (modular devices)
RM12T (72 x 72 mm cases)
GERIN
MERLIN
Vigirex
RH10M
on
Reset
fault
Test
Test
no trip
Multi 9 measurement device

DD381722
Device
Multi 9 measurement device
4
3
2
4
3
Lamps, pushbuttons, etc.

Ammeter, voltmeter, etc.
Cable running: see page 161.
63
Functional units
System P
Catalogue numbers
DD382308
Presentation
Schneider Electric offers power factor correction equipment that integrates perfectly
in Prisma Plus switchboards.
The power factor correction modules are installed horizontally in a cubicle and
electrically interconnected by a set of front busbars.
The busbars are supplied by a protection device installed outside the cubicle.
Special Prisma Plus cubicles are used for power factor correction, given the
temperature rise inside the cubicles.
They comply with and are tested according to standard IEC 60439-1.
Installation
DD382310
DD382309
Mounting plates are equipped with the power factor correction modules, made up of
a contactor, the corresponding protection fuses and a set of busbars.
They are installed in a 650 mm wide cubicle that is either 400 or 600 mm deep
depending on the depth of the switchboard to which it will be added.
Each cubicle can be equipped with up to six standard or type H power factor
correction modules or up to five type SAH power factor correction modules,
positioned one above the other.
The cubicle has a ventilated roof that can be equipped with one or two fans.
The door has cut-outs, one for the Varlogic power factor controller and another in the
bottom for a filter.
Standard cubicle supplied via the bottom.
64
Cubicle with a 300 mm wide compartment for

incoming cables via the top.
Functional units
System P
Catalogue numbers
DD382311
Device installation
Mounting plates are equipped with the power factor correction modules, made up of
a contactor, the corresponding protection fuses and a set of busbars.
P400 STD, P400 H, P400 SAH, L600 STD and L600 H power factor correction
modules can be installed in Prisma Plus cubicles.
They are installed in a 650 mm wide cubicle that is either 400 or 600 mm deep,
depending on the depth of the switchboard to which it will be added.
Each cubicle can be equipped with up to six standard or type H power factor
correction modules or up to five type SAH power factor correction modules,
positioned one above the other.
Type of equipment
Mounting
plate cat.
Set of captive
nuts
6
6
5
6
6
52795
52795
b
03976
03976
08921
08921
08921
DD382667
Standard or H installation.
P400 STD
P400 H
P400 SAH
L600 STD
L600 H
No. of power factor

correction modules
per cubicle
SAH installation.
DD382313
The power factor correction modules are electrically interconnected by a set of front
busbars.
The busbars are supplied by incoming cables, generally via the bottom. When the
incoming cables arrive via the top, a 300 mm wide cable compartment is required to
run the cables to the bottom.
Prisma Plus power factor correction equipment complies with and is tested according
to standard IEC 60439-1.
A
Electrical connection between modules.
65
Functional units
System P
Catalogue numbers
DD382314
Door with cut-outs
Power factor correction equipment is mounted in special, 650 mm wide cubicles that
are 400 or 600 mm deep.
Standard cover panels are used.
However, a special door is used (hinges on left only) that has cut-outs, one for the
Varlogic power factor controller and another in the bottom for a filter.
Designation
Cat. no.
Door with cut-outs
DD382315
IP30 / IP31 roof
03970
A roof with a cut-out ensures natural ventilation of the equipment.

It can also be equipped with one or two fans.
It is supplied with a cover to protect the fans against dust, condensation or falling
objects.
It is available in 400 and 600 mm depths.
Selection guide
b switchboard IP y 3x
v standard or type H equipmenty 180 kvar - natural ventilation (roof with cut-out)
v standard or type H equipment > 180 kvar and SAH - two fans are required
b switchboard IP > 3x
v two fans are required, whatever the type of equipment.
Cat. no. selection
Designation
Roof with cut-out + cover,
W = 650 mm
Cat. no.
D = 400 mm
D = 600 mm
Fan
Fan characteristics
Power rating: 35 W
Input voltage: 230 V
Throughput via outlet grill: with standard filter: 300 m3/hr
with fine filter: 220 m3/hr
Noise level: 52 dB.
66
08476
08676
08986
Functional units
System P
Catalogue numbers
DD382316
Inter-cubicle partition
Metal partition used to separate two adjacent cubicles (for example, when the power
factor correction cubicle is combined with a main low-voltage switchboard).
It is made up of two panels, each 850 mm high.
The top and bottom have knock-outs for horizontal busbars.
Supplied with the necessary supports and mounting hardware, the partition is
mounted on the framework and does not hinder installation of the power factor
correction modules.
Cat. no. selection
Designation
Cat. no.
Depth 400 mm
Depth 600 mm
04911
04931 + 04911
67
Functional units
System P
Other devices
Mounting on lateral and longitudinal
cross-members
Catalogue numbers
DD381173
Universal cross-members
DD381316
Longitudinal cross-members attached directly to the

framework.
Longitudinal cross-members
Set of two longitudinal cross-members, L = 650 mm.
They are connected directly to the framework (W = 650 mm or 800 mm (650 + 150
mm)).
They can also be mounted on the lateral cross-members (see opposite).
They are essentially used to position and support the cables of an incoming device
or to install all types of devices.
Lateral cross-members
They are connected directly to the framework.
They offer numerous positioning holes and can be used to adjust the depth of
longitudinal cross-members.
There are two lengths:
b Set of two lateral cross-members, L = 400 mm for frameworks that are 400 mm
deep
b Set of two lateral cross-members, L = 200 mm, can be added to the 400 mm crossmembers for frameworks that are 600 mm deep. They can also be installed
separately.
Cat. no. selection
Designation
Set of two lateral crossmembers
Set of two longitudinal
cross-members
DD381580
Longitudinal cross-members mounted on lateral crossmembers, L = 400 mm.
DD381581
Creation of a platform with two lateral and two longitudinal

cross-members.
Set of two lateral cross-members, L = 200 mm.
68
Cat. no.
L = 400 mm
L = 200 mm
L = 650 mm
03584
03586
03587
Functional units
System P
Other devices
Mounting on a plain backplate
Catalogue numbers
DD381174
Plain backplate
Metal plain backplate, H = 1800 mm.

The backplate is mounted in a framework, L = 650 mm or 800 mm (650 + 150).
Supplied with four angle brackets and two slide rails to facilitate mounting.
The four angle brackets can be replaced by two sets of two slide rails (03593 x 2) for
depth adjustment.
Cat. no. selection
Designation
Cat. no.
Plain backplate, H = 1800 mm (36 modules)
03570
Useful dimensions:
b width: 510 mm
b height: 1780 mm.
DD381309
2 slide rails + angle brackets
For the installation and depth adjustment of plain backplates and slotted mounting
plates.
Cat. no. selection
Designation
Cat. no.
Set of 2 slide rails + angle brackets
03593
Plain backplate mounted on slide rails.
69
Other devices
Mounting on a slotted plate
Functional units
System P
Catalogue numbers
Slotted mounting plates + 4 lateral

cross-members
Galvanised, slotted metal mounting plate, supplied with four lateral cross-members.
DD381176
Slotted mounting plate in the device compartment.
Cat. no. selection

Designation
Cat. no.
Slotted mounting plate + 4 lateral cross-members

H = 200 mm (4 modules)
H = 300 mm (6 modules)
2 universal angle brackets
03571
03572
03581
DD381427
DD381175
Installation
b either in the device zone on the four lateral cross-members (depth adjustment is
possible)
b or vertically at the rear of a cable compartment, W = 300 mm (03571) or
W = 400 mm (03572).
In this case, use four universal angle brackets.
Useful dimensions of the mounting plate

Cat. number H (mm)
L (mm)
03571
180
480
03572
280
480
Slotted mounting plate, H = 200 mm, installed vertically in a

cable compartment, W = 300 mm, using four universal angle
brackets. The height occupied is 600 mm (12 modules).
Slotted mounting plate without

lateral cross-members
Cat. no. selection

Designation
Cat. no.
Slotted mounting plate, H = 600 mm (12 modules)
03574
DD381177
DD381178
Galvanised metal, slotted mounting plate, H = 600 mm.

Supplied with four angle brackets, they connect directly to the rear of a framework,
W = 650 mm or 800 mm (650 + 150 mm).
The mounting plate can also be installed using two sets of two slide rails (03593 x 2)
for depth adjustment.
DD381179
Slotted mounting plate attached to the rear of the framework.
DD381355
Useful dimensions of the mounting plate:

H = 580 mm, L = 420 mm.
Slotted mounting plate, H = 600 mm, installed on slide rails

(03593 x 2).
70
Plain and transparent front plates: see

page 73.
Other devices
Mounting on a modular rail
Functional units
System P
Catalogue numbers
Modular rails
DD380505
Modular rail
Useful length (mm)
Cat. no.
03401
03402
04226
DD381187
DD381180
Modular rail
432
Modular rail (adjustable)
432
Modular rail, with 4 holes, dia. 6.4 mm, 1600
450 mm between centres
Adjustable modular device rail (03402).
DD381310
DD381185
Modular device rail (03401).
Modular device rail (04226).
Terminal block in a compartment on a modular device

rail (04226).
Modular rail, L = 650 mm

DD381186
Designation
Cat. no.
03590
DD381355
Modular device rail, L = 650 mm

(supplied with two angle brackets for mounting on the framework)
Plain and transparent front plates: see page 73.
71
Functional units
Fixing accessories
System P
Catalogue numbers
DD381312
Clip-nuts for slotted mounting

plates
DD381313
Clip-nuts for modular rails
Clip-nuts for lateral and

longitudinal cross-members
These nuts are used to install various devices (contactors, transformers) on a slotted
mounting plate.
They can also be installed on the cable-tie supports in cubicles, as well as on the
universal lateral and longitudinal cross-members in cubicles.
Designation
Cat. no.
20 clip-nuts for slotted mounting plates
M4
M5
M6
03180
03181
03182
These nuts are used to install various devices on a modular rail.

Designation
Cat. no.
20 clip-nuts for modular rails

M4
M5
M6
03164
03165
03166
These nuts can be installed on the universal lateral and longitudinal cross-members
in cubicles.
Designation
Cat. no.
DD381612
20 M6 captive nuts
DD381314
Pratic raiser
03194
Colour RAL 9001.

The raiser clips onto a slotted mounting plate or a modular rail.
It is 27 mm wide and serves to raise a device 10 mm.
It is made of an insulating material and can directly receive terminal blocks, modular
devices, etc.
Designation
Cat. no.
5 Pratic raisers
04224
Hexagonal spacers
DD381564
Designation
DD382600
M5 hexagonal spacers
4 spacers
H = 9 mm
H = 23 mm
H = 55 mm
4 spacers
H = 9 mm
H = 23 mm
H = 25 mm
H = 55 mm
4 spacers
H = 40 + 10 mm
72
Cat. no.
03185
03186
03187
03195
03196
03198
03197
03199
Fixing accessories
reserve space
Functional units
System P
Catalogue numbers
Universal angle brackets
The angle brackets are used to install terminal blocks, trunking, etc.
Designation
Cat. no.
03581
DD381577
DD381513
Installation of a terminal block in a cubicle.
Device compartment, W = 600 mm

DD381583

1 module (H = 50 mm)
2 modules (H = 100 mm)
DD381582
500 mm wide transparent front plate

Cat. no.
03801
03802
03803
03804
03805
03806
03807
03808
Cat. no.
03342
03343
03344
03345
DD381585
DD381584
Lateral compartment W = 400 mm

1 module (H = 50 mm)
250 mm wide transparent front plate

Cat. no.
03811
03812
03813
03814
03815
03816
03817
Cat. no.
03352
03353
03354
73
System G adapter
Functional units
System P
Catalogue numbers
System G adapter
DD381603
Kit with four lateral and two longitudinal cross-members that can be depth adjusted.
It is used to install System G components, notably the functional mounting plates, the
Powerclip insulated busbars and the 400 A rear busbars.
It is the means to enhance the flexibility of the Prisma Plus system.
It is available in two widths:
b 500 mm wide (for installation in a device compartment
L = 650 mm)
b 250 mm wide (for installation in a device compartment
L = 400 mm)
Cat. no. selection
Designation
Cat. no.
System G adapter, W= 500

System G adapter, W= 250
03595
03596
NS250 circuit breaker installed with a Polybloc distribution

block.
DD381604
Note: The adapter 03595 can be used for all mounting plates, except 03030.
The Powerclip busbars can be positioned to the left, middle or right of the modular row.
Depth adjustable, the busbars can be supplied by an Interpact INS switch-disconnector or a fixed/
withdrawable Compact NS circuit breaker, whatever the type of operating system (toggle, rotary
handle, motor mechanism).
For Powerclip busbars, order two adapters (03595 x 2).
74
75
IP30/31/55 cubicles
Presentation
Enclosures
System P
Carefully designed in every detail, Prisma

Plus cubicles are the solution for all
common switchboard configurations indoor
up to 3200 A.
A reduced number of catalogue numbers
facilitates selection, while offering the
essential functions such as:
b multiple combination possibilities
b an array of interchangeable cover panels
and doors, IP30 or IP55, without adding
gaskets
b total accessibility to all connection points
in the switchboard
b wide cable compartments
b high for large capacity (36 modules, each
50 mm high).
The discreet design, with simple lines and
oval shapes in the RAL 9001 colour, mean
Prisma Plus cubicles blend in naturally on all
commercial and industrial sites.
They offer 36 modules, each 50 mm high, of
useful space.
PD390572
Catalogue numbers
They comply with standard EN 50298.
All cover panels and doors (IP30 or IP55) are secured using quarter-turn fasteners.
Electrical continuity is achieved naturally, without having to add clips or earthing braids.
76
IP30/31/55 cubicles
Presentation
Enclosures
System P
DD380642
Catalogue numbers
DD380641
Frameworks can be combined side-by-side or back-to-back to create all switchboard

configurations up to 3200 A.
Front plates are installed on a frame that can pivot on the framework.
The front can be:
b a plain door (IP30/55)
b a transparent door (IP30/55)
b a cover frame (IP30).
77
IP30/31/55 cubicles
Presentation
Enclosures
System P
Catalogue numbers
The framework
PD390573
PD390575
PD390574
The framework is both light and rigid due to the closed sections used for the uprights.
The compact design of the framework means there is 15% more space available for
devices.
There are no sharp edges.
Assembly is particularly fast with only 12 screws, all directly accessible.
Uprights have wing holes every 25 mm.
A measuring tape can be hooked to a slot marking the starting point for
measurements on the heights required to mount devices. Marks every 50 mm and
double marks every 100 mm make it easy to count modules.
The floor fixing kit can also be used to level the cubicles.
Cross-pieces can be removed to facilitate work.
Marks make it easy to count the vertical

modules.
PD390576
Only 12 screws, all directly accessible, are

required for assembly.
The floor fixing kit can also be used to level the

cubicles.
PD390648

This frame provides direct and fast access to the devices.
It is reversible and has two factory-mounted hinges.
Only two screws are required to secure it to the framework.
Doors
PD390577
Both plain and transparent doors are reversible and designed for quick and easy left
or right-hand mounting by a single person.
The factory-mounted hinges are secured on quarter-turn studs. The one-piece
handle clips firmly into place.
All connection points are located on the front of the uprights and do not take up any
useful space for devices.
For 800 mm wide cubicles, the doors are supplied with a 150 mm wide barrier to
block access to the busbars.
A wide range of locks are available for the "push and pull" handle.
By pivoting, the front plate support frame provides direct access

to devices.
78
A discreet, user-friendly handle.
Enclosures
System P
IP30/31/55 cubicles
Presentation
Catalogue numbers
PD390649
Rear panels
The IP30 panels are made up of two identical and interchangeable half panels that
are easy to handle.
They are flat to occupy minimum of floor space.
Vents ensure natural ventilation of the switchboard.
The IP55 panels are reinforced (IK10) and have positioning studs to facilitate
mounting.
Side panels
They are easy to handle given their ergonomic design and rounded edges. Mounting
is guided at the base by hooking onto special studs.
Similar to all the cover panels, the side panels are rapidly secured by quarter-turn
fasteners.
Vented IP30 panels.
PD390650
The roof
The roof panel is flat for passage under all doorways and includes four holes for the
lifting rings.
The lifting rings can be installed and removed without removing the roof.
PD390671
The lifting rings can be installed without removing the roof.
Gland plates
Whether plain (IP55) or in two parts (IP30) to facilitate cable entry, gland plates can
be easily installed to allow the mounting of cable glands for effective sealing.
79
IP30/31/55 cubicles
Presentation
Enclosures
System P
Catalogue numbers
W = 300/400
DD380563
DD380562
DD380561
DD380560
DD380570
D400 frameworks (depth 400 mm)
W = 650/800
W = 800 with a busbar

compartment
Dimensions of cubicle with cover panels

Height
Width
Depth
2006 mm (capacity = 36 modules, each 50 mm high)

Width of the framework + 56 mm
450 mm with screw-on rear panel + front door
476 mm with front and rear doors
W = 300/400
DD380567
DD380566
DD380565
DD380564
DD380571
D600 frameworks (depth 600 mm)
W = 650/800
W = 800 with a busbar

compartment
Dimensions of cubicle with cover panels

Height
Width
Depth
Framework combinations
2006 mm (capacity = 36 modules, each 50 mm high)

Width of the framework + 56 mm
650 mm with screw-on rear panel + front door
676 mm with front and rear doors
DD380578
Side-by-side
The 650 and 800 mm wide frameworks are supplied with a combination kit.
To maintain the IP55 degree of protection, an optional gasket must be installed
between the combined cubicles.
DD380579
Back-to-back
An optional kit for back-to-back combinations is available. It is used to mechanically
connect the frameworks. It is supplied with a gasket to be installed between the
cubicles (for IP55).
80
IP30/31/55 cubicles
Presentation
Enclosures
System P
Cover panels
Front panels
b for frameworks 650 and 800 mm wide.
Any of the following can be installed in front of the
hinged front plate support frame:
v a plain door (IP30 or IP55)
v a transparent door (IP30 or IP55)
v a cover frame (IP30)
b for frameworks 300 and 400 mm wide.
A plain door is used (IP30 or IP55).
DD380568
Catalogue numbers
Rear panels
The rear panel can be made up of:
b two parts for IP30 panels
b one reinforced part for IP55 panels.
A plain door can also be used, notably for switchboards
with rear connections (800 and 1000 mm deep).
Side panels
A set of two panels is used (IP30 or IP55).
If frameworks are installed back to back (double depth),
two sets of two panels are required.
Roof
There is a plain roof (IP30 or IP55) for each size of
framework.
Gland plates
They are mandatory, whatever the desired degree of
protection for the switchboard.
For each size of framework, there are plain gland plates
(IP55) or two-part gland plates (IP30).
Degree of protection
IP30 switchboard
Use:
b the IP30 cover panels with a door or cover frame
b IP30 plain roof
b gland plates (plain or in two parts).
IP55 switchboard
Use:
b the IP55 cover panels with a door
b IP55 plain roof
b plain gland plates.
If frameworks are combined, use the IP55 sealing kit for
side-by-side combinations.
Prisma Plus cubicle, W = 650 mm + cable compartment, W = 300 mm.
DD380569
IP31 switchboard
Use:
b the IP30 cover panels with a door
b IP30 plain roof
b IP31 sealing kit
Prisma Plus cubicle, W = 800 mm + cable compartment, W = 300 mm.
81
Cover panels
Enclosures
System P
Catalogue numbers
For switchboards with front

connections.
b front panels
Any of the following can be installed
in front of the hinged front plate support
frame:
v a fixed cover frame (IP30)
b rear panel = screw-on panel
b side panels = set of two panels
b plain roof
DD380554
400 mm deep switchboard
Parts list for switchboard 1

1 08406 : framework, W = 650, D = 400, H = 2000
2 08506 : hinged front plate support frame, W = 650
3 08556 : cover frame, W = 650
4 08736 : rear panel, W = 650 (two half panels)
5 08750 : set of two side panels, D = 400
6 08436 : plain roof, W = 650, D = 400
08486 : plain gland plate, W = 650, D = 400
Switchboard 1 - IP30 cubicle with cover frame, W = 650.
DD380605

1 08403 : framework, W = 300, D = 400, H = 2000
2 08407 : framework, W = 800, D = 400, H = 2000
3 08406 : framework, W = 650, D = 400, H = 2000
5 08513 : plain door, W = 300
6 08538 : transparent door, W = 800 (supplied with barrier
for busbar compartment, W = 150)
7 08536 : transparent door, W = 650
12 08433 : plain roof, W = 300, D = 400
13 08438 : plain roof, W = 800, D = 400
14 08436 : plain roof, W = 650, D = 400
15 08483 : plain gland plate, W = 300, D = 400
DD380555
DD380607
Switchboard 2 - combination of IP30 cubicles with transparent doors.
82
Cover panels
Enclosures
System P
Catalogue numbers
For switchboards with front

connections.
b front panels
in front of the hinged front
plate support frame:
b plain roof
DD380556

1 08607 : framework, W = 800, D = 600, H = 2000
3 08558: fixed cover frame, W = 800 (supplied with
a wicket door, W = 150)
6 08638 : plain roof, W = 800, D = 600
DD380611

1 08603 : framework, W = 300, D = 600, H = 2000
2 08607 : framework, W = 800, D = 600, H = 2000
3 08606 : framework, W = 650, D = 600, H = 2000
5 08513 : plain door, W = 300
6 08538 : transparent door, W = 800 (supplied with barrier
for busbar compartment, W = 150)
7 08536 : transparent door, W = 650
12 08633 : plain roof, W = 300, D = 600
13 08638 : plain roof, W = 800, D = 600
14 08636 : plain roof, W = 650, D = 600
DD380557
DD380609
Switchboard 1 - IP30 cubicle with cover frame, W = 800.
Switchboard 2 - combination of IP30 cubicles with transparent doors.
83
Cover panels
Enclosures
System P
Catalogue numbers
Made up of two cubicles

back-to-back.
Rear connections are possible.
b front panels
frame:
b plain roof
Parts list
1 08407 x 2:
2 08406 x 2:
3 08506 :
4 08558 :
08556 :
08518 :
7
8
9
10
11
12
08516 :
08750 x 2:
08438 x 2:
08436 x 2:
08487 x 2:
08486 x 2:
08719 x 2:
DD380615
5
6
84
2 frameworks, W = 800, D = 400, H = 2000

2 frameworks, W = 650, D = 400, H = 2000
hinged front plate support frame, W = 650
fixed cover frame, W = 800 (supplied with a
wicket door, W = 150)
cover frame, W = 650
plain door, W = 800 (supplied with barrier for
busbar compartment, W = 150)
plain door, W = 650
2 sets of two side panels, D = 400
2 plain rooves, W = 800, D = 400
2 plain rooves, W = 650, D = 400
2 plain gland plates W = 800, D = 400
2 plain gland plates W = 650, D = 400
double depth combination kit
DD382572
Combination of IP30 cubicles with cover frames.
Cover panels
Enclosures
System P
Catalogue numbers
Made up of two cubicles back-to-back.

Rear connections are possible.
b front panels
frame:
b plain roof
DD382573
Parts list for IP30 switchboard

1 08607 :
framework, W = 800, D = 600, H = 2000
2 08606 :
framework, W = 650, D = 600, H = 2000
3 08407 :
framework, W = 800, D = 400, H = 2000
4 08406 :
framework, W = 650, D = 400, H = 2000
5 08506 :
6 08538 :
transparent door, W = 800
(supplied with barrier for busbar compartment,
W = 150)
7 08536 :
8 08518 :
08516 :
08760 :
08750 :
08638 :
08636 :
08438 :
08436 :
08687 :
08686 :
08487 :
08486 :
08719 :
plain door, W = 650

set of two side panels, D = 600
plain roof, W = 800, D = 600
plain roof, W = 650, D = 600
plain roof, W = 800, D = 400
plain roof, W = 650, D = 400
plain gland plate, W = 800, D = 600
Parts list for IP55 switchboard

1 08607 :
framework, W = 800, D = 600, H = 2000
2 08606 :
framework, W = 650, D = 600, H = 2000
3 08407 :
framework, W = 800, D = 400, H = 2000
4 08406 :
framework, W = 650, D = 400, H = 2000
5 08506 :
6 08548 :
transparent door, W = 800 (supplied with
barrier for busbar compartment, W = 150)
7 08546 :
8 08528 :
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
08526 :
08765 :
08755 :
08658 :
08656 :
08458 :
08456 :
08687 :
08686 :
08487 :
08486 :
08717 x 2:
08719 x 2:
Combination of cubicles with transparent doors.
DD380613
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
plain door, W = 650

plain roof, W = 800, D = 600
plain roof, W = 650, D = 600
plain roof, W = 800, D = 400
plain roof, W = 650, D = 400
IP55 sealing kit for side-by-side combinations
85
Cubicles
Frameworks
Enclosures
System P
DD380574
DD380800
DD380572
400 mm deep framework
DD380573
Catalogue numbers
DD380801
DD380575
600 mm deep framework
DD380577
08407.
DD380576
Framework width
Cat. no.
W = 300 mm
08403
W = 400 mm
08404
W = 650 mm
08406
W = 800 mm
08408
W = 800 mm (650 + 150)
08407
b composition of catalogue numbers:
v two frames (with two additional uprights for W = 650 + 150 mm cubicles for the
mounting plates and to separate the busbar compartment)
v four cross-pieces
v mounting hardware
v side-by-side combination kit
b for the 800 mm width, the busbar compartment can be on the left or right
b cubicles can be combined side-by-side and back-to-back
b can be equipped with IP30 or IP55 cover panels.
Framework width
Cat. no.
W = 300 mm
08603
W = 400 mm
08604
W = 650 mm
08606
W = 800 mm
08608
W = 800 mm (650 + 150)
08607
b composition of catalogue numbers:
v two frames (three for W = 650 + 150 mm cubicles), equipped with intermediate
uprights for the mounting plates
v four cross-pieces
v mounting hardware
v side-by-side combination kit
b for the 800 mm width, the busbar compartment can be on the left or right
b cubicles can be combined side-by-side and back-to-back
b can be equipped with IP30 or IP55 cover panels.
08607.
Designation
DD31324
DD381323
08506.
86
Hinged front plate support frame, W = 650mm
Cat. no.
08506
b reversible for left or right-hand opening

b secured at two points using M6 screws
b can be mounted on 650 mm and 800 mm (650 + 150) wide cubicles.
08506.
Cubicles
Frameworks
Enclosures
System P
Catalogue numbers
Framework combinations
Side-by-side
DD380751
The 650 and 800 mm wide frameworks are supplied with a combination kit
comprising six M6 bolts.
To maintain the IP55 degree of protection, an optional gasket must be installed
between the combined cubicles.
Designation
Cat. no.
08717
DD381325
IP55 sealing kit for side-by-side combinations (1 kit per combination)
DD380752
Back-to-back
Designation
Double depth combination kit
Cat. no.
08719
DD381326
The kit is made up of:

b a set of hardware for the mechanical connections between the cross-pieces
b two assembly plates to connect the uprights
b the IP55 sealing kit.
DD381327
Accessories
Designation
Set of 20 screws + wing nuts for framework
Cat. no.
08921
87
Cubicles
IP30/31 cover panels
Enclosures
System P
Catalogue numbers
Door, W = 650/800 mm.
Designation
Cat. no.
W = 650 mm
08516
W = 800 mm
08518
W = 650 mm
08536
Transparent door
W = 800 mm
08538
b equipped with a handle and keylock (key 405). For other possibilities, see page 96.
DD380583
DD380582
Front panels
Plain door
Note: The 800 mm door is supplied with a 150 mm barrier for the side compartment.
08538.
Cover frame
DD380581
DD380580
08536.
Designation
W = 650 mm
W = 800 mm (650 +150)
b secured using four screws.
Cover frame
Cat. no.
08556
08558
Note: For 800 mm wide frameworks, the 650 mm frame is supplied with a plain wicket door,
150 mm wide.
08556.
08558.
Designation
Cat. no.
W = 300 mm
08513
W = 400 mm
08514
W = 300 mm
08593
Door with cut-out
W = 400 mm
08594
DD380602
DD380584
Door, W = 300/400 mm.

Plain door
Note: The door with cut-out can be equipped with front plates for 72 x 72 or 96 x 96 instruments,
see page 60.
08513.
88
08593.
Cubicles
IP30/31 cover panels
Enclosures
System P
Catalogue numbers
Rear panels
Rear panel
DD380603
Designation
Cat. no.
W = 300 mm
W = 400 mm
W = 650 mm
W = 800 mm
b made up of two half panels with vents
b supplied with quarter-turn fasteners.
Rear panel
08733
08734
08736
08738
08738.
DD382566
Plain door
Designation
Cat. no.
W = 300 mm
08513
W = 400 mm
08514
W = 650 mm
08516
W = 800 mm
08518
b equipped with a handle and keylock (key 405). For other possibilities, see page 96
b reversible for left or right-hand opening.
Plain door
08518.
Side panels
Side panels
DD380600
Designation
Cat. no.
D = 400 mm
D = 600 mm
08750
08760
Supplied with quarter-turn fasteners.
Side panels for "L" combinations

Combination of two cubicles with different depths (800 + 400 or 1000 + 600).
Designation
Cat. no.
Set of two side panels for "L"
combinations
D = 400 mm
08756
DD381329
08750.
DD381328
These panels simply replace the standard side panels.
Roof
DD380601
Designation
Plain IP30 roof, D = 400 mm
Plain IP30 roof, D = 600 mm
Cat. no.
W = 300 mm
W = 400 mm
W = 650 mm
W = 800 mm
W = 300 mm
W = 400 mm
W = 650 mm
W = 800 mm
08433
08434
08436
08438
08633
08634
08636
08638
b supplied with quarter-turn fasteners for mounting on the framework

b with markings for cut-outs, if necessary.
08438.
IP31 sealing kit
The kit is made up of a self-adhesive gasket that attaches to the roof and a deflector.
It ensures the IP31 degree of protection for a 650 or 800 mm wide cubicle, or for two
cubicles (800 + 400) when they are equipped with plain or transparent front doors.
Designation
Cat. no.
IP31 sealing kit
08711
89
Cubicles
IP55 cover panels
Enclosures
System P
Catalogue numbers
Door, W = 650/800 mm
Designation
Cat. no.
W = 650 mm
08526
W = 800 mm
08528
W = 650 mm
08546
Transparent door
W = 800 mm
08548
b equipped with a factory-mounted polyurethane (PUR) gasket
DD380583
DD380582
Front panels
Plain door
08546.
08548.
DD380584
Door, W = 300/400 mm
Designation
Cat. no.
W = 300 mm
08523
W = 400 mm
08524
Plain door
08523.
90
Cubicles
IP55 cover panels
Enclosures
System P
Catalogue numbers
Rear panels
Rear panel
Cat. no.
W = 300 mm
08743
W = 400 mm
08744
W = 650 mm
08746
W = 800 mm
08748
b supplied with mounting hardware
b one-piece, reinforced panel designed to ensure the degree of protection.
DD380599
Designation
Rear panel
08748.
DD382566
Plain door
Designation
Cat. no.
W = 300 mm
08523
W = 400 mm
08524
W = 650 mm
08526
W = 800 mm
08528
b equipped with a handle and keylock (key 405). For other possibilities, see page 96
b reversible for left or right-hand opening.
Plain door
08528.
Side panels
Side panels
DD380600
Designation
Cat. no.
D = 400 mm
D = 600 mm
08755
08765

b supplied with mounting hardware.
Side panels for "L" combinations

Combination of two cubicles with different depths (800 + 400 or 1000 + 600).
Designation
Cat. no.
Set of two side panels for "L"
combinations
D = 400 mm
08756
DD381328
DD381329
b these panels simply replace the standard side panels

b equipped with a factory-mounted polyurethane (PUR) gasket.
08755.
Roof
DD380601
Designation
Plain roof, D = 400 mm
Plain roof, D = 600 mm
Cat. no.
W = 300 mm
W = 400 mm
W = 650 mm
W = 800 mm
W = 300 mm
W = 400 mm
W = 650 mm
W = 800 mm
08453
08454
08456
08458
08653
08654
08656
08658

b supplied with mounting hardware
b with markings for clear identification of cable-running zones, if necessary.
08458.
91
Cubicles
Plinth
Gland plate
Enclosures
System P
Catalogue numbers
Plinth, H = 100 mm
DD381330
The plinth is made up of two catalogue numbers:

b one catalogue number comprising four corner posts + two cross-pieces (front and
rear), that can be used in side-by-side combinations or stacked to form a plinth 200
mm high (maximum)
b one catalogue number comprising two side plates (400 or 600 mm).
Each catalogue number is supplied with the necessary hardware.
Designation
two side plates
D = 400 mm
D = 600 mm
08723
08724
08726
08728
08720
08721
DD381332
W = 300 mm
W = 400 mm
W = 650 mm
W = 800 mm
DD381331
08726 + 08720.
Cat. no.
four corner posts + two cross-pieces (front and

rear)
Two stacked plinths.
DD381333
Side-by-side combination of two cubicles with a

plinth.
The front and rear cross-pieces can be easily

removed for a pallet-mover.
Gland plates
Gland plates (IP55)
DD381334
Designation
Gland plates, D = 400
Gland plates, D = 600
Cat. no.
W = 300 mm
W = 400 mm
W = 650 mm
W = 800 mm (650 + 150)
W = 800 mm
W = 300 mm
W = 400 mm
W = 650 mm
W = 800 mm (650 + 150)
W = 800 mm
08483
08484
08486
08487
08488
08683
08684
08686
08687
08688
08486.
DD381335
Two-part gland plates (IP30)

Designation
Two-part gland plates, D = 400 mm
Two-part gland plates, D = 600 mm
08496.
92
Cat. no.
W = 300 mm
W = 400 mm
W = 650 mm
W = 800 mm (650 + 150)
W = 800 mm
W = 300 mm
W = 400 mm
W = 650 mm
W = 800 mm (650 + 150)
W = 800 mm
08493
08494
08496
08497
08498
08693
08694
08696
08697
08698
Enclosures
System P
Cubicles
Right-angle kit
Door stopper
Catalogue numbers
DD381336
Metal duct.
Used to create and protect the connection of horizontal busbars between two
cubicles installed at right angles.
Designation
Cat. no.
08713
DD381337
Free support and joints, see page 106.
Door stopper
Device used to hold the door open.
Designation
Door stopper
Cat. no.
08707
93
Enclosures
System P
Catalogue numbers
Lifting rings
DD381541
Set of four lifting rings screwed to the framework.

Use a set of lifting rings for each framework (W = 650 and 800 mm) containing
devices.
When two cubicles with devices have been combined, use a lifting beam.
Designation
Cat. no.
4 lifting rings
08700
DD381543
DD381542
b can be installed and removed without removing the roof

b even if they are left attached, the switchboard conserves its original degree of
protection.
Positions of the lifting rings for two combined cubicles containing devices. In this case, a lifting
beam must be used.
Framework stabiliser kit

Cat. no.
DD381544
Designation
Stabiliser kit
b
b
b
b
b
b
08701
made up of four blocks under the framework

suitable for all types of cubicles, whatever the width and depth
increases the stability of the cubicle during mounting of devices
makes possible cubicle handling using a pallet mover or a forklift
protects the front, side and rear cover panels during handling
can be reused.

DD381547
Designation
Cat. no.
08703
DD381552
b made up of four independent clamps

b clamp on "U" sections (H = 175 mm, W = 70 mm) or "I" sections (H = 120 mm,
W = 64 mm)
b clamp travel = 11 mm.
94
Enclosures
System P
Catalogue numbers
Levelling kit
DD381545
Designation
Cat. no.
Levelling kit (set of 4 fixtures)
08702
DD381550
DD381549
b can be installed at any time, even when the cubicle is already in position
b maximum adjustment range = 10 mm
v secures the cubicle to the floor.
Maximum adjustment range = 10 mm.
DD381551
Secures the cubicle to the floor.
Recommended positions of the fixtures for combined cubicles.

DD381548
Designation
Cat. no.
08704
DD381553
DD381554
b made up of two brackets and four clamps

b can be used to offset the switchboard fixing points for easier access
b the wall brackets ensure sufficient wall clearance (at least 30 mm) for natural
convection.
At least 30 mm of clearance between the wall and a cubicle with a vented rear panel is required
for natural convection.
The offset floor fixing points are easily accessible.
95
Door handles and locks
Enclosures
System P
Catalogue numbers
DD380652
DD380656
Handles
Designation
EURO handle without barrel
DD381201
DD381202
Designation
ASSA handle without barrel
Standard handle without insert or barrel
Designation
DD381204
DD381203
Barrel locks, inserts
Cat. no.
08932
Cat. no.
08933
Cat. no.
08930
Can be equipped with all the barrel locks and inserts presented below.
The barrel locks and inserts below can be mounted on handle 08930 and on all the
door handles of the Prisma Plus range after removing the standard barrel lock (key
no. 405).
Designation
Cat. no.
Barrel locks
Barrel lock + 2 keys no. 405
Barrel lock + 2 keys no. 455
Barrel lock + 2 keys no. 1242E
Barrel lock + 2 keys no. 3113A
Barrel lock + 2 keys no. 2433A
Inserts
DIN double bar insert
Screwdriver slot insert
6.5 mm male triangle insert
7 mm male triangle insert
6 mm male square insert
6 mm female square insert
08940
08941
08942
08943
08944
08945
08946
08947
08948
08949
08950
08951
08952
08953
08955
Padlocking
DD382442
Designation
Handle padlocking kit
Cat. no.
08938
The kit can be installed on the door handles of the Prisma Plus range equipped with
any of the barrel locks and inserts above.
96
switchboard lighting
Enclosures
System P
Catalogue numbers
Earthing braid
DD382618
Designation
Cat. no.
Earthing braid, 6 mm
08910
Earthing wire, 6 mm
08911
DD351338
The braid is equipped with a 4 mm diameter lug at one end and a 6 mm diameter lug
on the other.
It is used to earth:
b a door or wicket door with devices
b a front-plate support frame in a cubicle.
08910.
DD382620
DD382619
Touch-up
accessories
Designation
Cat. no.
Touch-up spray paint, colour RAL 9001

Touch-up paint brush, colour RAL 9001
08962
08961
Drawing holder
DD382621
Designation
Cat. no.
Adhesive drawing holder, colour RAL 9001
DD382622
08963
This system is generally used to illuminate the front of a switchboard.

The kit is made up of:
b a base
b a neon tube
b afront plate with cut-out (1 module)
b a door contact.
Characteristics
b supply voltage: 220/240 V
b power rating: 8 W.
Cat. no. selection
Designation
No. of modules
Cat. no.
08964
Installation in a cubicle (System P) using a System G adapter

(03595).
DD382623
Lamp with a magnetic base for installation behind a door or directly on the cubicle
framework.
Supplied without a power cord.
It does not take up any useful space in the switchboard.
Designation
Cat. no.
08965
Characteristics
b supply voltage: 220/240 V
b power rating: 11 W.
97
Enclosures
System P
Catalogue numbers

DD381594
Designation
Front plate hinge kit (set of 2 hinges)
Cat. no.
08584
Lead-sealable screws
DD381596
Designation
Blanking plates
03358
For modular devices

Designation
Cat. no.
DD381597
Blanking strip, H = 46 mm, L = 1000 mm

colour: white RAL 9001
DD381598
For Compact NS100/250 and Interpact INS250

Designation
colour: white RAL 9001
98
Cat. no.
4 lead-sealable front plate screws
03220
03221
Cat. no.
03249
Enclosures
System P
Catalogue numbers

DD381721
Designation
Cat. no.
Identification labels
08900
Clip-on labels
DD381714
Clip-on labels
The clip-on support is supplied with a paper label and a transparent cover.
It clips onto the front plate horizontally or vertically and can be screwed to any
support (plain door, plain front plate, etc.).
IERE
LUM
Engraving plates
Supplied separately, these plates simply replace the paper labels.
Cat. no. selection
Clip-on label.
Designation
DD381757
12 clip-on labels
12 engraving plates
08913
08915
08917
08914
08916
08918
DD381713
IERE
LUM
Cat. no.
18 x 35
18 x 72
25 x 85
18 x 35
18 x 72
25 x 85
Engraving plate.
DD381715
Adhesive labels
The adhesive label holders are supplied with a paper label and a transparent cover.
Designation
Cat. no.
12 label holders, W = 180 mm
12 adhesive label holders, W = 432 mm
12 divisible label holders, W = 650 mm
H = 24 mm
H = 36 mm
H = 24 mm
H = 36 mm
H = 24 mm
H = 36 mm
08905
08906
08903
08904
08907
08908
DD381751
Symbol sheets
Each sheet comprises adhesive symbols that can be positioned on the identification
labels to immediately identify the type of circuit.
Standard symbols:
b loads: sockets, lights, heating units, etc.
b rooms: bedroom, bathroom, etc.
Special symbols:
b loads: lightning arrestor, gate, swimming pool, etc.
b rooms: technical room, computer room, etc.
Cat. no. selection
Designation
Set of ten symbol sheets
Cat. no.
standard
special
13735
13736
DD381753
DD381752
Standard symbols.
Special symbols.
Symbols on an adhesive label holder.
99
Enclosures
System P
Catalogue numbers
Presentation
In most cases and notably for IP30 switchboards, convection takes place naturally
and does not require fans.
However, when the switchboard is installed in temperate environments or when the
degree of protection is high (IP55), ventilation accessories are indispensable. For
more in-depth information on selecting air-conditioning accessories and the thermal
management of switchboards, see page 242
Front or side fan
The switchboard is cooled by drawing in cool external air.
DD381703
Presentation
The set comprises the fan with a grill and a filter.
It can be clipped directly on the cut-out front plate.
Installation
These fans are generally installed at the bottom of floor-standing enclosures:
b by cutting out a side panel
b or on the front, using the front plate with cut-out for a fan.
Cat. no. selection
Designation
Cat. no.
Fan
Front plate with cut-out for fan (7 modules)
08987
03890
DD381723
Characteristics
Power rating: 70 W.
Input voltage: 230 V.
Noise level: 69 dB.
Degree of protection: IP54.
Weight: 3 kg.
Throughput: 460 m3/h.
Filter for front or side fan

DD381704
Presentation
The grill is supplied with a standard filter that can be replaced or exchanged for a finer
filter.
The grill can be clipped directly on the cut-out front plate.
DD381724
Installation
The grill/filter can be installed:
b by cutting out a side panel
b or on the front, using the front plate with cut-out for a fan.
100
Characteristics
Degree of protection: IP54.
Designation
Cat. no.
Grill with filter (supplied with standard filter, maximum throughput = 130 m3/h)
5 standard filters (replacement)
5 fine filters
Front plate with cut-out for fan (7 modules)
08988
08989
08990
03890
Enclosures
System P
Catalogue numbers
Roof fan
DD381725
Presentation
A roof with a cut-out (IP31) can also be equipped with one or two fans.
It is supplied with a cover to protect the fans against dust or falling objects.
It is available in 400 and 600 mm depths.
Cat. no. selection
Designation
Cat. no.
Ventilated roof, W = 650 mm
D = 400 mm
D = 600 mm
08476
08676
08986
Fan
DD381648
DD382315
Fan characteristics
Power rating: 35 W.
Noise level: 52 dB.
Throughput: 300 m3/h.
Ventilated front plate

DD381677
Designation
Cat. no.
IP30 ventilated front plate, H = 50 mm (1 module), S = 80 cm

IP30 ventilated front plate, H = 150 mm (3 modules), S = 250 cm
03891
03895
Located at the top and bottom of the switchboard, IP30 ventilated front plates
facilitate natural convection in the switchboard.
S is the surface area of the openings.
Designation
DD381574
DD381573
Heating elements
55 W heating resistor
D (mm)
Cat. no.
184
184
180
70
70
80
60
60
80
08992
08993
08994
The resistors can be mounted horizontally or vertically. They prevent condensation,

corrosion and superficial leakage currents.
They maintain a positive temperature in the cubicles when external temperatures
drop very low.
Characteristics
b aluminium case with fins
b turns off at 60C, turns on at 25-30C (temperature of the resistor itself)
b equipped with a symmetrical rail for rapid mounting (clips on).
08994.
08992, 08993.
DD381575
Thermostat
Designation
Thermostat
Cat. no.
08998
Used to control the temperature inside electrical switchboards in conjunction with

heating resistors and fans.
Setting range: +5 C to +60 C.
Fixing: clips onto a modular rail.
101
102
Accessories contents
Distribution
Busbar presentation
Horizontal busbars
Presentation of Linergy busbars
Lateral Linergy busbars up to 3200 A
Rear Linergy busbars up to 1600 A
Vertical flat busbars
Lateral flat busbars up to 1600 A
Lateral flat busbars up to 3200 A
Rear flat busbars up to 1600 A
PE conductor
PEN conductor
630 A Powerclip busbars
400 A rear busbars
Insulated flexible bars
Busbar accessories
Earth bars
Neutral bars
Terminal blocks
Form 1 electrical switchboards
Form 2 partitioning
Form 3 partitioning
Form 4 partitioning
Other partitions
Overview of distribution blocks
Polybloc distribution block
160/630 A multi-stage distribution block
Multiclip distribution block
Terminal blocks
Connection accessories
Cable running
Dimensions
Cubicles
104
104
106
108
112
114
116
118
119
120
122
123
124
126
128
130
131
132
134
136
138
140
144
146
148
150
152
154
156
158
160
161
164
164
103
Busbar presentation
Distribution
System P
Prisma Plus provides electrical

switchboards with a complete and
consistent system capable of supplying
electrical energy where it is needed:
b modern, high-performance busbars
b perfectly sized, prefabricated connections
b distribution blocks that blend perfectly with
the devices.
All components are put through rigorous
tests with Schneider Electric devices to
ensure that the resulting switchboards are
dependable and comply with international
standard IEC 60439-1.
DD382281
Catalogue numbers
DD382278
Linergy busbars for switchboards up to 1600 A.
Linergy busbars for switchboards up to 3200 A.

Two parallel, vertical busbars must be interconnected by three equipotential links.
104
Busbar presentation
Distribution
System P
Rear busbars up to 1600 A.

b flat copper bars with holes, L = 1675 mm,
5 mm thick
b flat copper bars with holes, L = 1675 mm,
10 mm thick
b Linergy channelled aluminium busbars,
L = 1675 mm.
DD381615
Horizontal and lateral busbars up to 3200 A require the

same amount of space.
b horizontal busbars
v flat copper bars without holes, L = 2000 mm,
5 mm thick
v flat copper bars without holes, L = 2000 mm,
10 mm thick
b lateral busbars
v flat copper bars with holes, L = 1675 mm,
5 mm thick
v flat copper bars with holes, L = 1675 mm,
10 mm thick
v Linergy channelled aluminium busbars,
L = 1675 mm.
DD381614
Catalogue numbers
105
Horizontal busbars
Up to 1600 A
Flat bars 5 mm thick
Distribution
System P
Catalogue numbers
Busbar calculation
Number and size of copper busbars

Permissible current (A)
The bars are secured by insulated supports

attached to the framework.
The tables opposite indicate:
b the number and size of the bars to be
used, depending on the permissible current
level in the busbars
b the number of busbar supports for each
type of framework, depending on:
v the size of the busbars
v the rated short-time withstand current Icw.
For more information on busbar
calculations, see page 184.
No. of bars / phase
IP y 31
IP > 31
800
750
1 bar, 60 x 5
1000
900
1 bar, 80 x 5
1400
1250
2 bars, 60 x 5
1800
1600
2 bars, 80 x 5
Note: The permissible current values for the busbars are given for an ambient temperature of
35C around the switchboard.
Number of supports
Framework width Size of bars
(mm)
(mm)
No. of supports
Icw (kA rms / 1 s)
15
W = 650/800 mm
W = 300 mm
W = 400 mm
Busbar selection
25
1 bar, 60 x 5
1 bar, 80 x 5
2 bars, 60 x 5
2 bars, 80 x 5
All sizes
All sizes
30
40
50
1
1
2
2
Flat busbars, L = 2000 mm
DD381223
Designation
Cat. no.
Copper bar without holes, 60 x 5

04536
04538
Busbar supports
Two fixed supports for 650/800 mm wide frameworks and one fixed support for 300/
400 mm wide frameworks are mandatory. If more supports are required, use free
supports.
Designation
Cat. no.
04664
04662
.
DD381225
DD381226
Fixed support for horizontal bars

Free support (additional)
Icw 30 kA rms / 1 s.
04664.
04662.
.
Joints
Designation
DD381227
1 joint for bars
Cat. no.
W = 60 mm
W = 80 mm
04640
04641
Note: when installed, at the bottom of cubicles, the busbars must be partitioned, see page 137.
04640.
Busbar dimensions
DD381228
Type of busbars
Top or bottom horizontal busbars
106
No. of vertical modules required

3
Horizontal busbars
Up to 3200 A
Flat bars 10 mm thick
Distribution
System P
Catalogue numbers
Busbar calculation
Number and size of copper busbars
The bars are secured by insulated supports

attached to the framework.
The tables opposite indicate:
b the number of busbar supports for each
type of framework, depending on:
v the rated short-time withstand current Icw.
No. of bars / phase
IP y 31
IP > 31
1200
1080
1 bar, 50 x 10
1400
1250
1 bar, 60 x 10
1800
1600
1 bar, 80 x 10
2050
1850
2 bars, 50 x 10
2300
2000
2 bars, 60 x 10
2820
2500
2 bars, 80 x 10
3300
2900
2 bars, 100 x 10
Note: he permissible current values for the busbars are given for an ambient temperature of 35C
around the switchboard.
Number of supports
Framework width Size of bars
(mm)
(mm)
No. of supports
Icw (kA rms / 1 s)
25
W = 650/800 mm
W = 300 mm
W = 400 mm
Busbar selection
30
1 bar, 50 x 10
1 bar, 60 x 10
1 bar, 80 x 10
2 bars, 50 x 10
2 bars, 60 x 10
2 bars, 80 x 10
2 bars, 100 x 10
All sizes
All sizes
40
50
60
65
75
85
4
2
1
1
2
2
DD381229
Designation
Cat. no.

04545
04546
04548
04550
Busbar supports
Two fixed supports for 650/800 mm wide frameworks and one fixed support for 300/
400 mm wide frameworks are mandatory. If more supports are required, use free
supports.
Designation
Cat. no.
Fixed support for horizontal
bars
Free support (additional) for
bars
Width y 80 mm
Width > 80 mm
Width y 80 mm
Width > 80 mm
04664
04664 + 04671
04662
04662 + 04671
DD381225
DD381231
DD381226
04664.
04662.
Joints
Designation
Cat. no.
1 joint for bars
Width 50 and 60 mm
04640
Width 80 and 100 mm
04641
Note: when installed, at the bottom of cubicles, the busbars must be partitioned, see page 137.
04641.
DD381228
Busbar dimensions
Type of busbars
Top or bottom horizontal busbars
No. of vertical modules required

3
107
Distribution
System P
Linergy busbars
up to 1600 A
DD382326
Catalogue numbers
Type of busbar
Very rigid profile to improve withstand to
electrodynamic forces.
Connection points accessible from the front and
adjustable from top to bottom.
Compatible with all Prisma Plus prefabricated
connections.
Installation
Can be installed independently on either the left or
right-hand side of an 800 mm wide framework (650 +
150 mm) for distribution on either side.
For an Icw y 40 kA rms / 1 s, two supports in the
"device" zone are sufficient to maintain the bars. A third
support is required as the bottom support for the bars.
Linergy busbars
up to 3200 A
DD382327
Linergy busbars up to 1600 A.
Type of busbar
Very rigid profile to improve withstand to
electrodynamic forces.
Connection points accessible from the front and
adjustable from top to bottom.
Compatible with all Prisma Plus prefabricated
connections.
Installation
Two sets of busbars are installed in parallel in two
adjacent frameworks, each 800 mm wide
(650 + 150 mm). They must be interconnected by three
equipotential links. Generally speaking, these links are
provided by:
b the horizontal busbars
b connections in the middle and at the bottom of the
vertical busbars.
For an Icw y 40 kA rms / 1 s, two supports in the
"device" zone are sufficient to maintain the bars. A third
support is required as the bottom support for the bars.
Linergy busbars up to 3200 A.
108
Distribution
System P
Catalogue numbers
Presentation of busbars
PD390403
PD390402
PD390401
Linergy busbars are installed in a busbar zone to the left or right of the device zone.
The busbars are secured to the framework by supports that maintain the distances
between busbars. All connection points are directly accessible from the front of the
switchboard.
The bars are channelled and the devices, installed on either side, can be connected
at any height, without drilling.
All connection points are directly accessible

from the front of the switchboard.
PD390405
PD390404
Sliding bolts enable connections at any height,

without drilling.
Prefabricated connections supply the devices

mounted to the left or right of the busbars.
The bottom support maintains the bars in

position.
109
Distribution
System P
Catalogue numbers
Linergy channelled busbars implement

advanced technology and are made of
aluminium, a material widely used for
electrical conduction,.
Ductile and malleable, aluminium can be
used to create complex shapes that improve
electrical conduction, rigidity, ventilation and
appearance.
PD390408
A new generation of channelled

busbars
PD390568
Ergonomic shape
The low density of aluminium and its malleability make it possible to produce hightech sections offering both exceptional rigidity and minimum weight.
Twice as light as copper for the same current ratings, the busbars can held easily in
one. What is more, their shape is ideal for handling and installation.
Maximum power in less space

The manufacturing process allows great flexibility in terms of the shape, notably for
the creation of internal partitions that increase the current-flow perimeter. In this way,
busbar efficiency is optimised and external dimensions reduced.
As a result, up to 1600 A, these channelled busbars can be installed in compartments
just 150 mm wide and 400 mm deep.
Very rigid shapes

The ease and flexibility of the extrusion process makes it possible to create closed
and ribbed sections offering exceptional rigidity.
Two supports spaced over the bars and one at the bottom are sufficient to cover most
installation needs (Icw y 40 kA rms / 1 s).
Always at the right temperature

The increased heat exchange surface enhances the natural convection of the bars.
The bars are anodised to enhance emission and radiation, and thus the evacuation
of heat.
Whatever the switchboard configuration, the bars maintain their performance level.
110
Distribution
System P
Designed to resist ageing and creep, the

busbar supports, made of a heat-setting,
insulating material, offer a particularly high
level of performance, notably their withstand
to high temperatures.
Their remarkable mechanical withstand
means fewer are required, thus freeing
maximum space along the busbars for the
connection of devices.
PD390413
Catalogue numbers
Multi-function busbar supports
PD390415
PD390393
The same support is used for all busbars up to 1600 A and can also be used as the
bottom support.
As a result, ordering is easy and stocking costs are reduced.
Electrical connections without drilling

Tested in special test stations, copper connections are used to interconnect two sets
of busbars.
Connections are fast with 10 mm thick horizontal busbars.
Drilling is not required; the connections are made by clamping the busbars.
An aluminium bar with a high-quality copper contact surface

A copper powder is thermally projected at high speed along the entire length of the
bar. It forms a rough, exceptionally hard surface. The quality of the electrical
connection is enhanced by the many contact points. The result is convincing and
even better than a traditional copper/copper connection.
Modern busbars
Linergy busbars are produced in a number of different shapes offering both a high
level of performance and good appearance. The anodisation process protects
against ageing and provides an attractive finish.. The copper-coloured bands along
the entire length reflect the modern design and high technology of these busbars.
111
Lateral Linergy busbars

up to 3200 A
Distribution
System P
Catalogue numbers
Busbar calculation
Linergy
busbars
The table opposite indicates:

b the catalogue numbers of the bars to be
b the number of supports required,
depending on the rated short-time withstand
current (Icw in kA rms / 1 second).
Above 1600 A, the busbars must be doubled
and installed in two busbar sections, side by
side. In this case, they must be
interconnected by three equipotential links.
For more information on other ambient
temperatures, see page 185.
Cat. no.
Permissible
No. of supports
current
Icw (kA rms / 1 s)
at 35 C
for switchboard
Linergy 630 04502

Linergy 800 04503
Linergy 1000 04504
IP y 31
680
840
1040
IP > 31
590
760
950
Linergy 1250 04505
1290
1170
Linergy 1600 04506
1650
1480
Double busbars
Linergy 2000 04504 x 2
Linergy 2500 04505 x 2
2000
2500
1820
2260
Linergy 3200 04506 x 2
3200
2920
25
30
40
50
60
85
2x3
Linergy busbars, L = 1670 mm
Bar 800 A.
Cat. no. 04503
DD381237
DD381236
Bar 630 A.
Cat. no. 04502
DD381235
DD381234
DD381233
DD381232
Cat. no. selection

See the table below.
Each bar is supplied with a stop for the bottom support.
Bar 1250 A.
Cat. no. 04505
112
75
2x4
2x5
The bottom support also maintains the bars in position.
Each catalogue number represents one bar.
Busbar selection
Busbars up to 1600 A.
65
Bar 1600 A.
Cat. no. 04506
Bar 1000 A.
Cat. no. 04504

up to 3200 A
Distribution
System P
Catalogue numbers
DD381509
Busbar supports
Supports are used to install busbars to the left or right of the device zone.
They are supplied with 8.8 class mounting hardware.
Designation
Cat. no.
04651
DD380742
DD380741
Busbar supports
Busbar supports.
Each bar is supplied with a stop for

installation on the bottom support.
DD382576
Equipotentional connection
Note: equipotential connection must be made.
Double busbars up to 3200 A.

Install three equipotential links between the busbars.
DD381239
Horizontal-busbar connections
These connections are used to connect horizontal busbars, 5 or 10 mm thick, to

lateral Linergy busbars.
Supplied with mounting hardware.
Designation
Cat. no.
Connection to horizontal busbars, 5 mm thick
1000 A connection
1600 A connection
width of horizontal bars y 80 mm
width or horizontal bars > 80 mm
04634
04635
04636
04636 + 04642
DD381240
Connection 04635 to horizontal busbars, 5 mm thick.
Connection 04636 to horizontal busbars, 10 mm thick.
113
Rear Linergy busbars

up to 1600 A
Distribution
System P
Catalogue numbers
Busbar calculation
Profil
Linergy

b the catalogue numbers of the bars to be
current (Icw in kA rms / 1 second).
Busbars are installed in cubicles 650 or
800 mm wide, whatever the depth.
For more information on other ambient
temperatures and on the depth available for
devices, see page 185.
Linergy 630
Linergy 800
Linergy 1000
Linergy 1250
Linergy 1600
Cat. no.
Permissible current at No. of supports

35 C
Icw (kA rms / 1 s)
for switchboard
IP y 31
680
840
1040
1290
1650
04502
04503
04504
04505
04506
IP > 31
590
760
950
1170
1480
25
30
40
50
Each catalogue number represents one bar.
Busbar selection
Linergy busbars, L = 1670 mm
Bar 800 A.
Cat. no. 04503.
Bar 1000 A.
Cat. no. 04504.
DD381237
DD381236
Bar 630 A.
Cat. no. 04502.
DD381235
DD381234
DD381233
DD381241
Cat. no. selection

See the table below.
Each bar is supplied with a stop for the bottom support.
Bar 1250 A.
Cat. no. 04505.
Bar 1600 A.
Cat. no. 04506.
Busbar supports
Cat. no.
Busbar supports
04652
DD381243
The bottom support maintains the bars in position.

They are supplied with 8.8 class mounting hardware.
Designation
DD381242
Busbar supports.
114
Each bar is supplied with a stop for

installation on the bottom support.

up to 1600 A
Distribution
System P
Catalogue numbers
These connections are used to connect horizontal busbars, 5 or 10 mm thick, to

vertical rear Linergy busbars.
Designation
Cat. no.
04635 (1)
DD381244

width of horizontal bars > 80 mm
(1) A part of the connection must be made.
04636 (1)
04636 + 04642 (1)
Connection to horizontal busbars, 5 mm thick.
For secure connections, without drilling:

b Linergy bolts clip into the channel of the busbar
b they can slide along the entire length of the busbar
b they cannot fall to the bottom of the switchboard because they are held in place by
the ball in the head, thus facilitating connections
b a mark at the end of the bolt indicates whether the bolt is correctly positioned
b 8.8 class hardware guarantees withstand to tightening torques and to premature
ageing of the electrical contact.
Linergy hardware
Composition of sets:
b set of hardware including 20 bolts + 20 nuts + 20 contact washers.
Cat. no.
Set of 20 M8 Linergy bolts, L = 25 mm (for cable lugs and flexible bars)

Set of 20 M8 Linergy bolts, L = 39 mm (for copper bars)
04766
04767
DD381221
Cat. no. selection

Designation
DD381220
DD382654
Presentation
Copper bar connected to Linergy busbar using

bolt (04767).
DD382655
Flat washers
Cable lug connected to

Linergy busbar using bolt (04766).
Presentation
These washers, sold separately, are required for connection of flexible bars to
Linergy busbars. They spread the tightening forces and avoid creep of the copper.
b set of 20 flat washers for M8 bolts.
Connection cross-section
Cat. no. selection

Designation
Cat. no.
Set of 20 M8 flat washers, 20 mm external diameter

04772
04773
04774
Determining connections using cables

see page 227.
Determining connections using flexible bars

see page 224.
DD382656
Markers
Designation
Set of 12 phase markers
(12 clip-in supports + N, L1, L2, L3, PE, PEN labels)
Cat. no.
04794
115

Presentation
Distribution
System P
Lateral busbars up to 2500 A

Type of busbar
Flat copper busbars with holes, 5 mm thick
(up to 1600 A).
Flat copper busbars with holes, 10 mm thick
(up to 2500 A).
Two 10 mm holes every 25 mm along the entire length
of the busbars.
Prisma Plus prefabricated connections cannot be used
with these busbars.
DD382330
Catalogue numbers
Lateral busbars up to 3200 A

Type of busbar
Flat copper busbars with holes, 10 mm thick.
of the busbars.
Prisma Plus prefabricated connections cannot be used
with these busbars.
Installation
Two sets of busbars are installed in parallel in two
adjacent frameworks, each 800 mm wide. They must
be interconnected by three equipotential links.
Generally speaking, these connections are made up of:
b the horizontal busbars
b the connection of the incoming device
b a connection at the bottom of the vertical busbars
(see opposite).
For each set of busbars, three fixed supports (04661)
are mandatory. When more than three supports are
required (see the tables for busbar calculations on the
following pages), use free supports (04662).
Busbars are positioned on the bottom support (04663).
116
DD382331
Installation
Can be installed independently on either the left or
right-hand side of an 800 mm wide framework for
distribution on either side.
Three fixed supports (04661) are mandatory. When
more than three supports are required (see the tables
for busbar calculations on the following pages), use
free supports (04662).
Busbars are positioned on the bottom support (04663).

Presentation
Distribution
System P
Rear busbars up to 1600 A

Type of busbar
Flat copper busbars with holes, 5 or 10 mm thick.
of the busbars.
DD382275
Catalogue numbers
Installation
Three fixed supports (04653) are mandatory. When
more than three supports are required (see the tables
for busbar calculations on the following pages), use
free supports (04662).
Mounting chocks (04669) screwed to the busbars rest
on one of the fixed supports.
117
Lateral flat busbars

up to 1600 A
Busbars 5 mm thick
Distribution
System P
Catalogue numbers
Busbar calculation
The bars are secured by insulated supports.
Three fixed supports, attached to the
framework, are mandatory.
If necessary, additional free supports may
be used.
The bars rest on a bottom support.
b the number of supports required in a
cubicle, depending on the rated short-time
withstand current (Icw).
Permissible current
for switchboards
No. of bars /
phase
No. of supports
Icw (kA rms / 1 s)
IP y 31
IP > 31
15
25
30
40
50
800
750
1 bar, 60 x 5 mm
1000
900
1 bar, 80 x 5 mm
7
1400
1250
2 bars, 60 x 5 mm
3
5
1800
1600
2 bars, 80 x 5 mm
Busbar selection
DD380724
Designation
Cat. No.
04516
04518
DD381505
Copper bar with holes, 60 x 5 mm

Busbar supports
Three fixed supports are required to maintain the busbars. If more than three
supports are required, use additional free supports.
Designation
Cat. No.
04661
04662
DD381650
DD380829
Fixed support for lateral flat busbars

04661.
04662.
Busbar chocks
Cat. No.
Bottom support for lateral flat busbars
04663
DD380728
The bars are secured by three mandatory fixed supports and
two free supports.

It is not considered a busbar support.
Designation
Note: When connecting 5 mm flat bars to horizontal busbars, part no. 04663 is not required.
Connection between the 5 mm thick horizontal busbars and the lateral flat busbars
is direct, once the horizontal bars have been drilled.
DD380512
DD380725
Drilling diagram for horizontal busbars, 5 mm thick.
118
Lateral flat busbars

up to 3200 A
Busbars 10 mm thick
Distribution
System P
Catalogue numbers
Busbar calculation
framework, are mandatory. If necessary,
additional free supports may be used.
The bars rest on a bottom support.
b the number of supports required in a
cubicle, depending on the rated short-time
withstand current (Icw).
Above 2800 A (2500 A with IP > 31), the
busbars must be doubled and installed in
two busbar sections, side by side. In this
case, they must be interconnected by three
equipotential links.
Permissible current No. of bars /

for switchboards
phase
IP y 31
1200
1400
1800
2050
IP > 31
1080
1250
1600
1850
2300
2000
2820
2500
No. of supports
Icw (kA rms / 1 s)
25
1 bar, 50 x 10 mm
1 bar. 60 x 10 mm
1 bar. 80 x 10 mm
2 bars, 50 x 10
mm
2 bars, 60 x 10
mm
2 bars, 80 x 10
mm
30
40
50
60
65
75
85
5
3
Double busbars
3200
2820
2 x 1 bar, 80 x 10
2x3
2x5
mm
Busbar selection
DD381497
Designation
Cat. no.
04525
04526
04528
DD381505

Busbar supports
Three fixed supports are required to maintain the busbars. If more than three
Designation
Cat. no.
04661
04661.
04662
04661
04662
DD381650
Fixed support for lateral flat busbars

DD380829
DD381498
Busbars y 1600 A (IP y 31).
04662.
Busbar chocks
It is not considered a busbar support.
Designation
Cat. no.
04663
DD381124
Bottom support for lateral flat busbars
Busbars up to 3200 A.
DD381499
Connection to horizontal busbars, 10 mm thick.

Designation
Connection between vertical busbars
(1 bar/phase) and horizontal busbars
Connection between vertical busbars
(2 bars/phase) and horizontal busbars
Connection between double vertical
busbars and horizontal busbars
W y 80 mm
W > 80 mm
W y 80 mm
W > 80 mm
W y 80 mm
W > 80 mm
Cat. no.
04636
04636 + 04642
04637
04637 + 04642
04636 x 2
(04636 + 04642) x 2
119

Flat busbars, 5 mm thick
Distribution
System P
Catalogue numbers
Busbar calculation
be used.
Mounting chocks screwed to the busbars
rest on one of the fixed supports.
current (Icw).
Permissible current
for switchboards
Bars / phase
No. of supports Icw (kA rms / 1 s)
IP y 31
IP > 31
15
25
30
40
50
800
750
1 bar, 60 x 5 mm
1000
900
1 bar, 80 x 5 mm
7
1400
1250
2 bars, 60 x 5 mm
3
5
1800
1600
2 bars, 80 x 5 mm
A set of busbars made up of two 80 x 5 mm bars per phase must be installed in a cubicle 600 mm
deep.
Busbar selection
DD380729
Designation
Cat. no.
04516
04518
DD381505

Busbar supports
Three fixed supports are required to maintain the vertical busbars. If more than three
Designation
Cat. no.
04653
04662
DD381652
DD380732
Fixed support for rear flat busbars

04653.
04662.
Busbar chocks
A metal mounting chock, 5 mm thick, is screwed to the bar. It rests on a fixed support
and maintains the position of the bar.
Designation
Cat. no.
The bars are secured by three mandatory fixed supports (3 x
04653) and two free supports (2 x 04662).
04669
DD382303
DD380815
100 mounting chocks (5 mm) for busbars
Chocking for one bar per phase.
Chocking for two bars per phase.
DD380730
Designation
1600 A connection
connection to horizontal busbars, 5 mm thick
connection to horizontal busbars, 10 mm Width y 80 mm
thick
Width > 80 mm
120
Cat. no.
04635 (1)
04636 (1)
04636 + 04642 (1)

Distribution
System P
Catalogue numbers
Busbar calculation
be used.
Mounting chocks screwed to the busbars
rest on one of the fixed supports.
current (Icw).
Permissible current Size of bars

for switchboards
No. of supports Icw (kA rms / 1 s)
IP y 31
IP > 31
25
30
40
50
60
65
75
85
1200
1080
1 bar, 50 x 10
1400
1250
1 bar, 60 x 10
3
5
7
9
1800
1600
1 bar, 80 x 10
Busbar selection
DD381503
Designation
Cat. no.
04525
04526
04528
DD381505

Busbar supports
Three fixed supports are required to maintain the vertical busbars. If more than three
Designation
Cat. no.
04653
04662
DD381652
DD380732
Fixed support for rear flat busbars

04653.
04662.
Busbar chocks
A metal mounting chock, 5 mm thick, is screwed to the bar. It rests on a fixed support
and maintains the position of the bar.
Designation
Cat. no.
The bars are secured by three mandatory fixed supports (3 x
04653) and two free supports (2 x 04662).
04669
DD380733
DD380815
Chocking for one bar per phase.
Chocking for two bars per phase.
DD381504
Designation
Connection y 1600 A for horizontal bars, 10 mm thick
width of horizontal bars > 80 mm
Cat. no.
04636 (1)
04636 + 04642 (1)
121
Distribution
PE conductor
System P
Catalogue numbers
Vertical PE conductor
Linergy L = 1670
DD381183
The conductor is generally installed in the cable compartment.

A Linergy bar is secured to the framework using three supports.
Selection
Icw (kA rms / 1 s)
y 40
> 40
Permissible current
(A)
Cat. no.
for bars
630
800
04502
04503
Support selection
Set of three supports for a vertical PE (supplied with PE marking)
Mounting of a vertical PE (Linergy).
04657
Linergy connection hardware

Composition of set:
Set including 20 M8 bolts (L = 25 mm) + 20 nuts + 20 contact washers for connection
to cable lugs or flexible bars.
Cat. no. selection
Designation
Cat. no.
20 bolts for lug connection to Linergy busbars
04766
DD381182
Flat bar L = 1675

A flat bar is secured to the framework using three supports.
Selection
Icw (kA rms / 1 s)
y 40
> 40
Selection
(mm)
Cat. no.
for bars
25 x 5
50 x 5
04512
04515
Support selection
Set of three supports for a vertical PE (supplied with PE marking)
04657
Mounting of a vertical PE (flat bar).
DD381184
Horizontal PE conductor
A flat bar is mounted at the top or bottom of a switchboard (contrary to horizontal

busbars) using supports.
Selection
Icw (kA rms / 1 s)
y 40
> 40
Selection
(mm)
Cat. no.
for bars
25 x 5
50 x 5
04512
04515
Support selection
Set of two supports for a horizontal PE
04667
Mounting of a horizontal PE (flat bar).
Connection between PE
conductors
A copper connection plate can be used to connect:

b a vertical PE bar to a horizontal PE bar
b two horizontal PE bars.
DD381158
Cat. no. selection

Designation
Set of two connection plates for horizontal/vertical PE bars
Connection between horizontal PE bars or horizontal/vertical

PE bars.
122
Cat. no.
04672
Distribution
PEN conductor
System P
Catalogue numbers
DD381655
Vertical Linergy PEN conductor

A Linergy bar is secured to the framework using a mounting kit.
Cat. no. selection
Designation
Cat. no.
Linergy bar
Linergy vertical PEN kit
see page 108

04656
Contents of Linergy PEN kit

b 4 insulating supports
b 1 neutral disconnecting device
b 1 connection between a horizontal PEN and a vertical PEN y 1600 A.
123
Distribution
System P
Catalogue numbers
Presentation
Powerclip busbars are compact and fully
insulated (IPxxB).
They are supplied ready for installation in
the switchboard.
There are three and four-pole versions with
ratings from 125 to 630 A.
Available in four lengths, they can be cut
every 150 or 200 mm, depending on the
rating.
Composition
Powerclip busbars are made up of ETP H12 channelled copper bars with threaded
M6 holes every 25 mm.
They are mounted on insulated bases and can be cut every 150 or 200 mm,
depending on the rating.
The ends of the busbars are plugged.
Clip-on covers protect against direct contact from the front. The covers can be easily
cut for the connections to the devices.
Installation
The busbars are supplied with supports that screw to an adapter in a cubicle.
They can be cut every 150 or 200 mm, depending on the rating.
Permissible current of
the busbars (A)
DD382577
125
160
250
400
630
b
v
v
b
v
DD382578
Rated short-time withstand

current Icw (kA rms / 1
second)
8.5
10
13
20
25
Rated peak withstand current Ipk

(k)
20
30
30
52.5
52.5
rated insulation voltage:

Powerclip 125 A busbars: Ui = 500 V
Powerclip 160 A busbars: Ui = 750 V
impulse withstand voltage:
Powerclip 125/160 A busbars: Uimp = 8 kV.
Available in two lengths (450 and 750 mm) in three and four-pole versions.
The busbars can be cut to length every 150 mm.
They are supplied with clip-on covers that block off the connected cable lugs and can
be cut as needed.
Cat. no. selection
Powerclip busbars 125 A
Three-pole
Four-pole
L = 450 mm
L = 750 mm
L = 450 mm
L = 750 mm
Cat. no.
04103
04107
04104
04108
Busbar connection
Four 125 A connections, L = 230 mm
(for NG125, NSA and INS equipped with tunnel terminals)
A 35 mm ferrule for connection to tunnel terminals is crimped to one end.
A 45 ring lug is crimped to the other end.
95 mm tunnel terminals for INS : cat. no. 28947 (set of 3)
cat. no. 28948 (set of 4)
124
04145
Distribution
System P
Catalogue numbers
DD382579
160/630 A Powerclip busbars
Available in two lengths (1000 and 1400 mm) in three and four-pole versions. The
busbars can be cut to length every 200 mm.
Prefabricated connections are available for the devices.
Powerclip busbars
160 A
250 A
400 A
630 A
Three-pole
Four-pole
L = 1000 mm
L = 1400 mm
L = 1000 mm
L = 1400 mm
04111
04116
04121
04126
04112
04117
04122
04127
04113
04118
04123
04128
04114
04119
04124
04129
Connection between incoming device and Powerclip busbars Cat. no.

Power supply block (with connection)
Universal power supply block

(without connection)
Connection for universal power supply block
NS250
NS400
NS630
100/250 A
400/630 A
Vertical NS100/250
Vertical NS100/250 in duct
Vertical NS400/630 in duct
Connection between 200 A Multiclip and Powerclip busbars

200 A 4P connection for Multiclip (supplied with mounting hardware)
35 mm additional blocks
3P
4P
Busbar connection
DD382580
Cat. no.
04021
Cat. no.
4 160 A connections, L = 230 mm

(for NSA160)
Accessories
04060
04070
04071
04061
04074
04062
04064
04073
04155
04156
Cat. no.
04146
Powerclip tap-off blocks

Each block can be used to connect:
b one 6 mm and one 10 mm cable (04151)
b one 16 mm cables (04152).
Equipped with spring terminals.
Designation
Cat. no.
12 Powerclip tap-off blocks with 6 mm + 10 mm terminals

12 Powerclip tap-off blocks with 16 mm terminals
04151
04152
DD382581
Connection cover
Clip-on covers that block off the connected cable lugs and can be cut
as needed.
They maintain IPxxB with 90 angle lugs and/or cable sizes from 10 to 25 mm.
Designation
Cat. no.
8 IPxxB covers for Powerclip busbars
04150
8.8 class mounting hardware

Used for electrical connections to the copper bars.
Designation
Cat. no.
Set of 20 CHC M6 x 12 mm screws for Powerclip busbars
04158
125
Distribution
400 A rear busbars
System P
Catalogue numbers
Presentation
DD382627
The rear busbars are mounted directly on an

adapter in a cubicle.
There are three and four-pole versions with
ratings from 160 to 400 A.
Available in two lengths, 1000 and
1400 mm, they can be cut as needed.
The connection with a Compact or Interpact
incoming device occupies two vertical
modules (50 mm each).
Busbar calculation
Composition
Flat, copper bars with threaded M6 holes every 25 mm for connection along the
entire length of the busbars.
The insulating supports can receive a fifth bar, 15 x 5 mm or 20 x 5 mm, to create an
earth bar.
Installation
The busbars are mounted directly on an adapter (03595) in a cubicle.
Connection
b 16 mm to 50 mm flexible cables, with crimped lugs
b insulated flexible bars (see page 128).
b rated peak withstand current Ipk (k)
- 30 k for 160 A busbars
b rated insulation level Ui = 1000 V
Busbar size and distance between supports

The table below indicates:
b the size of the bars to be used, depending on the permissible current level in the
busbars
b the distance between supports, depending on the rated short-time withstand
current (Icw).
Rating
Size of bars
Distance between support centres
(A)
(mm)
(mm)
Icw (kA rms / 1 s)
10
13
15
160
15 x 5
250
20 x 5
400
32 x 5
450
Note: For a detailed calculation of the busbars, see page 187.
126
20
300
25
225
400 A rear busbars
Distribution
System P
Catalogue numbers
Busbar selection
DD382628
Copper bars
Rating (A)
Four copper bars, L = 1000 160

250
400
Four copper bars, L = 1400 160
250
400
Size of bars (mm)
Cat. no.
15 x 5
20 x 5
32 x 5
15 x 5
20 x 5
32 x 5
04161
04162
04163
04171
04172
04173
Busbar supports
Copper bars.
DD382629
Accessories
04191
DD381389
DD381388
Rear busbar support
Busbar supports.
Rear busbar barrier

Protects against direct contact with the busbar connections.
Supplied with mounting hardware.
Designation
Cat. no.
Rear busbar barrier, H = 100 mm
04198
04198.
DD382630
125 A connection
For direct supply to comb busbars from the rear busbars in the switchboard.
Designation
Cat. no.
Four 125 A connections, L = 230 mm
(for NG125, NSA and INS equipped with tunnel terminals)
95 mm tunnel terminals for INS : cat. no. 28947 (set of 3)
cat. no. 28948 (set of 4)
04145.
160 A connection
For direct supply to an NSA160 from the rear busbars in the
switchboard.
Designation
DD382631
04145
4 160 A connections
Cat. no.
04146
200 A connection
04029.
For supply of a 200 A Multiclip distribution block from the rear busbars in the
switchboard.
Designation
Cat. no.
Rear busbar connection for 200A Multiclip distribution block
04029
DD381458
Connection between busbars

For electrical connections between two sets of rear busbars.
Designation
Cat. no.
4 copper angle brackets, 250A
04190
8.8 class mounting hardware

Designation
04190.
Set of 20 M6 x 20 bolts (20 bolts + 20 nuts +40 contact washers)

Set of 40 M6 x 16 screws (40 screws + 40 contact washers)
Cat. no.
04194
04195
127
Insulated flexible bars
Distribution
System P
Catalogue numbers
The insulated flexible bars are tested in a type-tested switchboard environment.
Their design takes into account the switchboard architecture where they are often in
close proximity to a protection device (circuit breaker or fuse) with significant heat
losses.
In-depth knowledge of switchboard architecture and the connected devices led to the
establishment of a selection table based on the type of device.
Flexible bars are 1800 mm long and made of copper with an insulating sheath.
Rated insulation level Ui = 1000 V.
The sizes for the flexible bars indicated below take into account the heat losses of
Schneider devices in a Prisma Plus switchboard.
Catalogue number selection
Connection between device and busbars
DD381659
Presentation
The flexible bars are determined taking into account the connected device, whatever
the internal temperature of the switchboard.
The bar sizes indicated below take into account the derating curves of devices.
Device
Size (mm)
Cat. no.
NS100/160
20 x 2
04742
NS250
20 x 3 (1)
04743
NS400
32 x 5
04751
NS630
32 x 8
04753
INS125/160
20 x 2
04742
INS250
20 x 3
04743
INS400
32 x 5
04751
INS630
32 x 6
04752
200 A Multiclip
20 x 3
04743
Polypact, 3P
32 x 6
04752
Polypact, 4P
32 x 6
04752
Fupact 250
24 x 5
04746
Fupact 400
32 x 5
04751
Fupact 630
32 x 8
04753
(1) To connect a Compact NS250 to Powerclip busbars, use a 24 x 5 mm flexible bar (04746).
Connection between busbars

Flexible bars are designed for connections between busbars taking into account the
following characteristics:
a maximum temperature of 60C inside the switchboard. This corresponds to the
average temperature inside a switchboard for an ambient temperature of 35C
b the maximum withstand temperature for the insulating material is 125C.
Ie max. (A)
DD382008
200
250
400
520
580
660
128
Size (mm)
Cat. no.
20 x 2
20 x 3
24 x 5
32 x 5
32 x 6
32 x 8
04742
04743
04746
04751
04752
04753
129
Busbar accessories
Mounting hardware
Distribution
System P
Catalogue numbers
The 8.8 class (64 N/mm) hardware ensures precise tightening torques and a reliable
contact over time.
The hardware is designed to resist creep and ageing of the electrical contact.
It is protected against corrosion by a Zn8c treatment.
M8 bolts
b set of 20 bolts + 20 nuts + 40 contact washers.
DD380737
General
Flat washers
Cat. no. selection

Designation
Cat. no.
Set of 20 bolts, M8 x 20 mm
04782
04783
04784
04785
04786
04787
04788
DD380738
Presentation
These washers, sold separately, are required for connection between flexible bars
and flat or Linergy busbars.
They spread the tightening forces and avoid creep of the copper.
b set of 20 flat washers for M8 bolts.
Torque nuts
Cat. no. selection

Designation
Cat. no.

04772
04773
04774
DD380735
Can be used to obtain the correct tightening torque (28 Nm) recommended by the
manufacturer, without using a torque wrench.
Torque nuts may be used for all electrical connections.
Designation
Cat. no.
20 M8 torque nuts
04759
Voltage tap-offs
DD380736
Designation
Cat. no.
20 M10 voltage tap-offs for two 6.35 mm tab connectors

04229
Note: For small lugs (on low-current cables or measurement tap-offs), insert a conducting
washer between the busbar and the lug.
Mounting chocks (5 mm) for flat

busbars
DD380733
Metal chock, 5 mm thick.

Chocks are used to maintain the position of rear, vertical, flat busbars.
Designation
DD380734
Chock for rear, vertical, flat busbars.
130
Cat. no.
04669
Earth bars
Neutral bars
Distribution
System P
Catalogue numbers
Earth bar
Presentation
The earth bar can be:
b a bare earth bar, 12 x 3 mm with 330 mm of connection space, equipped with a 35
mm terminal and on which earth blocks with spring terminals can be clipped
b an earth bar (200 or 450 mm long), equipped with a 35 mm terminal and clamps
with captive screws.
DD381560
Earth bar with spring terminals

Designation
Cat. no.
Bare earth bar, 12 x 3 mm with 330 mm of connection space, equipped with

a 35 mm tunnel terminal (for earth blocks with spring terminals)
4 earth blocks with 12 x 4 mm spring terminals (L = 75 mm)
4 earth blocks with 3 x 16 mm spring terminals (L = 37 mm)
04201.
04201
04214
04215
04214.
DD381516
04215.
04200.
Earth bar with clamps

Designation
Cat. no.
Earth bar with 40 clamps + one 35 mm terminal (L = 450 mm)

2 earth bars with 20 clamps + one 35 mm terminal (L = 200 mm)
04200
04202
Installation
The earth bar is mounted on two supports that clip onto the rear of a modular rail
installed horizontally in the device compartment or vertically in the cable
compartment.
Designation
Cat. no.
04205
DD381518
DD381517
2 supports for earth bar on modular rail
Earth bar mounted on rear of modular rail using supports (04205).
DD381519
Neutral bar
A neutral bar is created by inserting insulating spacers behind an earth bar.

Designation
Kit for neutral bar
Cat. no.
04210
131
Terminal blocks
Support
Distribution
System P
Catalogue numbers
Introduction
DD381511
DD381510
In System P cubicles, terminal blocks are commonly installed in a lateral

compartment, generally 300 or 400 mm wide.
They may also be installed at the top or bottom of the cubicle.
Terminal blocks, see page 158.
132
Distribution
System P
Terminal blocks
Support
Catalogue numbers
Installation at top or bottom

of a cubicle
Terminal blocks are grouped on modular rails that can be depth adjusted behind a
plain front plate.
Designation
Cat. no.
DD381512
Modular rail, depth adjustable (L = 432 mm)
03402
Width of standard terminal blocks

Max. cable CSA
4 mm
6 mm
10 mm
16 mm
Width of terminal block

6 mm
8 mm
10 mm
12 mm
Height required in switchboard

Max. cable CSA
4 mm
6 mm
10 mm
16 mm
Corresponding plain
front plate
3
3
5
6
03803
03803
03805
03806
DD380776
Terminal blocks can also be installed on a modular rail turned using universal angle brackets and
mounted on lateral cross-members.
Designation
Set of two lateral cross-members, L = 400 mm
DD381513
Installation in a lateral
compartment
04226
03581
03584
The terminal block is generally installed in the cable compartment, L = 300 or

400 mm.
The terminal blocks clip onto a modular rail. The rail is secured to cable-tie supports
using universal angle brackets for precise positioning of the terminal blocks.
Designation
Cat. no.
Cable-tie supports
04226
03581
see page 160
Terminal blocks can be directly installed on the mounting plates for horizontally
mounted Compact NS100/630 and vertically mounted Compact NS630b/1600 for
connection of auxiliary wires.
DD381514
Installation on a device mounting

plate
Cat. no.
133
Distribution
System P
Catalogue numbers
Presentation
In most installations, Prisma Plus cubicles do not require partitioning. In this case,
the switchboard is a Form 1.
Safety being one of its foremost goals, Schneider Electric offers options and features
that go well beyond the recommendations of the standard.
The protection of life and property is a standard feature due to:
b front plates that require a tool to be removed
b keylocks on doors, some of which provide access to live parts
b the systematic installation of terminal shields on Compact NS circuit breakers and
Interpact INS and INV switch-disconnectors
b covering of the upstream and downstream terminals on the incoming device so
that operators are perfectly safe at all points in the switchboard when the incoming
device is off (open).
What is more, Prisma Plus offers different levels of partitioning to create separations
inside the cubicles and thus create Form 2, 3 and 4 electrical switchboards.
Electrical switchboards must meet the degree of protection IP2X to comply with
standard IEC 60439-1.
Form 1 configuration
Covering of upstream and downstream
terminals on all devices
DD382045
Decisions concerning the Form of

separation and the degree of protection are
the subject of an agreement between the
manufacturer and the user.
The protection of life and property is ensured by:

! the systematic installation of terminal shields on Compact NS circuit breakers and on Interpact
INS and INV switch-disconnectors (see the pages on the functional units)
! covering of the upstream and downstream terminals of the incoming device.
DD382041
Covering of the connection

between an incoming device and
lateral busbars
04926.
134
Cat. no. selection

Device
Cover
Masterpact NW
04926 + 04927
Masterpact NT
Compact NS630b/1600
04926
04926
Compact NS1600b/3200
Interpact INS-INV630b/2500
04926
04926
Distribution
System P

Covering the supply terminals on the
incoming device
Catalogue numbers
Front connection.
Cable connection
DD382019
Device
Form 4
cover
Fixed or drawout Masterpact circuit breaker

NW08/32
NT06/16
04861
04852
Fixed or withdrawable Compact circuit breaker

Fixed NS630b/1600
Withdrawable NS630b/1600
04851
04852
04861.
DD382020
Canalis connection
Device
Form 4
cover

NW08/32
NT06/16
04861 + 04871
04852 + 04871

Fixed NS630b/1600
04851 + 04871
04852 + 04871
04861 + 04871.
Rear connection
Cable connection
DD382021
Device
Form 4
cover

NW08/32
NT06/16
04863
04854

Fixed NS630b/1600
04853
04854
04863.
DD382022
Canalis connection
Device
Form 4
cover

NW08/32
NT06/16
04863 + 04871
04854 + 04871

Fixed NS630b/1600
04853 + 04871
04854 + 04871
04863 + 04871.
135
Form 2 partitioning
Distribution
System P
Catalogue numbers
Definition of Form 2
Separation of busbars from the functional units:

b protection against contact with live parts upstream of the outgoing circuits
b protection against penetration of foreign solid bodies.
DD381679
DD381678
The two types of Form 2 separation as defined by IEC 60439-1
Form 2a.
Form 2b.
b Form 2a
Terminals for external conductors not separated from busbars.
The functional units are separated from the busbars, but not the terminals.
b Form 2b
Terminals for external conductors separated from busbars.
b The functional units and the terminals are separated from the busbars.
Form 2 partitioning is essential to ensure excellent protection for the installation and
operators working in the switchboard.
When added to standard protection features (terminal shields, prefabricated
connections, etc.), it eliminates the risk of direct contacts with live parts.
Prisma Plus offers Form 2b.
Form 2b provides much better safety than Form 2a, notably during connection,
because the terminals are separated from the busbars.
DD382023
PD390571
Separation of busbars from the functional

units
Form 2b partitioning.
136
Form 2 partitioning
Distribution
System P
Catalogue numbers
Partitioning of lateral vertical

busbars
Lateral partitioning
DD382641
b vertical barrier made of insulating slats

b can be installed on both sides of Linergy and flat busbars
b made up of:
v four supports that clip to the framework
v five extruded slats that clip to the supports
v two metal plates at the top and bottom that can be cut out to pass a PE or PEN
conductor
b the space between the slats is sufficient for prefabricated connections (one copper
bar, 5 or 10 mm thick, or insulated flexible bars) or for cables up to 35 mm, while
maintaining the degree of protection IP2X
b compliance with standard IEC 695.2.1 concerning withstand to fire.
Form 2 restoration for side-barrier cut-out

This kit enables passage of the connection between a device > 1600 A (NW, INS)
and lateral vertical busbars.
It is made up of an insulated plate (six modules high = 300 mm) that can be cut as
required, supplied with supports and the necessary hardware.
DD381642
04922.
It can be installed at any height in the switchboard.

Cat. no. selection
Designation
Cat. no.
Form 2 side barrier

Form 2 restoration kit
04922
04924
Front and rear barrier

Barrier, W = 150 mm, from top to bottom of the cubicle.
Can be installed in the front and rear of the busbar compartment.
Protects against direct contact with the busbars.
DD382643
04924.
Cat. no. selection

Designation
Cat. no.
Front or rear barrier for lateral vertical busbars
04921
Front protection
This barrier is not required in front when the cubicle is equipped with a plain or
transparent door.
With cover frame
DD381589
DD382644
DD381588
With door
For 800 mm cubicles, the door is

systematically supplied with a barrier.
DD382645
Partitioning of horizontal
busbars
For 800 mm cubicles, the cover frame is

supplied with a wicket door, W = 150 mm, on
which devices can be mounted.
A front barrier is indispensable.
Rear protection
A barrier is required at the rear of the busbar compartment in cubicles that are 600,
800 and 1000 mm deep.
Set of two barriers (front and rear), plus a slotted rear panel for efficient natural
convection in the switchboard.
The set can be used to partition horizontal busbars installed at the top or bottom of
the cubicle. The space required for the busbars is not increased.
Cat. no. selection
Framework dimensions
Cat. no.
Framework, D = 400 mm
04914
For framework, W = 400 mm.
W = 300 mm
04913
W = 400 mm
04914
W = 650 mm
04916
W = 800 mm (650 + 150)
04916
W = 800 mm
04918
Framework, D = 600 mm W = 300 mm
04933
W = 400 mm
04934
W = 650 mm
04936
W = 800mm (650 + 150)
04936
W = 800 mm
04938
Note: When the busbars are at the bottom of the cubicle, gland plates are mandatory, see
page 92.
137
Form 3 partitioning
Distribution
System P
Catalogue numbers
Separation of busbars from the functional units and separation of all functional units
from one another.
Separation of the terminals for external conductors from the functional units, but not
from each other.
b protection against contact with live parts
b reduction in the risk of faults between the functional units (propagation of electrical
arcs, etc.).
DD381681
DD381680
The two types of Form 3 separation as defined by IEC 60439-1.
Form 3a.
Form 3b.
b Form 3a
Terminals for external conductors not separated from busbars.
The functional units are separated from each other and from the busbars, but not the
terminals.
b Form 3b
Terminals for external conductors separated from busbars.
The functional units are separated from each other and from the busbars.
The terminals are separated from the busbars, but not from each other.
DD382015
Form 2 switchboard with:

b separation of the functional units from one
another
b separation of the terminals for external
conductors from the functional units.
Prisma Plus offers Form 3b because it provides much better safety than Form 3a,
because the terminals are separated from the busbars.
Form 3b partitioning.
138
Form 3 partitioning
Distribution
System P
Catalogue numbers
Form 3 partitioning
Front connection.
DD382016
Presentation
A metal barrier ensures physical separation of the functional units from one another.
It is slotted to enhance natural convection in the cubicle. It is available in two lengths:
b one for frameworks 650 mm wide
b one for frameworks 400 mm wide.
It is fixed at the rear by a support (two uprights) secured to the framework (400 mm
deep) or to the intermediate uprights (600 mm deep frameworks).
It does not take up any useful space in the switchboard.
Cat. no. selection
Designation
Cat. no.
Horizontal partition
length 650 mm
length 400 mm
Rear support for partition (one cat. no. per cubicle)
for frameworks 650 mm wide
for frameworks 400 mm wide
04901
04943
DD382017
Rear connection
Presentation
For rear connection, in addition to the horizontal partitions, vertical partitions are
required at the rear of each functional unit.
There are two heights:
b 3 to 4 modules
b 5 to 6 modules.
Cat. no.
Vertical partitions (one cat. no. per functional unit)

3 to 4 modules
5 to 6 modules
04955
04956
DD382386
Cat. no. selection

Designation
Vertical partitions for rear connected Compact NS250.
139
Form 4 partitioning
Distribution
System P
Catalogue numbers
b separation of busbars from the functional units and separation of all functional
units from one another, including the terminals for external conductors which are an
integral part of the functional unit
b protection against contacts with live parts and reduction in the risk of faults
between the functional units (propagation of electrical arcs, etc.).
DD382370
DD382369
The two types of Form 4 separation as defined by IEC 60439-1
Form 4a.
Form 4b.
b Form 4a
Terminals for external conductors in the same compartment as the associated
functional unit.
b Form 4b
Terminals for external conductors not in the same compartment as the associated
functional unit, but in individual, separate, enclosed protected spaces or
compartments.
Prisma Plus offers both Form 4a and Form 4b.

In addition to partitioning of the main busbars (Form 2) and installation of the
horizontal partitions between functional units (Form 3), the cubicle must be equipped
with:
b Form 4 gland plates to achieve Form 4a
b Form 4 covers for connection transfer assemblies to achieve Form 4b.
DD382018
Form 3 switchboard with covers over the

terminals for external conductors.
Form 4 partitioning: Form 4a (cubicle on left) and Form 4b (cubicle on right).
140
Form 4 partitioning
Distribution
System P
Covering the connection

terminals on the incoming device
DD382012
Catalogue numbers
Covering the connection

terminals of outgoing devices
DD382047
See the pages on functional units or see page 136.
See the following pages.
141
Form 4 partitioning
Outgoing device
Distribution
System P
Catalogue numbers
Front connection
Form 4a - direct connection to the device
DD382026
Presentation
On a cubicle already equipped with Form 2 and 3 partitions, Form 4 is achieved by
installing:
b a backplate (one cat. no. per cubicle) made up to two metal half panels mounted
on the rear supports for Form 3 partitions. This backplate is not indispensable for 400
mm deep frameworks
b a plastic gland plate that can be easily cut out (one for each functional unit) and is
mounted on the framework.
There are two heights:
b 3 to 4 modules
b 5 to 6 modules.
Cat. no.
Cat. no. selection

Designation
Form 4 backplate (one cat. no. per cubicle)

Form 4 gland plate
3 to 4 modules
5 to 6 modules
04946
04951
04952
DD382027
Form 4b - connection in a lateral compartment
Presentation
installing:
b a backplate (one cat. no. per cubicle) made up to two metal half panels mounted
on the rear supports for Form 3 partitions. This backplate is not indispensable for
400 mm deep frameworks
b a cover with plastic gland plates that can be easily cut out on the side and bottom.
It is available in two heights:
v 3 to 5 modules, 150 mm wide
v 4 to 6 modules, 200 mm wide.
Cat. no.
Cat. no. selection

Designation
DD382438
04953.
142
3 to 5 modules (W = 150 mm)

4 to 6 modules (W = 200 mm)
DD382036
DD382035
Form 4 backplate (one cat. no. per cubicle)

Form 4 cover for connection transfer
assembly
04954.
04946
04953
04954
Form 4 partitioning
Outgoing device
Distribution
System P
Catalogue numbers
Rear connection
Form 4b - direct connection to the device
DD382033
Presentation
installing a gland plate at the rear of each functional unit. They are connected directly
to the rear supports for Form 3 partitions.
It is available in two heights:
b 3 to 4 modules
b 5 to 6 modules.
Cat. no. selection
Designation
Cat. no.
3 to 4 modules
5 to 6 modules
04951
04952
DD382037
Form 4 gland plate
DD382034
Form 4b - connection at the rear of the cubicle

Presentation
installing a Form 4 cover. It comprises two height-adjustable metal flanges and
plastic gland plates that can be easily cut out at the rear and bottom.
It is available in two versions:
v 3 to 5 modules (D = 150 mm)
v 4 to 6 modules (D = 200 mm).
Cat. no. selection
Designation
Cat. no.
3 to 5 modules
4 to 6 modules
04953
04954
DD382039
DD382038
Form 4 cover for connection transfer

assembly
04953.
DD382040
04954.
143
Distribution
System P
Catalogue numbers
Rated insulation
voltage Ui
Rated impulse
Rated operational Rated short-time
withstand voltage current Ie (40C)
withstand
Uimp
current
Icw
Rated peak
withstand
current Ipk
750 V
8 kV
125/160 A
Depending on
connected device
Depending on
connected device
750 V
8 kV
250 A
Depending on
connected device
Depending on
connected device
160/630 A multi-stage distribution

block
750 V
8 kV
160/630 A
10 kA rms / 1 s for 160 A

block
block
block
block
30 k for 160 and

250 A block
40 k for 400 and
630 A block
80 A Multiclip distribution block
500 V
6 kV
80 A
Depending on
connected device
Depending on
connected device
200 A Multiclip distribution block
750 V
8 kV
200 A
750 V
8 kV
3-pole: 800 A
4-pole: 675 A
PD390656
PD390655
PD390654
PD390653
PD390652
PD390651
Designation
Compatible with the

breaking capacity
of the Compact NS
circuit breakers
connected to
the distribution block.
PD390683
For distribution by comb busbars (63/125 A), strip terminal blocks (80/125 A) or multi-stage distribution blocks
(40/125 A), see device catalogue.
146
Distribution
System P
Catalogue numbers
Connection capacity
Upstream
Installation / comments
Downstream
b tunnel terminals for 6 to 35 mm flexible

cables (10 to 35 mm rigid cables) for 125 A
Distribloc
b prefabricated connections (supplied) for
160 A Distribloc
b spring terminals:
v 2 outgoers from 1 to 10v, flexible or rigid
b tunnel terminals:
v 1 outgoer from 4 to 16v, flexible (4 to 25v
rigid)
b modular rail
b plain or slotted backplate
see page 148
b directly to the incoming device:

Compact NS 100/250, Interpact INS250
b spring terminals:
v 6 x 10v + 3 x 16 mm, flexible or rigid
b directly downstream of the incoming

device:
Compact NS 100/250, Interpact INS250
b modular rail
b plain or slotted backplate
see page 150
b cables:
v 16 to 50 mm with crimped lug
b flexible bars,
see page 128.
b 13 outgoers via 50v max. cables with

crimped lugs
b screwed to plain or slotted backplate

b screwed onto the adapter
see page 152
b tunnel terminals for cables y 25 mm
b supplied flexible cables:

v 6 and 10 mm
b clipped onto rear of modular rail

see page 154
b via prefabricated connections from rear

busbars
b via prefabricated connections from
Powerclip busbars
b 50 mm cables with crimped lugs
b 20 x 3 mm flexible bars,
see page 128
b supplied flexible cables:

v 10 mm
b prefabricated connection supplied with

Polypact (04403/4/5/6)
b 32 x 6 mm flexible bars for Polypact
(04407 and 04408),
see page 128.
Supply of fixed and plug-in devices:

b 3 four-pole Compact NS100/250
b 4 three-pole Compact NS100/250
b 3 Interpact INS250
Fixing:
b direct to mounting plate in cubicle
see page 156
see page 56
see page 158
147
Other partitions
Distribution
System P
Catalogue numbers
DD382042
Metal partition, used to separate two adjacent cubicles.

It is made up of two panels, each 850 mm high.
The top and bottom ends have knock-outs for busbars, PE/PEN conductors or
auxiliary wiring.
Supplied with the necessary supports and hardware, the partition is mounted on the
framework and does not hinder installation of the functional mounting plates.
Cat. no. selection
Designation
Cat. no.
depth 400 mm
depth 600 mm
DD382043
04911.
600
04911 + 04931.
144
04911
04911 + 04931
145
Distribution
System P
Catalogue numbers
General
DD381399
Downstream circuits are connected from the front, to spring terminals.

Contact pressure automatically adapts to the size of the conductor. It does not
depend on the operator.
Contacts are insensitive to vibrations and thermal variations.
Only one cable (flexible or rigid, without a metal ferrule) can be inserted in a spring
terminal.
Degree of protection: IPxxB.
Advantages
b a reliable electrical connection, no maintenance required (tightness guaranteed
over time)
b very fast connection
b easy phase balancing
b rewiring is very easy if the switchboard is expanded or modified.
Cable connection.
PD390657
PD390651
The four-pole distribution block is made up of:

b a fully insulated, one-piece distribution block complying with the degree of
protection IPxxB (protection against direct contacts)
b a modular cover.
The design of the front (45 mm nose) blends perfectly into a row comprising modular
devices.
Designation
Cat. no.
160 A Distribloc distribution block + connection
04045
04046
b rated insulation level: Ui = 750 V
b rated operational current Ie (40C):
v 125 A for the 125 A Distribloc
v 160 A for the 160 A Distribloc with its prefabricated connection for INS160 or
NSA160
b short-circuit withstand current: the reinforced breaking capacity due to cascading
in circuit-breaker combinations is maintained. The worst-case situations have been
tested.
b complies with the low-voltage device standard IEC 60947.7.1 and/or IEC 60439.1
b impulse withstand voltage Uimp = 8 kV.
DD381660
Supply
b tunnel terminal on 125 A Distribloc 125 for 6 to 35v flexible cables (10 to 35v rigid
cables)
b the 160 A Distribloc is supplied with a prefabricated flexible connection. It is
designed for an INS100/160 or NSA160 switch-disconnector, installed on the left or
right.
Distribution (125 and 160 A Distribloc)
b spring terminals:
b tunnel terminals:
v 1 outgoer from 4 to 16v, flexible (4 to 25v rigid)
Supply
b an identification label
b adhesive labels for phase identification
b a prefabricated flexible connection for the INS160 or NSA160 (160 A Distribloc
only).
148
Distribution
System P
Catalogue numbers
Installation
b clipped onto a modular rail
b width occupied is 12 modules (9 mm each)
b screwed to plain or slotted backplate. Distances between centres = 100 x 75 mm.
Set of four flexible connections, 35v,, L = 210 mm.

To supply a 125 A Distribloc from an NG125 or an INS125.
Designation
Cat. no.
4 NG-INS125 connections for Distribloc
04047
DD380932
PD390658
125 A connection
DD381609
DD381608
Dimensions
149
Distribution
System P
Catalogue numbers
General
DD381399
Downstream circuits are connected from the front, without screws, to spring
terminals. Contact pressure automatically adapts to the size of the conductor
(minimum size = 1 mm2). Contacts are insensitive to vibrations and thermal
variations.
terminal.
Advantages of spring terminals
b a reliable electrical connection, no maintenance required
b the fast connections make phase balancing very easy.
250 A Polybloc distribution block

PD390549
Applications
The Polybloc distribution block is designed for installation directly downstream of
Compact circuit breakers and Interpact switch-disconnectors devices up to 250 A.
It can be rapidly mounted in the horizontal position. Electrical connections are made
directly to the device terminals.
It has the same width as the devices and does not take up any additional space in
the switchboard.
The connection terminals are slanted to facilitate cable entry and not exceed the
bending radius of the flexible and rigid cables.
Cat. no. selection
Designation
Cat. no.
Polybloc distribution block, 3P, 250 A

04033
04034
DD381402
The electrical characteristics are perfectly compatible with the connected devices.
Neither the temperature derating curves nor the performance levels of the circuit
breakers and switch-disconnectors are altered.
tested.
impulse withstand voltage Uimp = 8 kV.
Supply
Directly to the terminals of the Compact NS and Interpact INS devices up to 250 A.
Distribution
Via cables, up to six 10 mm cables and three 16 mm cables per phase.
Installation
It can also be mounted downstream of vertically mounted Compact NS100/250 and
Interpact INS250 devices in the enclosures. The Polybloc is mounted on a depthadjustable modular rail (03402).
Vertically mounted Polybloc on a depth-adjustable modular rail

(03402) in a cubicle.
Dimensions
DD381406
Polybloc, 3P
Polybloc, 4P
150
H (mm)
L (mm)
P (mm)
105
140
138
138
63
63
Distribution
System P
Catalogue numbers
DD381403
These blocks with screw terminals can be mounted on the 250 A Polybloc for
connection of two 35 mm cables per phase.
Designation
Cat. no.
35 mm 3P additional blocks (3 blocks)
35 mm 4P additional blocks (4 blocks)
160 A Polybloc distribution block
04155
04156
DD381200
The 160 A Polybloc is made up of individual elements that can be used alone or with
others to make two-pole, three-pole or four-pole distribution blocks.
Mounting is very fast. It clips onto a modular rail and is supplied by cables via a tunnel
terminal.
The connection spring terminals are slanted to facilitate cable entry and bending of
the flexible and rigid cables.
It is supplied with a cover that also guides the cables.
Cat. no. selection
Designation
Cat. no.
04031
Sold in sets of 12.

in circuit-breaker combinations is maintained. The worst-case situations were tested.
The electrical characteristics are perfectly compatible with the connected devices.
Neither the temperature derating curves nor the performance levels of the circuit
breakers and switch-disconnectors are altered.
Three 160 A Polybloc distribution blocks in the vertical position

on a modular rail, supplied by an NG125.
Supply
Direct to a tunnel terminal, for cables up to 70 mm.
Distribution
Via cables, up to six 16 mm cables.
Installation
The blocks clip onto a modular rail.
DD381394
Dimensions
70
95
38
151
Distribution
System P

block
Catalogue numbers
PD390659
160/630 A four-pole multi-stage

distribution block
The distribution block can be installed horizontally in the device zone.

The distribution block is made up of:
b two staggered supports made of an insulating material
b four slanted copper bars with holes every 25 mm
v 13 threaded M6 holes for outgoers
v four 12.2 mm diameter holes to supply the distribution block.
It is supplied with:
b M6 hardware
b one IPxxB insulating barrier for the front.
Cat. no. selection
Multi-stage distri. block
Size of bars (mm)
Cat. no.
160 A Distribloc (40C)

15 x 5
20 x 5
32 x 5
32 x 8
04052
04053
04054
04055
DD381341
b rated operational current Ie (40C):
v 160 A for distribution block 04052
b rated short-time withstand current Icw:
v 10 kA rms / 1 s for 160 A block
b rated peak withstand current Ipk:
v 30 k for 160 A block
Supply
b 16 mm2 to 50 mm2 cables with crimped lugs
b 20 x 2 mm flexible bars for NS100/160
b 20 x 3 mm flexible bars for NS250
b 32 x 5 mm flexible bars for NS400
b 32 x 8 mm flexible bars for NS630.
Distribution
13 outgoers per phase, max. 50 mm2.
Installation
b screwed onto the adapter 03595.
152

block
Distribution
System P
Catalogue numbers
DD381344
Dimensions
153
Distribution
System P
Catalogue numbers
General
DD381399
For connections, the distribution block uses a proven technique, i.e. spring terminals.
Downstream circuits are connected from the front, without screws, to spring
terminals. Contact pressure does not depend on the operator. It automatically adapts
to the size of the conductor (minimum size = 1mm). Contacts are insensitive to
vibrations and thermal variations.
terminal.
Advantages
b a reliable electrical connection, no maintenance required (tightness guaranteed
over time)
b the fast connections make phase balancing very easy.
Cable connection.
63/80 A Multiclip distribution

blocks
PD390660
Application
Distribution over half or full rows of modular devices. It is generally supplied by a
device at the head of a group of outgoers (NG125, INS, C60, etc.).
Cat. no. selection
Designation
Cat. no.
80 A Multiclip distribution block, 4P

63 A Multiclip distribution block, 4P, 1/2 row
04004
04008
DD381661
b impulse withstand voltage Uimp = 6 kV
tested.
b 63/80 A Multiclip distribution blocks:
v 4 mm cable outgoer: Imax = 32 A
v two 6 mm cables: Imax = 63 A.
Supply
Via tunnel terminals up to 25 mm, generally from a device supplying a group of
outgoers.
The tunnel terminals are positioned to facilitate cable entry and screw tightening.
They are designed for cables arriving from the top or bottom.
Distribution
b for the full-row Multiclip, 4P (04004), each phase offers:
v 2 connection points for 6 mm max. cable
the neutral offers:
v 13 connection points for 4mm max. cable
b for the half-row Multiclip, 4P (04008), each phase offers:
the neutral offers:
Each connection point can receive a single cable, either flexible or rigid.
04008.
04004.
DD381664
DD381665
Installation
b clipped onto the rear of modular rail
Half-row Multiclip distribution block supplied

by an INS switch-disconnector.
Multiclip distribution block supplied by a Vigi

NG125 circuit breaker.
Supplied with 100 mm long bared copper connections

b for full-row Multiclip (04004):
v 2 sets of ten 4 mm connections + 1 set of six 6 mm connections
b for half-row Multiclip (04008):
v 1 set of ten 4 mm connections + 1 set of six 6 mm connections.
154
Distribution
System P
Catalogue numbers
160/200 A Multiclip distribution

blocks
Application
Distribution over full rows of modular devices.
The distribution block is generally supplied by busbars in cubicles.
PD390661
Cat. no. selection

Designation
200 A Multiclip, 2P
200 A Multiclip, 3P
200 A Multiclip, 4P
160 A Multiclip, 4P, 1/2 row
Cat. no.
04012
04013
04014
04018
DD381672
in circuit-breaker combinations is maintained. The worst-case situations have been.
b 160/200 A Multiclip distribution blocks:
v two 10 mm cables: Imax = 63 A.
Supply
b direct to terminals:
v 50 mm cables with crimped lugs
v 20 x 3 mm flexible bars
b from lateral, channelled busbars in a cubicle (connection must be made).
DD381670
04012.
Distribution
b 200 A Multiclip, 2P (04012):
v 12 connection points for phase and neutral
b 200 A Multiclip, 3P and 4P (04013 and 04014):
v 12 connection points for each phase
v 18 connection points for the neutral
b 160 A Multiclip, 4P, 1/2 row (04018):
v 6 connection points for each phase
v 9 connection points for the neutral
Each connection point can receive a single 10 mm cable, either flexible or rigid.
Installation
b clipped onto the rear of modular rail
b screwed to plain or slotted backplate.
DD381671
04013.
Supplied with:
b 100 mm long, bared 10 mm copper connections
v 200 A Multiclip, 2P, 3P and 4P (04012, 04013 et 04014): 2 sets of 12 connections
v 160 A Multiclip, 1/2 row (04018): 1 set of 12 connections
b protection covers for the supply terminals (IPxxB)
b the hardware required for the supply terminals.
DD381673
04014.
04018.
155
Distribution
System P
Catalogue numbers

PD390569
Presentation
Polypact is a horizontal distribution block. It connects directly to the mounting plate
and can supply:
b three four-pole and four three-pole Compact NS circuit breakers, whatever the
ratings (100, 160 or 250 A), the operating systems (toggle, rotary handle, motor
mechanism), whether fixed or plug-in, front or rear connection (the circuit breakers
must be equipped with long terminal shields downstream)
b three three-pole or four-pole Interpact INS switch-disconnectors, whatever the
ratings (100, 160 or 250 A), whether front or rear connection.
The design and small size blend perfectly with the devices.
It can be supplied by flat or Linergy busbars positioned to the left or right.
PD390570
A dependable switchboard
Fully insulated, Polypact contributes to the safety of life and property.
The prefabricated connections supplied separately are secured using torque nuts to
ensure the correct tightness over time, without maintenance.
Numerous and well distributed vents ensure natural convection and optimum cooling
of the conductors.
An upgradeable switchboard
The circuit breakers can be easily connected from the front. It is simple to
interchange a device or to add a device in a reserve slot.
DD381246
Functional features
There are markings (N, L1, L2, L3) on the front and the sides for the phases.
The running of auxiliary cables between the devices and the corresponding terminal
blocks is also taken into account. Spacious trunking is built into the blocks for
the auxiliary wiring.
Cat. no. selection
Fixed Compact NS100/250 with toggle and Interpact INS250
Connection to Linergy busbars
Cat. no.
Polypact with prefabricated connections

Three-pole distribution block
Four-pole distribution block
04403
04404
Fixed/plug-in Compact NS, all operating systems

Connection to flat or Linergy busbars
Polypact with prefabricated connections (2)
Polypact without connection (3)
(1)
Cat. no.
04405
04406
04407
04408
(1) For plug-in Compact NS circuit breakers, order the adapter 29306 (3P) or 29307 (4P) with the
base.
(2) The prefabricated connections are not compatible with form 2 separation.
In this case, use the form 2 restoration kit 04924 (see page 137).
(3) Make the connection with flexible bars, 32 x 6 mm (04752), see page 128.
b rated operational current: distribution-block derating follows the normal derating
curves of Compact NS and Interpact INS devices.
b rated insulation level: 750 V
b rated short-time withstand current Icw = 8.5 kA rms / 1 second
b short-circuit withstand current compatible with the breaking capacity of the
Compact NS circuit breakers connected to the distribution block.
DD381249
DD381247
Supplied with:
b self-adhesive labels to mark the phases for the connections to the busbars.
04404.
156
04408.
Distribution
System P
DD381251
DD381250
Catalogue numbers
Auxiliary wires running in the built-in trunking.
DD381253
DD381252
Supply of three NS100/250 four-pole devices

equipped with long terminal shields
downstream.
Phase marking on the front of the distribution

block.
Tooth-caps
Designation
Polypact tooth-caps
Phase marking on the side of the distribution

block.
Identification labels on the flexible
connections.
Cat. no.
04809
DD381255
DD381254
The caps block off the reserve terminals on a Polypact three-pole or four-pole
distribution block.
Made of an insulating material, they simply clip on from the front.
157
Distribution
Terminal blocks
System P
Spring technology
Catalogue numbers
Terminal blocks
Terminal blocks for 4 to 16v cables, flexible or rigid, without a metal ferrule.
b connection to spring terminals, no screws
b contact pressure automatically adapts to the size of the conductor
b only one cable can be inserted in a spring terminal
b two versions:
v 4 - 6 - 10 - 16v: one incomer and one outgoer for cables
v 4v: one incomer and two outgoers for cables
b three colours: grey for phases, blue for neutral and green/yellow for earth
b mounting by clipping onto a modular rail
b trated insulation level Ui = 800 V
b rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp = 8 kV
Advantages
b the quality of the connection does not depend on the operator and remains stable
over time without maintenance
b contacts are insensitive to vibrations and thermal variations.
b less expensive to apply
b permits a frontal connection
b connection surety is operator-independent
815996
Terminal blocks for 4v cables

6 mm wide
510050
One incomer, one outgoers.
One incomer, two outgoers.
1 incomer, 1 outgoer
Grey block
Blue block
Green/yellow block
Partition
Grey end plate
Blue end plate
1 incomer, 2 outgoers
Grey block
Blue block
Green/yellow block
Partition
Jumper
Grey end plate
Blue end plate
Number per set
Cat. no.
2 x 4v
2 x 4v
2 x 4v
100
100
100
10
10
10
AB1 RR435U2GR
AB1 RR435U2BL
AB1 RRTP435U2
AB1 RRTPAC242
AB1 RRAC443GR
AB1 RRAC443BL
3 x 4v
3 x 4v
3 x 4v
100
100
100
10
10
10
10
AB1 RR435U3GR
AB1 RR435U3BL
AB1 RRTP435U3
AB1 RRTPAC243
AB1 RRAL42
AB1 RRAC243GR
AB1 RRAC243BL
Number per set
Cat. no.
100
100
100
10
AB1 RR635U2GR
AB1 RR635U2BL
AB1 RRTP635U2
AB1 RRAL62
Number per set
Cat. no.
50
50
50
10
AB1 RR1035U2GR
AB1 RR1035U2BL
AB1 RRTP1035U2
AB1 RRAL102
Number per set
Cat. no.
50
50
50
50
AB1 RR1635U2GR
AB1 RR1635U2BL
AB1 RRTP1635U2
AB1 RRAL162
510048

8 mm wide
Grey block
Blue block
Green/yellow block
Jumper
2 x 6v
2 x 6v
2 x 6v

10 mm wide
51046
Grey block
Blue block
Green/yellow block
Jumper
2 x 10v
2 x 10v
2 x 10v

12 mm wide
510045
Grey block
Blue block
Green/yellow block
Jumper
158
2 x 16v
2 x 16v
2 x 16v
Distribution
Terminal blocks
System P
Screw technology
Catalogue numbers
Terminal blocks for 35 to 150v cables, flexible or rigid, without a metal ferrule.
Complementary offer "terminal blocks spring technology" for cables up to 16v.
b two colours: grey for phases, blue for neutral
b mounting by clipping onto a modular rail
b rated insulation level:
v Terminal blocks for 35 to 70v cables: Ui = 800V
v terminal blocks for 150v cables: Ui = 1000V
b rated impulse withstand voltage:
v Terminal blocks for 35 to 150v cables:Uimp = 8kV
Terminal blocks
501685

16 mm wide
Grey block
Blue block
Partition plate
2 x 35v
2 x 35v
501686

24 mm wide
Grey block
Blue block
Partition plate
2 x 70v
2 x 70v
501687

28 mm wide
Grey block
Blue block
2 x 150v
2 x 150v
Number per set
Cat. no.
20
20
10
AB1 VVN3535U
AB1 VVN3535UBL
AB1 ASN35
Number per set
Cat. no.
20
20
10
AB1 VVN7035U
AB1 VVN7035UBL
AB1 ASN70
Number per set
Cat. no.
10
10
AB1 VVN15035U
AB1 VVN15035UBL
Stop plate
Stop plate
Plastic end stop
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
DD382534
10
Cat. no.
4AB1 AB8P35
6 mm pitch
8 mm pitch
AB1-BV6
AB1-B610
AB1-B620
AB1-B630
AB1-B640
AB1-B650
AB1-B660
AB1-B6670
AB1-B680
AB1-B690
AB1-B6100
AB1-B6L1
AB1-B6L2
AB1-B6L3
AB1-BV6RP
AB1-BV6BM
AB1-BV8
AB1-B810
AB1-B820
AB1-B830
AB1-B840
AB1-B850
AB1-B860
AB1-B870
AB1-B880
AB1-B890
AB1-B8100
Number per set
Cat. no.
Sold in lots of 25 identical strips

1
DD382533
Markers
Number per set

100
Marking
Blank
1...10
11...20
21...30
31...40
41...50
51...60
61...70
71...80
81...90
91...100
L1
L2
L3
+ Red
- Blue
Marking
Blank clip-on marker(4.5 x

500
AB1-SA1
8.3mm)
Marker strips with numbers 101 to 110, etc. up to 991 999.
Please consult "Terminal blocks" catalogue, reference number: ART022468
159
Connection accessories
Cable-tie supports
Enclosures
System P
Catalogue numbers
Cable-tie supports
Longitudinal cable-tie supports

Width of cable compartment
Set of four cable-tie supports
W = 300 mm
W = 400 mm
W = 650 mm
W = 800 mm
08773
08774
08776
08778
DD381556
DD381555
Cable-tie supports are used to correctly position the cables in the connection
compartment.
They are sold in sets of four and supplied with the necessary hardware for
connection to the framework.
Lateral cable-tie supports

There are two sizes:
b D = 400 mm for frameworks that are 400 mm deep
b D = 200 mm, this support is added to the 400 mm support for frameworks that are
650 mm deep. It can also be installed alone.
Depth of cable compartment
Set of four cable-tie supports
DD381557
D = 400 mm
D = 600 mm
DD381638
08794.
08796.
160
08794
08796 + 08794
Cable running
Cable straps
Distribution
System P
Catalogue numbers
Designation
12 cable straps for vertical cables
Cat. no.
04262
DD381632
DD381629
Vertical cable straps
DD381631
Installation on a mounting plate.
Installation on a modular rail support.
Designation
2 covers for vertical cable straps L = 1 m
Cat. no.
04263
DD381634
DD381633
Cover for vertical cable straps
Horizontal cable straps
Designation
DD381618
12 cable straps for horizontal cables
Cat. no.
04239
DD381619
Horizontal cable straps have the same capacity as 60 x 30 mm trunking.
161
Cable running
Cable straps
Trunking
Distribution
System P
Catalogue numbers
Cover for horizontal cable straps
Designation
Cat. no.
04243
DD381622
DD381621
4 covers for horizontal cable straps L = 430 mm
Vertical trunking support
Designation
Cat. no.
DD381623
12 vertical trunking supports
04265
DD381625
The 30 or 60 mm deep trunking sections can be installed directly on the modular-rail

supports or on the mounting plates of vertically mounted Compact NS circuit
breakers.
DD380866
Trunking installed on a modular rail.
Trunking installed on a mounting plate.
Horizontal trunking support
Designation
Cat. no.
04255
DD382320
DD381627
DD381626
Trunking installed horizontally on the rear of a modular rail.
162
Cable running
Trunking, accessories
Distribution
System P
Catalogue numbers
Designation
4 horizontal sections, 60 x 30 mm, L = 450 mm (with supports)
Vertical trunking, 80 x 60 mm, L = 2000 mm (sold in sets of 18)
Cable trunking for doors
Designation
DD381641
Cable trunking for doors, L = 2000 mm

(sold in sets of 30)
.Adhesive trunking, 30 x 30 mm
DD380863
Flexible trunking
Designation
Flexible trunking for wiring to door
Cat. no.
04233
Cat. no.
04235
DD381643
Designation
Disconnectable terminal block for auxiliaries
Cat. no.
04228
DD382647
DD381644
Grommets for wiring through

front
Designation
10 grommets for wiring through front
Cat. no.
04234
DD380865
DD380864
04257
04267
Length = 500 mm, inner diameter = 19mm.
Terminal block for auxiliaries
DD380864
Cat. no.
DD381640
DD381639
Trunking
A duct for four conductors, 1755 mm long, for the distribution of auxiliary voltages
from the power and regulation devices to the automatic relay, control and indication
systems.
Composition
b insulating duct
b four brass conductors offering 166 tap-off points per linear meter via 6.35 mm tabterminals
b two clamps for mounting on cable-tie supports
b one lateral clamp
Characteristics
b rated insulation level: Ui = 660 V
b rated operational current (40C): 32 A
Cat. no. selection
Designation
Cat. no.
04203
163
Cubicles
Dimensions
System P
Dimensions
DD381823
DD381822
DD381875
Frameworks, D = 400 mm
DD381826
DD381825
DD381893
DD381827
DD381824
Frameworks, D = 600 mm
Fixing to floor
With plinth
DD381830
DD381829
Without plinth
164
A
300
400
650
800
B
262,5
362,5
612,5
762,5
Cubicles
Dimensions
System P
Dimensions
Cubicle with cover panels
DD381833
DD381832
Width
DD381831
Height
Depth
DD382323
Doors front and rear
DD382325
DD382324
DD382322
Door in front and panel in rear
Door
DD381828
DD381837
DD381836
IP55 door
DD381835
DD381834
IP30 door
DD382277
Available space behind door
165
Cubicles
Dimensions
System P
Dimensions
DD381876
DD381849
Horizontal flat busbars
DD381850
DD381851
DD381852
DD381853
Layout of horizontal flat busbars:
DD381860
800 A.
DD381859
630 A.
1250 A.
1600 A.
DD381865
DD381861
DD381862
DD381863
DD381864
Layout of Linergy busbars
Double Linergy busbars.
166
DD381858
DD381857
DD381856
DD381855
Linergy busbars
1000 A.
Cubicles
Dimensions
System P
Dimensions
DD381867
DD381866
DD381872
DD381868
DD381869
DD381870
DD381871
Layout of lateral busbars
Double flat busbars.
DD381874
DD381873
Layout of rear busbars
D = 400 mm
D = 600 mm
B
C
B
C
A
50
284
250
484
450
60
274
240
474
440
80
254
220
454
420
D = 400 mm
D = 600 mm
B
C
B
C
284
242
484
442
167
Cubicles
Dimensions
System P
Dimensions
DD381840
C
110
210
460
610
DD381842
DD381841
DD381839
A
300
400
650
800
DD381838
Plain gland plates
168
Cubicles
Dimensions
System P
Dimensions
DD381843
DD381844
DD381845
DD381846
DD381847
DD381848
DD381838
Two-part gland plates
169
170
Standards contents
Standards
International electrotechnical standards
Standards
Standard IEC 60439-1
Enclosure standards
Prisma Plus tested switchboards
CE marking
172
172
173
174
175
176
177
171
International electrotechnical
standards
Standards
System P
Characteristics
IEC international standards

IEC member countries
South Africa
Germany
Argentina
Australia
Austria
Belarus
Belgium
Brazil
Bulgaria
Canada
China
Korea (Rep. of)
Croatia
Denmark
Egypt
Spain
Finland
France
Greece
Hungary
India
Iran
Indonesia
Ireland
Israel
Italy
Japan
Luxemburg
Malaysia
Mexico
Norway
New Zealand
Pakistan
Netherlands
Poland
Portugal
Rumania
United Kingdom
Russia
Singapore
Slovakia
Slovenia
Sweden
Switzerland
Czech Rep.
Thailand
Turkey
Ukraine
United States
Yugoslavia
DD382009
National standards
The IEC (International Electrotechnical Commission) is a worldwide organisation for

standardisation comprising all national electrotechnical committees (IEC National
Committees).
The object of the IEC is to promote international cooperation on all questions
concerning standardisation in the electrical and electronic fields.
To that end, the IEC publishes International Standards.
Their preparation is entrusted to technical committees and any IEC National
Committee interested in the subject dealt with may participate in the preparatory
work.
In Europe
The IEC documents are first studied by CENELEC, which establishes:
b either a European standard (EN), often identical to the IEC standard, which then
becomes the applicable national standard in all the member countries
b or, if problems arise, a harmonisation document (HD).
Other IEC member countries
Each country is autonomous and can accept the IEC standard as the national
standard, with or without modifications.
Even though they are IEC members, countries such as Japan and the United States
continue to develop their own standardisation systems.
Countries without a standardisation system
It is possible to refer to an IEC standard in the framework of a project.
CEI / IEC
International Electrotechnical Commission
CENELEC
European Committee for Electrotechnical Standardisation
UTE
Union Technique de llectricit (French electrotechnical
standardisation organisation)
VDE
Verband der Elektrotechnik, Elektronik und Informationstechnik
e.v. (German electrotechnical, electronics and computer
technology standardisation organisation)
BSI
British Standards Institution
172
Standards
Tools for quality assurance
Standards
System P
Characteristics
There are different types of standards, including:

b management standards
b installation standards
b product standards.
Management standards
DD381776
DD381775
The different types of standards
ISO 9004: Quality management system - guidelines for performance improvement.

Used in setting up quality management systems.
ISO 9001: Quality management system - requirements. Used for certification audits.
Switchgear assemblies.
ISO 14004: Environmental management system - major guidelines on the principles.

Systems and techniques implemented.
ISO 14001: Environmental management system - specification with guidance for
use.
DD381778
DD381777
Design and manufacture.
A majority of Schneider Electric development centres and factories are certified ISO
9001 and ISO 14001.
Installation standards
Switchgear devices.
Installation.
The set of IEC 60364-X standards defines the main principles and rules on:
b assessment of general characteristics of installations
b protection
b selection and erection of equipment
b verification and maintenance of installations.
Product standards
They apply to LV switchgear devices or LV switchgear assemblies, where the
purpose is to ensure the correct operation and safety of the concerned products.
b standards on switchgear devices:
v IEC 60947-1: general rules
v IEC 60947-2: circuit breakers
v IEC 60947-3: switches and disconnectors
v IEC 60947-4: contactors
v IEC 62208 / EN 50298: empty enclosures.
b
v
v
v
v
v
standards on switchgear assemblies:

IEC 60439-1: general rules
IEC 60439-2: busbar trunking systems
IEC 60439-3: distribution boards
IEC 60439-4: assemblies for construction sites
IEC 60439-5: power distribution in networks.
Regulations
The regulations in a given country may make certain standards legally binding and
may also create additional safety requirements.
Quality assurance
In addition to providing proof of the conformity of its quality management system, a

product manufacturer can demonstrate the quality of products by providing proof that
their design and manufacture comply with the requirements in the applicable
standard.
Proof of conformity may be a declaration by the manufacturer or a certificate supplied
by an independent organisation.
173
Standards
Standard IEC 60439-1
System P
Characteristics
All elements making up the electrical switchboard are concerned.
The object of standard IEC 60439-1 is to lay down the definitions and to state the
service conditions, construction requirements, technical characteristics and tests for
low-voltage switchgear and controlgear assemblies (U < 1000 V).
The standard defines a low-voltage switchgear and controlgear assembly (the
electrical switchboard) as "a combination of one or more low-voltage switching
devices together with associated control, measuring, signalling, protective,
regulating equipment, etc., completely assembled under the responsibility of the
manufacturer with all the internal electrical and mechanical inter-connections and
structural parts".
Standard IEC 60439-1 defines ten

mandatory tests
These tests ensure the conformity of the electrical switchboard and are intended to
check switchboard characteristics.
b seven type tests are carried out on typical configurations
b three routine tests are carried out on the completely finished switchboard. Their
purpose is the check that the characteristics validated by the type tests were not
altered during the manufacturing operations.
The seven type tests
1 - Temperature-rise limits
The incoming circuit is loaded to its rated current and each outgoing circuit is loaded
with its rated current multiplied by the rated diversity factor. Once the temperature
has stabilised, the temperature rise must not exceed the permissible temperatures
for materials or risk causing burns.
2 - Dielectric properties
The test voltage is applied between all live parts and the interconnected exposed
conductive parts, as well as between each pole and all the other poles connected for
this test to the interconnected exposed conductive parts.
b up to 3500 V, 50 Hz
b 4 to 12 kV impulse voltage depending on the rated characteristics.
3 - Short-circuit withstand strength

In the event of a short-circuit, whether inside or outside the switchboard, the latter
must handle the resulting stresses (temperature rise, attraction or repulsion forces
exerted on conductors, etc.).
The capacity to handle the stresses is above all the means to avoid danger (breaking
and projection of components, electric arcs and their propagation outside the
switchboard).
However, it is also the means to ensure a rapid return to operation after the incident.
4 - Effectiveness of the protective circuit

The effectiveness of the protective circuit is checked by two tests:
b short-circuit strength between the protective conductor and the nearest phase
b verification, employing a resistance measuring instrument, of the effective
connection between the exposed conductive parts of the assembly and the protective
circuit.
5 - Clearances and creepage distances

The minimum clearance in air is a function of the impulse withstand voltage and the
degree of pollution in the switchboard.
The minimum creepage distance is a function of the rated insulation level, the degree
of pollution and the material group of the insulating material separating the live parts.
6 - Mechanical operation
Satisfactory mechanical operation is verified after installation in the assembly.
The number of operating cycles for the test is 50.
This test is required for the locking mechanisms, for example.
7 - Degree of protection
The tests carried out determine the capacity of the switchboard to:
b protect people against access to dangerous parts
b protect devices against the penetration of foreign objects and liquids.
Three routine tests
1 - Inspection of the assembly

2 - Dielectric test
3 - Checking of protective measures and of the electrical
continuity of the protective circuits.
174
Standards
Enclosure standards
IEC 62208 and EN 50298
System P
Characteristics
Standards IEC 62208 and

EN 50298
Empty enclosures for low-voltage
switchgear and controlgear
assemblies
General rules for empty enclosures

Standards IEC 62208 and EN 50298 lay down definitions, classifications,
characteristics and test requirements for the enclosures used for assemblies.
They apply to empty enclosures before installation of the devices by the panel
builder, as supplied by the manufacturer.
They apply to one-piece enclosures and to enclosures supplied in kit form.
Type tests
1 - Static load
2 - Hoisting
3 - Axial loads of metal inserts
4 - IK code
5 - IP code
6 - Thermal stability
7 - Resistance to heat
8 - Resistance to abnormal heat and to fire
9 - Dielectric strength
10 - Protective-circuit continuity
11 - Weather resistance
12 - Corrosion resistance
13 - Marking.
175
Standards
System P
Characteristics
A switchboard must comply with the requirements in standard IEC 60439-1 to
guarantee the safety and reliability of the installation.
Managers of installations, fully aware of the professional and legal liabilities weighing
on their company and on themselves, demand a high level of safety for the electrical
installation.
What is more, the serious economic consequences of prolonged halts in production
mean that the electrical switchboard must provide excellent continuity of service,
whatever the operating conditions.
The Schneider Electric solution
b specify switchboards that comply with standard IEC 60439-1

b guarantee a level of safety that has been 100% tested, from the day the
switchboard is installed and throughout its service life
b ensure the return on investment through easy upgrading of the installation in
compliance with the standard
b guarantee that the switchboard complies with the technical specifications.
The conformity of the switchboard has been tested and proven.

A Prisma Plus switchboard is:
b made up of Merlin Gerin low-voltage devices and components that all comply with
the applicable standards
b based on configurations in the Merlin Gerin catalogue
b made up of Prisma Plus mechanical and electrical components that have been
subjected to the seven type tests required by the standard
b mounted and wired by a panel builder in compliance with professional standards
b subjected to the three routine tests required by the standard.
Schneider Electric makes available to the panel builder everything required to create
tested Prisma Plus switchboards, including the basic configurations in the lowvoltage distribution catalogue, all the documentation for switchboard design and
mounting, calculation and design software, etc.
The panel builder can easily demonstrate conformity with standard IEC 60439-1 by
presenting the declarations or certificates of conformity concerning the type tests
carried out by independent laboratories ( ASEFA, ASTA, KEMA, etc.) and supplied
by Schneider Electric.
The panel builder is responsible for the three routine tests and delivers the
corresponding declarations of conformity.
176
Standards
CE marking
System P
Characteristics
CE marking
CE marking is defined by regulations and attributed under the sole responsibility of

the manufacturer. It is intended for the verification authorities of the European
countries that enforce the European regulations.
It allows the free circulation of a product in the European Union and certifies that it
complies with the basic requirements of all the applicable European directives.
CE marking does not attest to quality and does not indicate conformity with a
standard.
The CE declaration of conformity
The declaration is intended exclusively for authorities in charge of verifying

compliance with the applicable regulations and it drafted, signed and held for
presentation to the authorities by the manufacturer.
For the Prisma Plus range, the declaration is the responsibility of the Schneider
Electric unit that designed and developed the product.
For LV switchboards, the declaration is the responsibility of the panel builder.
Products marked CE
The following products receive CE marking:

b all products that are liable to endanger the safety of persons, animals and property
(LV directive)
b all products that are liable to cause electromagnetic disturbance above a
standardised threshold or the performance of which is liable to be affected by such
disturbance (EMC directive).
Consequences:
b the Prisma Plus range of switchboards falls under the LV directive only
b LV switchboards are covered by the LV directive and may also fall under the EMC
directive, depending on the type of devices incorporated.
CE marking
For the Prisma Plus range, the CE marking is placed:

b on the packing of "mechanical" components
b on the product itself for "electrical" components.
For the LV assemblies created by the panel builder, the CE marking is placed:
b on the packing materials
b on the name plate (if applicable)
b on one of the documents accompanying the switchboard when it is shipped.
177
178
Characteristics contents
Designing Prisma Plus power circuits
Designing horizontal busbars
Designing Linergy busbars
Designing vertical flat busbars
Designing connections u 630 A
Designing connections u 630 A between a device and busbars
Designing customer connections
Designing connections y 630 A
Designing the PE protective conductor
Designing the PEN conductor
Selection of enclosures according to the premises
Properties of metal enclosures
Thermal characteristics
Thermal management of switchboards
180
180
184
185
186
188
192
206
224
228
229
230
232
240
242
242
179
System P
Designing Prisma Plus

power circuits
Presentation and approach
Characteristics
In the following pages you will find a number of examples, validated for Prisma Plus
switchboards, intended to assist in determining the busbars as well as the upstream
and downstream connections for the installation.
The examples assume that the devices have already been selected.
A complete process involves a number of steps before making final choices
(transformer, conductors, protection, etc.).
Schneider Electric offers a number of tools to assist in designing a complete
installation (technical guides, software).
Busbar sizing
The factors that must be taken into account in determining the size of busbars
include:
b the diversity factor.
Not all the loads supplied by a set of busbars are used at full rated load or at the same
time. The diversity factor is the means to determine the maximum load current used
to size the busbars.
Standard IEC 60439-1 4.7 specifies the table below.
PD390357
The Prisma Plus system takes into account

the installation and connection conditions of
Merlin Gerin and Telemecanique devices.
The entire installation complies with
standard IEC 60439-1. The result is a type
tested switchboard.
Number of circuits
2 and 3
4 and 5
6 to 9
10 and more
Diversity factor
0.9
0.8
0.7
0.6
b the degree of protection IP.

For information on defining the necessary degree of protection IP, page 230.
b the ambient temperature around the switchboard.
180
System P

power circuits
Characteristics
DD381459
Busbars
The maximum load current for a set of busbars is a function of the thermal
environment.
The type and the size of the conductors must be determined in view of carrying the
required currents taking into account the temperatures reached in the switchboard.
These conductors are subjected to additional heat rise caused by the flowing current
(joule effect) and the connected devices.
The temperatures reached by the conductors and the insulating materials, etc. must
not exceed the maximum temperatures for which the products were designed.
Merlin Gerin busbars and distribution blocks are sized to operate without any
particular constraints for the assemblies in Prisma Plus switchboards operating
under normal environmental conditions (standard switchboard configuration, 35C
outside the switchboard, etc.).
To determine the Linergy busbars required, see the tables on
page 185.
They can be used to determine:
b the type of Linergy busbars, as a function of:
v the current
v the IP value
v the ambient temperature around the switchboard.
Linergy busbars: I y 1600 A.
Double Linergy busbars: 1600 A < I y 3200 A.
DD381460
To determine the required flat busbars, see the tables on page 184 (horizontal
busbars) and on page 186 (vertical busbars)
b the permissible current as a function of:
v the number of bars
v the ambient temperature around the switchboard
v the IP value.
Flat copper busbars 5 mm thick: I y 1600 A.
Flat copper busbars 10 mm thick: I y 3200 A.
Connection of devices u 630 and

busbar connections
To determine the size of upstream and downstream connections for devices, see
the tables starting on page 188.
b the size of copper busbars
b the maximum permissible current.
As a function of:
b the type of circuit breaker
b the IP value
b the ambient temperature around the switchboard
b the type of installation.
181
System P

power circuits
Characteristics
Supply of devices
for outgoers y 630 A
Flexible copper bars with an insulating cover.

To determine the required sizes for flexible bars, see the tables starting on page 224,
which indicate the correct size for each type of connected device.
b an insulated flexible bar (not connected) must meet standards IEC 60243-1
(dielectric, see page 2), NFC 32201 (insulation) and IEC 60332-1 (fire)
b a flexible bar connected to a device in an enclosure must comply with standard
IEC 60439-1 (see explanations on page 174).
Cables
To determine the cables required, see the table on page 227.
b the size of cables as a function of:
v the circuit breaker rating
v the current
v the ambient temperature around the switchboard
b the permissible current for individually tied cables or touching cables as a function
of:
v the size of the cables
v the degree of protection for the switchboard.
PE and PEN conductors
To determine the required size of the PE conductor, see page 228.

Two possibilities:
b either the equation indicated by standard IEC 60439-1 to obtain an optimised
value:
2
I t
S PE = ---------k
Example
v Isc = 36 kA rms C the value of the phase-to-earth fault current = 60 % of the value
of the phase-to-phase fault current (standard IEC 60439-1 8.2.4.2), i.e.:
36 x 0.6 = 21.6 kA
v maximum time delay for the control unit: 0.5 s
v k = 143 for copper conductors with PVC insulation.
The calculation is therefore:
2
21600 x 0 5
2
SPE = ------------------------------------ = 106 8 mm
143
The PE conductor must therefore be a 25 x 5 mm bar (= 125 mm2).
b or the Schneider Electric table based on the standard.

To determine the required size of the PEN conductor, see page 229.
182
183
Designing horizontal busbars
System P
Characteristics
Permissible current and selection of horizontal busbars

The goal is to optimise busbar size according to the installation and operating criteria.
Up to 1600 A
Type of bars
Size per phase

1 bar, 60 x 5 mm
1 bar, 80 x 5 mm
2 bars, 60 x 5 mm
2 bars, 80 x 5 mm

Ambient temperature around the switchboard
25 C
IP y 31
890
1130
1580
2010
IP > 31
840
1050
1420
1820
30 C
IP y 31
850
1080
1500
1920
IP > 31
790
990
1350
1720
35 C
IP y 31
800
1000
1400
1800
IP > 31
750
900
1250
1600
40 C
IP y 31
760
970
1350
1720
IP > 31
700
870
1180
1510
45 C
IP y 31
710
910
1260
1610
IP > 31
650
810
1090
1390
50 C
IP y 31
660
860
1180
1510
IP > 31
b
b
b
b
40 C
IP y 31
1130
1320
1700
1930
2170
2660
3130
IP > 31
1010
1160
1500
1740
1870
2330
2720
45 C
IP y 31
1060
1240
1600
1810
2030
2500
2950
IP > 31
940
1070
1390
1610
1720
2160
2510
50C
IP y 31
990
1160
1500
1690
1900
2330
2750
IP > 31
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
Up to 3200 A
Type of bars
Size per phase

1 bar, 50 x 10 mm
1 bar, 60 x 10 mm
1 bar, 80 x 10 mm
2 bars, 50 x 10 mm
2 bars, 60 x 10 mm
2 bars, 80 x 10 mm
2 bars, 100 x 10 mm

25 C
IP y 31
1330
1550
1990
2270
2550
3110
3650
IP > 31
1220
1400
1800
2090
2270
2820
3280
30 C
IP y 31
1260
1470
1890
2160
2420
2970
3490
IP > 31
1160
1320
1700
1980
2140
2660
3100
35 C
IP y 31
1200
1400
1800
2050
2300
2820
3300
IP > 31
1080
1250
1600
1850
2000
2500
2900
b connection impossible due to the operating-temperature limits of the devices

installed in the switchboard.
Example
Two 50 x 10 mm bars can be used for a 2160 A current with an IP y 31 and an
ambient temperature of 30C around the switchboard.
Where possible, use of 10 mm bars is worthwhile in terms of the In/Isc:

b gain in time during switchboard mounting given, where applicable, the lesser
number of bars installed
b for short-circuits, the rigidity of the bars means fewer busbar supports.
Recommendation
Use 5 mm bars for In y 1600 A and low Icw values (40 kA rms).
Use 10 mm bars for In > 1600 A and medium to high Icw values
(> 40 kA rms).
Note: The values indicated above have been validated for Prisma Plus switchboards.
184
Designing Linergy busbars
System P
Characteristics
Permissible current and selection of Linergy busbars


Linergy bar
Type of bars
Linergy 630
Linergy 800
Linergy 1000
Linergy 1250
Linergy 1600
Linergy 2000 (2 x 1000)
Linergy 2500 (2 x 1250)
Linergy 3200 (2 x 1600)

25 C
IP y 31
750
920
1140
1410
1800
2200
2740
3480
IP > 31
680
840
1040
1290
1650
2000
2500
3200
30 C
IP y 31
710
880
1090
1350
1720
2100
2620
3340
IP > 31
630
800
990
1230
1580
1900
2380
3060
35 C
IP y 31
680
840
1040
1290
1650
2000
2500
3200
IP > 31
590
760
950
1170
1480
1820
2260
2920
40 C
IP y 31
630
800
990
1230
1580
1900
2380
3060
IP > 31
550
720
900
1100
1390
1720
2120
2780
45 C
IP y 31
590
760
950
1170
1480
1820
2260
2920
50 C
IP y 31
550
720
900
1100
1390
1720
2120
2780
IP > 31
530
680
850
1050
1320
1620
2020
2640
IP > 31
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
Example
A Linergy channelled bar can be used for a 1650 A current with an IP y 31 and an
ambient temperature around the switchboard of 35C.

Linergy bar
30 C
IP y 31
710
880
1090
1350
1720
IP > 31
630
800
990
1230
1580
35 C
IP y 31
680
840
1040
1290
1650
IP > 31
590
760
950
1170
1480
40 C
IP y 31
630
800
990
1230
1580
IP > 31
550
720
900
1100
1390
45 C
IP y 31
590
760
950
1170
1480
50 C
IP y 31
550
720
900
1100
1390
IP > 31
530
680
850
1050
1320
IP > 31
b
b
b
b
b
630 A bar.
Cat. no. 04502.
800 A bar.
Cat. no. 04503.
DD381236

installed in the switchboard.
DD381235
IP > 31
680
840
1040
1290
1650
DD381234
25 C
IP y 31
750
920
1140
1410
1800
DD381233
Linergy 630
Linergy 800
Linergy 1000
Linergy 1250
Linergy 1600

1000 A bar.
Cat. no. 04504.
1250 A bar.
Cat. no. 04505.
DD381237
Type of bars
1600 A bar.
Cat. no. 04506.
185

Lateral busbars
System P
Characteristics
Permissible current and selection of vertical busbars
Up to 1600 A
Type of bars
Size per phase

1 bar, 60 x 5 mm
1 bar, 80 x 5 mm
2 bars, 60 x 5 mm
2 bars, 80 x 5 mm

25 C
30 C
35 C
IP y 31
IP > 31
IP y 31
IP > 31
IP y 31
890
840
850
790
800
1130
1050
1080
990
1000
1580
1420
1500
1350
1400
2010
1820
1920
1720
1800
IP > 31
750
900
1250
1600
40 C
IP y 31
760
970
1350
1720
IP > 31
700
870
1180
1510
45 C
IP y 31
710
910
1260
1610
IP > 31
650
810
1090
1390
50 C
IP y 31
660
860
1180
1510
IP > 31
b
b
b
b
IP > 31
1080
1250
1600
1850
2000
2500
2800
40 C
IP y 31
1130
1320
1700
1930
2170
2660
3020
IP > 31
1010
1160
1500
1740
1870
2330
2650
45 C
IP y 31
1060
1240
1600
1810
2030
2500
2840
IP > 31
940
1070
1390
1610
1720
2160
2450
50 C
IP y 31
990
1160
1500
1690
1900
2330
2650
IP > 31
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
Up to 3200 A
Type of bars
Size per phase

1 bar, 50 x 10 mm
1 bar, 60 x 10 mm
1 bar, 80 x 10 mm
2 bars, 50 x 10 mm
2 bars, 60 x 10 mm
2 bars, 80 x 10 mm
2 x 1 bar, 80 x 10 mm

25 C
30 C
35 C
IP y 31
IP > 31
IP y 31
IP > 31
IP y 31
1330
1220
1260
1160
1200
1550
1400
1470
1320
1400
1990
1800
1890
1700
1800
2270
2090
2160
1980
2050
2550
2270
2420
2140
2300
3110
2820
2970
2660
2820
3540
3200
3370
3020
3200

installed in the switchboard..
DD381461
Example
Two 80 x 10 mm bars can be used for a 2820 A current with an IP y 31 and an
ambient temperature of 35C around the switchboard.
DD381474
Two 80 x 10 mm bars installed separately in two busbar compartments can be used

for a 3200 A current with an IP y 31 and an ambient temperature of 35C around the
switchboard.
186

Rear busbars
System P
Characteristics
Permissible current and selection of vertical busbars
Up to 1600 A
Type of bars
Size per phase

1 bar, 60 x 5 mm
1 bar, 80 x 5 mm
2 bars, 60 x 5 mm
2 bars, 80 x 5 mm

25 C
30 C
35 C
IP y 31
IP > 31
IP y 31
IP > 31 IP y 31
890
840
850
790
800
1130
1050
1080
990
1000
1580
1420
1500
1350
1400
2010
1820
1920
1720
1800
IP > 31
750
900
1250
1600
40 C
IP y 31
760
970
1350
1720
IP > 31
700
870
1180
1510
45 C
IP y 31
710
910
1260
1610
IP > 31
650
810
1090
1390
50 C
IP y 31
660
860
1180
1510
IP > 31
b
b
b
b
IP > 31
1080
1250
1600
1850
2000
2500
40 C
IP y 31
1130
1320
1700
1930
2170
2660
IP > 31
1010
1160
1500
1740
1870
2330
45 C
IP y 31
1060
1240
1600
1810
2030
2500
IP > 31
940
1070
1390
1610
1720
2160
50 C
IP y 31
990
1160
1500
1690
1900
2330
IP > 31
b
b
b
b
b
b
Up to 3200 A
Type of bars
Size per phase

1 bar, 50 x 10 mm
1 bar, 60 x 10 mm
1 bar, 80 x 10 mm
2 bars, 50 x 10 mm
2 bars, 60 x 10 mm
2 bars, 80 x 10 mm

25 C
30 C
35 C
IP y 31
IP > 31
IP y 31
IP > 31 IP y 31
1330
1220
1260
1160
1200
1550
1400
1470
1320
1400
1990
1800
1890
1700
1800
2270
2090
2160
1980
2050
2550
2270
2420
2140
2300
3110
2820
2970
2660
2820

installed in the switchboard..
187

Prefabricated connections for Linergy
busbars
System P
Characteristics
DD381476
Compact NS630b to NS1600,

vertically mounted
Using the data below, it is possible to determine the permissible current for a
prefabricated connection between a vertical Compact NS630b/NS1600, fixed or
withdrawable, and Linergy busbars depending on the ambient temperature around
the switchboard and the IP value.
Fixed
Prefabricated connections
Device and Cat. no.
NS630b

25 C
30 C
35 C
IP y 31
IP > 31 IP y 31
IP > 31
IP y 31
630
630
630
630
630
IP > 31
630
40 C
IP y 31
630
IP > 31
630
45 C
IP y 31
630
IP > 31
630
50 C
IP y 31
630
IP > 31
b
800
800
800
800
800
800
800
800
800
800
800
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1250
1250
1250
1250
1250
1250
1250
1200
1250
1150
1200
1600
1550
1600
1500
1550
1450
1500
1400
1450
1350
1400
NS800
NS1000
NS1250
NS1600
3P Cat. no. 04485

4P Cat. no. 04486
3P Cat. no. 04485
4P Cat. no. 04486
3P Cat. no. 04485
4P Cat. no. 04486
3P Cat. no. 04485
4P Cat. no. 04486
3P Cat. no. 04487
4P Cat. no. 04488
Withdrawable
Device and Cat. no.
NS630b
3P Cat. no. 04477

4P Cat. no. 04478
NS800
3P Cat. no. 04477
4P Cat. no. 04478
NS1000 3P Cat. no. 04477
4P Cat. no. 04478
NS1250 3P Cat. no. 04477
4P Cat. no. 04478
NS1600 3P Cat. no. 04491
4P Cat. no. 04492
b connection not possible.

25 C
IP y 31
630
IP > 31
630
30 C
IP y 31
630
IP > 31
630
35 C
IP y 31
630
IP > 31
630
40 C
IP y 31
630
IP > 31
630
45 C
IP y 31
630
IP > 31
630
50 C
IP y 31
630
IP > 31
b
800
800
800
800
800
800
800
800
800
800
800
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1250
1250
1250
1250
1250
1250
1250
1200
1250
1150
1200
1560
1480
1520
1430
1480
1380
1430
1330
1380
1280
1330
Example
For a fixed Compact NS1600, 4P, where the ambient temperature around the
switchboard is 35C and the IP > 31:
The maximum permissible current for the prefabricated connection (04488) is 1450 A.
The values indicated above have been validated for Prisma Plus switchboards.
188

busbars
System P
Characteristics
DD381475
Masterpact NT06 to NT16,

vertically mounted
prefabricated connection between a vertical Masterpact NT06/NT16, fixed or
drawout, and Linergy busbars depending on the ambient temperature around the
switchboard and the IP value.
Fixed
Device and Cat. no.
NT06

25 C
30 C
35 C
IP y 31
IP > 31 IP y 31
IP > 31
IP y 31
630
630
630
630
630
IP > 31
630
40 C
IP y 31
630
IP > 31
630
45 C
IP y 31
630
IP > 31
630
50 C
IP y 31
630
IP > 31
b
800
800
800
800
800
800
800
800
800
800
800
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1250
1250
1250
1250
1250
1250
1250
1200
1250
1150
1200
1600
1570
1600
1520
1570
1470
1520
1420
1470
1370
1420
NT08
NT10
NT12
NT16
3P Cat. no. 04475

4P Cat. no. 04476
3P Cat. no. 04475
4P Cat. no. 04476
3P Cat. no. 04475
4P Cat. no. 04476
3P Cat. no. 04475
4P Cat. no. 04476
3P Cat. no. 04489
4P Cat. no. 04490
Withdrawable
Device and Cat. no.
NT06

25 C
30 C
35 C
IP y 31
IP > 31 IP y 31
IP > 31
IP y 31
630
630
630
630
630
IP > 31
630
40 C
IP y 31
630
IP > 31
630
45 C
IP y 31
630
IP > 31
630
50 C
IP y 31
630
IP > 31
b
800
800
800
800
800
800
800
800
800
800
800
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1250
1250
1250
1250
1250
1250
1250
1200
1250
1150
1200
1560
1480
1520
1430
1480
1380
1430
1330
1380
1280
1330
3P Cat. no. 04477

4P Cat. no. 04478
NT08
3P Cat. no. 04477
4P Cat. no. 04478
NT10
3P Cat. no. 04477
4P Cat. no. 04478
NT12
3P Cat. no. 04477
4P Cat. no. 04478
NT16
3P Cat. no. 04491
4P Cat. no. 04492
Example
For a drawout Masterpact NT16 , 4P, where the ambient temperature around the
switchboard is 35C and the IP > 31:
The maximum permissible current for the prefabricated connection (04492) is 1380 A.
189

busbars
System P
Characteristics
DD381466

horizontally mounted, fixed
prefabricated connection between a horizontal, fixed Compact NS630b/NS1000 and
Linergy busbars depending on the ambient temperature around the switchboard and
the IP value.
Device and Cat. no.
NS630b
3P Cat. no. 04473

4P Cat. no. 04474
NS800
3P Cat. no. 04473
4P Cat. no. 04474
NS1000
3P Cat. no. 04473
4P Cat. no. 04474

25 C
30 C
35 C
IP y 31
IP > 31 IP y 31
IP > 31
IP y 31
630
630
630
630
630
IP > 31
630
40 C
IP y 31
630
IP > 31
630
45 C
IP y 31
630
IP > 31
630
50 C
IP y 31
630
IP > 31
b
800
800
800
800
800
800
800
800
800
800
800
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
190
191

between a device and busbars
Fixed Masterpact NW08 to NW32
Front or rear connection
System P

Fixed, top or bottom connection
DD381793
Characteristics
Connection.
Horizontal link.
Using the data below, it is possible to determine the size of the copper bars and the
maximum permissible currents when making the connections to busbars for a
vertical, fixed Masterpact NW08/NW32, front or rear connection, taking into account
the ambient temperature around the switchboard and the IP value.
Connection
Flat bars, 5 mm thick
Device
NW08
NW10
NW12
NW16
Size per phase

I (A)
Size per phase
I (A)
Size per phase
I (A)
Size per phase
I (A)

25 C
30 C
35 C
IP y 31
IP > 31
IP y 31
IP > 31
IP y 31
1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5
800
800
800
800
800
1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5
1250
1250
1250
1250
1250
2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5
1600
1600
1600
1570
1600
IP > 31
1b 80 x 5
800
1b 80 x 5
1000
2b 80 x 5
1250
2b 80 x 5
1520
40 C
IP y 31
1b 80 x 5
800
1b 80 x 5
1000
2b 80 x 5
1250
2b 80 x 5
1570
IP > 31
1b 80 x 5
800
1b 80 x 5
1000
2b 80 x 5
1250
2b 80 x 5
1470
45 C
IP y 31
1b 80 x 5
800
1b 80 x 5
1000
2b 80 x 5
1250
2b 80 x 5
1520
IP > 31
1b 80 x 5
800
1b 80 x 5
1000
2b 80 x 5
1250
2b 80 x 5
1420
50 C
IP y 31
1b 80 x 5
800
1b 80 x 5
1000
2b 80 x 5
1250
2b 80 x 5
1470
IP > 31
1b 80 x 5
800
1b 80 x 5
1000
2b 80 x 5
1250
2b 80 x 5
1520
40 C
IP y 31
1b 80 x 5
800
1b 80 x 5
1000
2b 80 x 5
1250
2b 80 x 5
1570
IP > 31
1b 80 x 5
800
1b 80 x 5
1000
2b 80 x 5
1250
2b 80 x 5
1470
45 C
IP y 31
1b 80 x 5
800
1b 80 x 5
1000
2b 80 x 5
1250
2b 80 x 5
1520
IP > 31
1b 80 x 5
800
1b 80 x 5
1000
2b 80 x 5
1250
2b 80 x 5
1420
50 C
IP y 31
1b 80 x 5
800
1b 80 x 5
1000
2b 80 x 5
1250
2b 80 x 5
1470
IP > 31
b
b
b
b
Horizontal link
Device
NW08
Size per phase

I (A)
NW10
Size per phase
I (A)
NW12
Size per phase
I (A)
NW16
Size per phase
I (A)

25 C
30 C
35 C
IP y 31
IP > 31
IP y 31
IP > 31
IP y 31
1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5
800
800
800
800
800
1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5
1250
1250
1250
1250
1250
2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5
1600
1600
1600
1570
1600
192
IP > 31
b
b
b
b

System P

DD381792
Characteristics
Connection.
Horizontal link.
Connection
Device
NW08
NW10
NW12
NW16
NW20
NW25
NW32
Size per phase

I (A)
Size per phase
I (A)
Size per phase
I (A)
Size per phase
I (A)
Size per phase
I (A)
Size per phase
I (A)
Size per phase
I (A)

25 C
30 C
35 C
IP y 31
IP > 31
IP y 31
IP > 31
IP y 31
1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10
800
800
800
800
800
1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10
1250
1250
1250
1250
1250
1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10
1600
1600
1600
1570
1600
2b 80 x 10 2b 80 x 10 2b 80 x 10 2b 80 x 10 2b 80 x 10
2000
2000
2000
2000
2000
2b 80 x 10 2b 80 x 10 2b 80 x 10 2b 80 x 10 2b 80 x 10
2500
2500
2500
2500
2500
3b 80 x 10 3b 80 x 10 3b 80 x 10 3b 80 x 10 3b 80 x 10
3200
3110
3200
3020
3200
IP > 31
1b 80 x 10
800
1b 80 x 10
1000
1b 80 x 10
1250
1b 80 x 10
1520
2b 80 x 10
2000
2b 80 x 10
2500
3b 80 x 10
2930
40 C
IP y 31
1b 80 x 10
800
1b 80 x 10
1000
1b 80 x 10
1250
1b 80 x 10
1570
2b 80 x 10
2000
2b 80 x 10
2500
3b 80 x 10
3110
IP > 31
1b 80 x 10
800
1b 80 x 10
1000
1b 80 x 10
1250
1b 80 x 10
1470
2b 80 x 10
1950
2b 80 x 10
2500
3b 80 x 10
2830
45 C
IP y 31
1b 80 x 10
800
1b 80 x 10
1000
1b 80 x 10
1250
1b 80 x 10
1520
2b 80 x 10
2000
2b 80 x 10
2500
3b 80 x 10
3020
IP > 31
1b 80 x 10
800
1b 80 x 10
1000
1b 80 x 10
1250
1b 80 x 10
1420
2b 80 x 10
1900
2b 80 x 10
2450
3b 80 x 10
2730
50 C
IP y 31
1b 80 x 10
800
1b 80 x 10
1000
1b 80 x 10
1250
1b 80 x 10
1470
2b 80 x 10
1950
2b 80 x 10
2500
3b 80 x 10
2930
IP > 31
1b 60 x 10
800
1b 60 x 10
1000
1b 60 x 10
1250
1b 80 x 10
1520
2b 60 x 10
2000
2b 80 x 10
2500
2b 100 x 10
2930
40 C
IP y 31
1b 60 x 10
800
1b 60 x 10
1000
1b 60 x 10
1250
1b 80 x 10
1570
2b 60 x 10
2000
2b 80 x 10
2500
2b 100 x 10
3110
IP > 31
1b 60 x 10
800
1b 60 x 10
1000
1b 60 x 10
1250
1b 80 x 10
1470
2b 60 x 10
1950
2b 80 x 10
2500
2b 100 x 10
2830
45 C
IP y 31
1b 60 x 10
800
1b 60 x 10
1000
1b 60 x 10
1250
1b 80 x 10
1520
2b 60 x 10
2000
2b 80 x 10
2500
2b 100 x 10
3020
IP > 31
1b 60 x 10
800
1b 60 x 10
1000
1b 60 x 10
1250
1b 80 x 10
1420
2b 60 x 10
1900
2b 80 x 10
2450
2b 100 x 10
2730
50 C
IP y 31
1b 60 x 10
800
1b 60 x 10
1000
1b 60 x 10
1250
1b 80 x 10
1470
2b 60 x 10
1950
2b 80 x 10
2500
2b 100 x 10
2930
IP > 31
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
Horizontal link
Device

25 C
IP y 31
NW08 Size per phase 1b 60 x 10
I (A)
800
I (A)
1000
I (A)
1250
I (A)
1600
I (A)
2000
I (A)
2500
I (A)
3200
IP > 31
1b 60 x 10
800
1b 60 x 10
1000
1b 60 x 10
1250
1b 80 x 10
1600
2b 60 x 10
2000
2b 80 x 10
2500
2b 100 x 10
3110
30 C
IP y 31
1b 60 x 10
800
1b 60 x 10
1000
1b 60 x 10
1250
1b 80 x 10
1600
2b 60 x 10
2000
2b 80 x 10
2500
2b 100 x 10
3200
IP > 31
1b 60 x 10
800
1b 60 x 10
1000
1b 60 x 10
1250
1b 80 x 10
1570
2b 60 x 10
2000
2b 80 x 10
2500
2b 100 x 10
3020
35 C
IP y 31
1b 60 x 10
800
1b 60 x 10
1000
1b 60 x 10
1250
1b 80 x 10
1600
2b 60 x 10
2000
2b 80 x 10
2500
2b 100 x 10
3200
IP > 31
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
193

Drawout Masterpact NW08 to NW32
System P
Characteristics
DD381470

Drawout, top or bottom
connection
Connection.
Horizontal link.
vertical, drawout Masterpact NW08/NW32, front or rear connection, taking into
account the ambient temperature around the switchboard and the IP value.
Connection
Device
NW08
NW10
NW12
NW16
Size per phase

I (A)
Size per phase
I (A)
Size per phase
I (A)
Size per phase
I (A)

25 C
30 C
35 C
IP y 31
IP > 31 IP y 31
IP > 31
IP y 31
1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5
800
800
800
800
800
1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5
1250
1250
1250
1250
1250
2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5
1560
1480
1520
1430
1480
IP > 31
1b 80 x 5
800
1b 80 x 5
1000
2b 80 x 5
1230
2b 80 x 5
1380
40 C
IP y 31
1b 80 x 5
800
1b 80 x 5
1000
2b 80 x 5
1250
2b 80 x 5
1430
IP > 31
1b 80 x 5
800
1b 80 x 5
1000
2b 80 x 5
1200
2b 80 x 5
1330
45 C
IP y 31
1b 80 x 5
800
1b 80 x 5
1000
2b 80 x 5
1230
2b 80 x 5
1380
IP > 31
1b 80 x 5
800
1b 80 x 5
1000
2b 80 x 5
1160
2b 80 x 5
1280
50 C
IP y 31
1b 80 x 5
800
1b 80 x 5
1000
2b 80 x 5
1200
2b 80 x 5
1330
40 C
IP y 31
1b 80 x 5
800
1b 80 x 5
1000
2b 80 x 5
1250
2b 80 x 5
1430
IP > 31
1b 80 x 5
800
1b 80 x 5
1000
2b 80 x 5
1200
2b 80 x 5
1330
45 C
IP y 31
1b 80 x 5
800
1b 80 x 5
1000
2b 80 x 5
1230
2b 80 x 5
1380
IP > 31
1b 80 x 5
800
1b 80 x 5
1000
2b 80 x 5
1160
2b 80 x 5
1280
50 C
IP y 31
1b 80 x 5
800
1b 80 x 5
1000
2b 80 x 5
1200
2b 80 x 5
1330
IP > 31
b
b
b
b
Horizontal link
Device
NW08
Size per phase

I (A)
NW10
Size per phase
I (A)
NW12
Size per phase
I (A)
NW16
Size per phase
I (A)

25 C
IP y 31
1b 80 x 5
800
1b 80 x 5
1000
2b 80 x 5
1250
2b 80 x 5
1560
IP > 31
1b 80 x 5
800
1b 80 x 5
1000
2b 80 x 5
1250
2b 80 x 5
1480
30 C
IP y 31
1b 80 x 5
800
1b 80 x 5
1000
2b 80 x 5
1250
2b 80 x 5
1520
IP > 31
1b 80 x 5
800
1b 80 x 5
1000
2b 80 x 5
1250
2b 80 x 5
1430
35 C
IP y 31
1b 80 x 5
800
1b 80 x 5
1000
2b 80 x 5
1250
2b 80 x 5
1480
IP > 31
1b 80 x 5
800
1b 80 x 5
1000
2b 80 x 5
1230
2b 80 x 5
1380
194
IP > 31
b
b
b
b

System P

connection
DD381469
Characteristics
Connection.
Horizontal link.
Connection
Device
NW08
NW10
NW12
NW16
NW20
NW25
NW32
Size per phase

I (A)
Size per phase
I (A)
Size per phase
I (A)
Size per phase
I (A)
Size per phase
I (A)
Size per phase
I (A)
Size per phase
I (A)

25 C
30 C
35 C
IP y 31
IP > 31
IP y 31
IP > 31
IP y 31
1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10
800
800
800
800
800
1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10
1250
1250
1250
1210
1250
1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10
1560
1480
1520
1430
1480
2b 80 x 10 2b 80 x 10 2b 80 x 10 2b 80 x 10 2b 80 x 10
2000
2000
2000
1950
2000
2b 80 x 10 2b 80 x 10 2b 80 x 10 2b 80 x 10 2b 80 x 10
2500
2380
2500
2310
2450
3b 80 x 10 3b 80 x 10 3b 80 x 10 3b 80 x 10 3b 80 x 10
3140
2930
3070
2830
3000
IP > 31
1b 80 x 10
800
1b 80 x 10
1000
1b 80 x 10
1180
1b 80 x 10
1380
2b 80 x 10
1900
2b 80 x 10
2240
3b 80 x 10
2730
40 C
IP y 31
1b 80 x 10
800
1b 80 x 10
1000
1b 80 x 10
1210
1b 80 x 10
1430
2b 80 x 10
1950
2b 80 x 10
2380
3b 80 x 10
2930
IP > 31
1b 80 x 10
800
1b 80 x 10
1000
1b 80 x 10
1140
1b 80 x 10
1330
2b 80 x 10
1830
2b 80 x 10
2170
3b 80 x 10
2650
45 C
IP y 31
1b 80 x 10
800
1b 80 x 10
1000
1b 80 x 10
1180
1b 80 x 10
1380
2b 80 x 10
1900
2b 80 x 10
2310
3b 80 x 10
2830
IP > 31
1b 80 x 10
800
1b 80 x 10
1000
1b 80 x 10
1100
1b 80 x 10
1280
2b 80 x 10
1760
2b 80 x 10
2100
3b 80 x 10
2550
50 C
IP y 31
1b 80 x 10
800
1b 80 x 10
1000
1b 80 x 10
1140
1b 80 x 10
1330
2b 80 x 10
1830
2b 80 x 10
2240
3b 80 x 10
2730
IP > 31
1b 60 x 10
800
1b 60 x 10
1000
1b 60 x 10
1180
1b 80 x 10
1380
2b 60 x 10
1900
2b 80 x 10
2240
2b 100 x 10
2730
40 C
IP y 31
1b 60 x 10
800
1b 60 x 10
1000
1b 60 x 10
1210
1b 80 x 10
1430
2b 60 x 10
1950
2b 80 x 10
2380
2b 100 x 10
2930
IP > 31
1b 60 x 10
800
1b 60 x 10
1000
1b 60 x 10
1140
1b 80 x 10
1330
2b 60 x 10
1830
2b 80 x 10
2170
2b 100 x 10
2650
45 C
IP y 31
1b 60 x 10
800
1b 60 x 10
1000
1b 60 x 10
1180
1b 80 x 10
1380
2b 60 x 10
1900
2b 80 x 10
2310
2b 100 x 10
2830
IP > 31
1b 60 x 10
800
1b 60 x 10
1000
1b 60 x 10
1100
1b 80 x 10
1280
2b 60 x 10
1760
2b 80 x 10
2100
2b 100 x 10
2550
50 C
IP y 31
1b 60 x 10
800
1b 60 x 10
1000
1b 60 x 10
1140
1b 80 x 10
1330
2b 60 x 10
1830
2b 80 x 10
2240
2b 100 x 10
2730
IP > 31
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
Horizontal link
Device

25 C
30 C
35 C
IP y 31
IP > 31
IP y 31
IP > 31
IP y 31
NW08 Size per phase 1b 60 x 10 1b 60 x 10 1b 60 x 10 1b 60 x 10 1b 60 x 10
I (A)
800
800
800
800
800
I (A)
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
I (A)
1250
1250
1250
1210
1250
I (A)
1560
1480
1520
1430
1480
I (A)
2000
2000
2000
1950
2000
I (A)
2500
2380
2500
2310
2450
I (A)
3140
2930
3070
2830
3000
IP > 31
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
195

Masterpact circuit breakers
Fixed NT06 to NT16
System P

Fixed
DD381467
Characteristics
G
FE
Connection.
Horizontal link.
vertical, fixed Masterpact NT06/NT16, taking into account the ambient temperature
around the switchboard and the IP value.
Connection
Device

25 C
30 C
35 C
IP y 31
IP > 31 IP y 31
IP > 31
IP y 31
NT06
Size per phase
1b 50 x 5 1b 50 x 5 1b 50 x 5 1b 50 x 5 1b 50 x 5
I (A)
630
630
630
630
630
NT08
Size per phase
2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5
I (A)
800
800
800
800
800
NT10
Size per phase
2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5
I (A)
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
NT12
Size per phase
3b 50 x 5 3b 50 x 5 3b 50 x 5 3b 50 x 5 3b 50 x 5
I (A)
1250
1250
1250
1250
1250
NT16 (1)
Size per phase
4b 50 x 5 4b 50 x 5 4b 50 x 5 4b 50 x 5 4b 50 x 5
I (A)
1600
1570
1600
1520
1570
(1) Make the neutral connection with two bars, 50 x 5 mm.
IP > 31
1b 50 x 5
630
2b 50 x 5
800
2b 50 x 5
1000
3b 50 x 5
1250
4b 50 x 5
1470
40 C
IP y 31
1b 50 x 5
630
2b 50 x 5
800
2b 50 x 5
1000
3b 50 x 5
1250
4b 50 x 5
1520
IP > 31
1b 50 x 5
630
2b 50 x 5
800
2b 50 x 5
1000
3b 50 x 5
1250
4b 50 x 5
1420
45 C
IP y 31
1b 50 x 5
630
2b 50 x 5
800
2b 50 x 5
1000
3b 50 x 5
1250
4b 50 x 5
1470
IP > 31
1b 50 x 5
630
2b 50 x 5
800
2b 50 x 5
1000
3b 50 x 5
1200
4b 50 x 5
1370
50 C
IP y 31
1b 50 x 5
630
2b 50 x 5
800
2b 50 x 5
1000
3b 50 x 5
1250
4b 50 x 5
1420
IP > 31
1b 60 x 5
630
1b 80 x 5
800
2b 50 x 5
1000
2b 60 x 5
1250
2b 80 x 5
1470
40 C
IP y 31
1b 60 x 5
630
1b 80 x 5
800
2b 50 x 5
1000
2b 60 x 5
1250
2b 80 x 5
1520
IP > 31
1b 60 x 5
630
1b 80 x 5
800
2b 50 x 5
1000
2b 60 x 5
1250
2b 80 x 5
1420
45 C
IP y 31
1b 60 x 5
630
1b 80 x 5
800
2b 50 x 5
1000
2b 60 x 5
1250
2b 80 x 5
1470
IP > 31
1b 60 x 5
630
1b 80 x 5
800
2b 50 x 5
1000
2b 60 x 5
1200
2b 80 x 5
1370
50 C
IP y 31
1b 60 x 5
630
1b 80 x 5
800
2b 50 x 5
1000
2b 60 x 5
1250
2b 80 x 5
1420
IP > 31
b
b
b
b
b
Horizontal link
Device
NT06
Size per phase

I (A)
NT08
Size per phase
I (A)
NT10
Size per phase
I (A)
NT12
Size per phase
I (A)
NT16
Size per phase
I (A)

25 C
30 C
35 C
IP y 31
IP > 31 IP y 31
IP > 31
IP y 31
1b 60 x 5 1b 60 x 5 1b 60 x 5 1b 60 x 5 1b 60 x 5
630
630
630
630
630
1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5
800
800
800
800
800
2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
2b 60 x 5 2b 60 x 5 2b 60 x 5 2b 60 x 5 2b 60 x 5
1250
1250
1250
1250
1250
2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5
1600
1570
1600
1520
1570
196
IP > 31
b
b
b
b
b
System P
Characteristics

Fixed NT06 to NT16
Connection
Device

25 C
30 C
35 C
IP y 31
IP > 31
IP y 31
IP > 31
IP y 31
NT06
Size per phase 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10
I (A)
630
630
630
630
630
NT08
I (A)
800
800
800
800
800
NT10
I (A)
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
NT12
I (A)
1250
1250
1250
1250
1250
NT16 (1) Size per phase 2b 50 x 10 2b 50 x 10 2b 50 x 10 2b 50 x 10 2b 50 x 10
I (A)
1600
1570
1600
1520
1570
(1) Make the neutral connection with one bar, 50 x 10 mm.
IP > 31
1b 50 x 10
630
1b 50 x 10
800
1b 50 x 10
1000
1b 50 x 10
1250
2b 50 x 10
1470
40 C
IP y 31
1b 50 x 10
630
1b 50 x 10
800
1b 50 x 10
1000
1b 50 x 10
1250
2b 50 x 10
1520
IP > 31
1b 50 x 10
630
1b 50 x 10
800
1b 50 x 10
1000
1b 50 x 10
1250
2b 50 x 10
1420
45 C
IP y 31
1b 50 x 10
630
1b 50 x 10
800
1b 50 x 10
1000
1b 50 x 10
1250
2b 50 x 10
1470
IP > 31
1b 50 x 10
630
1b 50 x 10
800
1b 50 x 10
1000
1b 50 x 10
1180
2b 50 x 10
1370
50 C
IP y 31
1b 50 x 10
630
1b 50 x 10
800
1b 50 x 10
1000
1b 50 x 10
1230
2b 50 x 10
1420
IP > 31
1b 50 x 10
630
1b 50 x 10
800
1b 50 x 10
1000
1b 60 x 10
1250
1b 80 x 10
1470
40 C
IP y 31
1b 50 x 10
630
1b 50 x 10
800
1b 50 x 10
1000
1b 60 x 10
1250
1b 80 x 10
1520
IP > 31
1b 50 x 10
630
1b 50 x 10
800
1b 50 x 10
1000
1b 60 x 10
1250
1b 80 x 10
1420
45 C
IP y 31
1b 50 x 10
630
1b 50 x 10
800
1b 50 x 10
1000
1b 60 x 10
1250
1b 80 x 10
1470
IP > 31
1b 50 x 10
630
1b 50 x 10
800
1b 50 x 10
1000
1b 60 x 10
1180
1b 80 x 10
1370
50 C
IP y 31
1b 50 x 10
630
1b 50 x 10
800
1b 50 x 10
1000
1b 60 x 10
1230
1b 80 x 10
1420
IP > 31
b
b
b
b
b
Horizontal link
Device
NT06
Copper bars, 5 mm thick.

Size per phase

I (A)
NT08
Size per phase
I (A)
NT10
Size per phase
I (A)
NT12
Size per phase
I (A)
NT16
Size per phase
I (A)
25 C
IP y 31
1b 50 x 10
630
1b 50 x 10
800
1b 50 x 10
1000
1b 60 x 10
1250
1b 80 x 10
1600
IP > 31
1b 50 x 10
630
1b 50 x 10
800
1b 50 x 10
1000
1b 60 x 10
1250
1b 80 x 10
1570
30 C
IP y 31
1b 50 x 10
630
1b 50 x 10
800
1b 50 x 10
1000
1b 60 x 10
1250
1b 80 x 10
1600
IP > 31
1b 50 x 10
630
1b 50 x 10
800
1b 50 x 10
1000
1b 60 x 10
1250
1b 80 x 10
1520
35 C
IP y 31
1b 50 x 10
630
1b 50 x 10
800
1b 50 x 10
1000
1b 60 x 10
1250
1b 80 x 10
1570
IP > 31
b
b
b
b
b
197

Drawout NT06 to NT16
System P

Drawout
DD381465
Characteristics
Connection.
Horizontal link.
vertical, drawout Masterpact NT06/NT16, taking into account the ambient
temperature around the switchboard and the IP value.
Connection
Device

25 C
30 C
35 C
IP y 31
IP > 31 IP y 31
IP > 31
IP y 31
NT06
Size per phase
1b 50 x 5 1b 50 x 5 1b 50 x 5 1b 50 x 5 1b 50 x 5
I (A)
630
630
630
630
630
NT08
Size per phase
2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5
I (A)
800
800
800
800
800
NT10
Size per phase
2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5
I (A)
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
NT12
Size per phase
3b 50 x 5 3b 50 x 5 3b 50 x 5 3b 50 x 5 3b 50 x 5
I (A)
1250
1250
1250
1250
1250
NT16 (1)
Size per phase
4b 50 x 5 4b 50 x 5 4b 50 x 5 4b 50 x 5 4b 50 x 5
I (A)
1560
1430
1520
1430
1480
IP > 31
1b 50 x 5
630
2b 50 x 5
800
2b 50 x 5
1000
3b 50 x 5
1230
4b 50 x 5
1380
40 C
IP y 31
1b 50 x 5
630
2b 50 x 5
800
2b 50 x 5
1000
3b 50 x 5
1250
4b 50 x 5
1430
IP > 31
1b 50 x 5
630
2b 50 x 5
800
2b 50 x 5
1000
3b 50 x 5
1180
4b 50 x 5
1330
45 C
IP y 31
1b 50 x 5
630
2b 50 x 5
800
2b 50 x 5
1000
3b 50 x 5
1230
4b 50 x 5
1380
IP > 31
1b 50 x 5
630
2b 50 x 5
800
2b 50 x 5
960
3b 50 x 5
1130
4b 50 x 5
1280
50 C
IP y 31
1b 50 x 5
630
2b 50 x 5
800
2b 50 x 5
1000
3b 50 x 5
1180
4b 50 x 5
1330
IP > 31
1b 60 x 5
630
1b 80 x 5
800
2b 50 x 5
1000
2b 60 x 5
1230
2b 80 x 5
1380
40 C
IP y 31
1b 60 x 5
630
1b 80 x 5
800
2b 50 x 5
1000
2b 60 x 5
1250
2b 80 x 5
1430
IP > 31
1b 60 x 5
630
1b 80 x 5
800
2b 50 x 5
1000
2b 60 x 5
1180
2b 80 x 5
1330
45 C
IP y 31
1b 60 x 5
630
1b 80 x 5
800
2b 50 x 5
1000
2b 60 x 5
1230
2b 80 x 5
1380
IP > 31
1b 60 x 5
630
1b 80 x 5
800
2b 50 x 5
960
2b 60 x 5
1130
2b 80 x 5
1280
50 C
IP y 31
1b 60 x 5
630
1b 80 x 5
800
2b 50 x 5
1000
2b 60 x 5
1180
2b 80 x 5
1330
IP > 31
b
b
b
b
b
Horizontal link
Device
NT06
Size per phase

I (A)
NT08
Size per phase
I (A)
NT10
Size per phase
I (A)
NT12
Size per phase
I (A)
NT16
Size per phase
I (A)
198

25 C
30 C
35 C
IP y 31
IP > 31 IP y 31
IP > 31
IP y 31
1b 60 x 5 1b 60 x 5 1b 60 x 5 1b 60 x 5 1b 60 x 5
630
630
630
630
630
1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5
800
800
800
800
800
2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
2b 60 x 5 2b 60 x 5 2b 60 x 5 2b 60 x 5 2b 60 x 5
1250
1250
1250
1250
1250
2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5
1560
1430
1520
1430
1480
IP > 31
b
b
b
b
b
System P
Characteristics

Drawout NT06 to NT16
Connection
Device

25 C
30 C
35 C
IP y 31
IP > 31
IP y 31
IP > 31
IP y 31
NT06
I (A)
630
630
630
630
630
NT08
I (A)
800
800
800
800
800
NT10
I (A)
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
NT12
I (A)
1250
1250
1250
1250
1250
NT16 (1) Size per phase 2b 50 x 10 2b 50 x 10 2b 50 x 10 2b 50 x 10 2b 50 x 10
I (A)
1560
1430
1520
1430
1480
IP > 31
1b 50 x 10
630
1b 50 x 10
800
1b 50 x 10
1000
1b 50 x 10
1210
2b 50 x 10
1380
40 C
IP y 31
1b 50 x 10
630
1b 50 x 10
800
1b 50 x 10
1000
1b 50 x 10
1250
2b 50 x 10
1430
IP > 31
1b 50 x 10
630
1b 50 x 10
800
1b 50 x 10
1000
1b 50 x 10
1160
2b 50 x 10
1330
45 C
IP y 31
1b 50 x 10
630
1b 50 x 10
800
1b 50 x 10
1000
1b 50 x 10
1210
2b 50 x 10
1380
IP > 31
1b 50 x 10
630
1b 50 x 10
800
1b 50 x 10
960
1b 50 x 10
1110
2b 50 x 10
1280
50 C
IP y 31
1b 50 x 10
630
1b 50 x 10
800
1b 50 x 10
1000
1b 50 x 10
1160
2b 50 x 10
1330
IP > 31
1b 50 x 10
630
1b 50 x 10
800
1b 50 x 10
1000
1b 60 x 10
1210
1b 80 x 10
1380
40 C
IP y 31
1b 50 x 10
630
1b 50 x 10
800
1b 50 x 10
1000
1b 60 x 10
1250
1b 80 x 10
1430
IP > 31
1b 50 x 10
630
1b 50 x 10
800
1b 50 x 10
1000
1b 60 x 10
1160
1b 80 x 10
1330
45 C
IP y 31
1b 50 x 10
630
1b 50 x 10
800
1b 50 x 10
1000
1b 60 x 10
1210
1b 80 x 10
1380
IP > 31
1b 50 x 10
630
1b 50 x 10
800
1b 50 x 10
960
1b 60 x 10
1110
1b 80 x 10
1280
50 C
IP y 31
1b 50 x 10
630
1b 50 x 10
800
1b 50 x 10
1000
1b 60 x 10
1160
1b 80 x 10
1330
IP > 31
b
b
b
b
b
Horizontal link
Device
NT06
Size per phase

I (A)
NT08
Size per phase
I (A)
NT10
Size per phase
I (A)
NT12
Size per phase
I (A)
NT16
Size per phase
I (A)

25 C
IP y 31
1b 50 x 10
630
1b 50 x 10
800
1b 50 x 10
1000
1b 60 x 10
1250
1b 80 x 10
1560
IP > 31
1b 50 x 10
630
1b 50 x 10
800
1b 50 x 10
1000
1b 60 x 10
1250
1b 80 x 10
1430
30 C
IP y 31
1b 50 x 10
630
1b 50 x 10
800
1b 50 x 10
1000
1b 60 x 10
1250
1b 80 x 10
1520
IP > 31
1b 50 x 10
630
1b 50 x 10
800
1b 50 x 10
1000
1b 60 x 10
1250
1b 80 x 10
1430
35 C
IP y 31
1b 50 x 10
630
1b 50 x 10
800
1b 50 x 10
1000
1b 60 x 10
1250
1b 80 x 10
1480
IP > 31
b
b
b
b
b
199

Compact circuit breakers
Fixed NS630b to NS1600
System P

Fixed
DD381464
Characteristics
Connection.
Horizontal link.
vertical, fixed Compact NS630b/NS1600, taking into account the ambient
Connection
Device

25 C
30 C
35 C
IP y 31
IP > 31 IP y 31
IP > 31
IP y 31
NS630b
Size per phase
1b 50 x 5 1b 50 x 5 1b 50 x 5 1b 50 x 5 1b 50 x 5
I (A)
630
630
630
630
630
NS800
Size per phase
2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5
I (A)
800
800
800
800
800
NS1000
Size per phase
2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5
I (A)
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
NS1250
Size per phase
3b 50 x 5 3b 50 x 5 3b 50 x 5 3b 50 x 5 3b 50 x 5
I (A)
1250
1250
1250
1250
1250
NS1600 (1) Size per phase
4b 50 x 5 4b 50 x 5 4b 50 x 5 4b 50 x 5 4b 50 x 5
I (A)
1600
1550
1600
1500
1550
IP > 31
1b 50 x 5
630
2b 50 x 5
800
2b 50 x 5
1000
3b 50 x 5
1250
4b 50 x 5
1450
40 C
IP y 31
1b 50 x 5
630
2b 50 x 5
800
2b 50 x 5
1000
3b 50 x 5
1250
4b 50 x 5
1500
IP > 31
1b 50 x 5
630
2b 50 x 5
800
2b 50 x 5
1000
3b 50 x 5
1200
4b 50 x 5
1400
45 C
IP y 31
1b 50 x 5
630
2b 50 x 5
800
2b 50 x 5
1000
3b 50 x 5
1250
4b 50 x 5
1450
IP > 31
1b 50 x 5
630
2b 50 x 5
800
2b 50 x 5
970
3b 50 x 5
1150
4b 50 x 5
1350
50 C
IP y 31
1b 50 x 5
630
2b 50 x 5
800
2b 50 x 5
1000
3b 50 x 5
1200
4b 50 x 5
1400
IP > 31
1b 60 x 5
630
1b 80 x 5
800
2b 50 x 5
1000
2b 60 x 5
1250
2b 80 x 5
1450
40 C
IP y 31
1b 60 x 5
630
1b 80 x 5
800
2b 50 x 5
1000
2b 60 x 5
1250
2b 80 x 5
1500
IP > 31
1b 60 x 5
630
1b 80 x 5
800
2b 50 x 5
1000
2b 60 x 5
1200
2b 80 x 5
1400
45 C
IP y 31
1b 60 x 5
630
1b 80 x 5
800
2b 50 x 5
1000
2b 60 x 5
1250
2b 80 x 5
1450
IP > 31
1b 60 x 5
630
1b 80 x 5
800
2b 50 x 5
970
2b 60 x 5
1150
2b 80 x 5
1350
50 C
IP y 31
1b 60 x 5
630
1b 80 x 5
800
2b 50 x 5
1000
2b 60 x 5
1200
2b 80 x 5
1400
IP > 31
b
b
b
b
b
Horizontal link
Device
NS630b
Size per phase

I (A)
NS800
Size per phase
I (A)
NS1000
Size per phase
I (A)
NS1250
Size per phase
I (A)
NS1600
Size per phase
I (A)
200

25 C
30 C
35 C
IP y 31
IP > 31 IP y 31
IP > 31
IP y 31
1b 60 x 5 1b 60 x 5 1b 60 x 5 1b 60 x 5 1b 60 x 5
630
630
630
630
630
1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5
800
800
800
800
800
2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
2b 60 x 5 2b 60 x 5 2b 60 x 5 2b 60 x 5 2b 60 x 5
1250
1250
1250
1250
1250
2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5
1600
1550
1600
1500
1550
IP > 31
b
b
b
b
b
System P
Characteristics

Fixed NS630b to NS1600
Connection
Device

25 C
30 C
35 C
IP y 31
IP > 31
IP y 31
IP > 31
IP y 31
NS630b Size per phase 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10
I (A)
630
630
630
630
630
NS800 Size per phase 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10
I (A)
800
800
800
800
800
I (A)
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
I (A)
1250
1250
1250
1250
1250
(1)
I (A)
1600
1550
1600
1500
1550
IP > 31
1b 50 x 10
630
1b 50 x 10
800
1b 50 x 10
1000
1b 50 x 10
1250
2b 50 x 10
1450
40 C
IP y 31
1b 50 x 10
630
1b 50 x 10
800
1b 50 x 10
1000
1b 50 x 10
1250
2b 50 x 10
1500
IP > 31
1b 50 x 10
630
1b 50 x 10
800
1b 50 x 10
1000
1b 50 x 10
1180
2b 50 x 10
1400
45 C
IP y 31
1b 50 x 10
630
1b 50 x 10
800
1b 50 x 10
1000
1b 50 x 10
1230
2b 50 x 10
1450
IP > 31
1b 50 x 10
630
1b 50 x 10
800
1b 50 x 10
970
1b 50 x 10
1130
2b 50 x 10
1350
50 C
IP y 31
1b 50 x 10
630
1b 50 x 10
800
1b 50 x 10
1000
1b 50 x 10
1180
2b 50 x 10
1400
IP > 31
1b 50 x 10
630
1b 50 x 10
800
1b 50 x 10
1000
1b 60 x 10
1250
1b 80 x 10
1450
40 C
IP y 31
1b 50 x 10
630
1b 50 x 10
800
1b 50 x 10
1000
1b 60 x 10
1250
1b 80 x 10
1500
IP > 31
1b 50 x 10
630
1b 50 x 10
800
1b 50 x 10
1000
1b 60 x 10
1180
1b 80 x 10
1400
45 C
IP y 31
1b 50 x 10
630
1b 50 x 10
800
1b 50 x 10
1000
1b 60 x 10
1230
1b 80 x 10
1450
IP > 31
1b 50 x 10
630
1b 50 x 10
800
1b 50 x 10
970
1b 60 x 10
1130
1b 80 x 10
1350
50 C
IP y 31
1b 50 x 10
630
1b 50 x 10
800
1b 50 x 10
1000
1b 60 x 10
1180
1b 80 x 10
1400
IP > 31
b
b
b
b
b
Horizontal link
Device
NS630b Size per phase

I (A)
NS800 Size per phase
I (A)
I (A)
I (A)
I (A)

25 C
IP y 31
1b 50 x 10
630
1b 50 x 10
800
1b 50 x 10
1000
1b 60 x 10
1250
1b 80 x 10
1600
IP > 31
1b 50 x 10
630
1b 50 x 10
800
1b 50 x 10
1000
1b 60 x 10
1250
1b 80 x 10
1550
30 C
IP y 31
1b 50 x 10
630
1b 50 x 10
800
1b 50 x 10
1000
1b 60 x 10
1250
1b 80 x 10
1600
IP > 31
1b 50 x 10
630
1b 50 x 10
800
1b 50 x 10
1000
1b 60 x 10
1250
1b 80 x 10
1500
35 C
IP y 31
1b 50 x 10
630
1b 50 x 10
800
1b 50 x 10
1000
1b 60 x 10
1250
1b 80 x 10
1550
IP > 31
b
b
b
b
b
201

Withdrawable NS630b to NS1600
System P

Withdrawable
DD381465
Characteristics
Connection.
Horizontal link.
vertical, withdrawable Compact NS630b/NS1600, taking into account the ambient
Connection
Device

25 C
30 C
35 C
IP y 31
IP > 31 IP y 31
IP > 31
IP y 31
NS630b
Size per phase
1b 50 x 5 1b 50 x 5 1b 50 x 5 1b 50 x 5 1b 50 x 5
I (A)
630
630
630
630
630
NS800
Size per phase
2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5
I (A)
800
800
800
800
800
NS1000
Size per phase
2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5
I (A)
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
NS1250
Size per phase
3b 50 x 5 3b 50 x 5 3b 50 x 5 3b 50 x 5 3b 50 x 5
I (A)
1250
1250
1250
1250
1250
NS1600 (1) Size per phase
4b 50 x 5 4b 50 x 5 4b 50 x 5 4b 50 x 5 4b 50 x 5
I (A)
1560
1430
1520
1430
1480
IP > 31
1b 50 x 5
630
2b 50 x 5
800
2b 50 x 5
1000
3b 50 x 5
1230
4b 50 x 5
1380
40 C
IP y 31
1b 50 x 5
630
2b 50 x 5
800
2b 50 x 5
1000
3b 50 x 5
1250
4b 50 x 5
1430
IP > 31
1b 50 x 5
630
2b 50 x 5
800
2b 50 x 5
1000
3b 50 x 5
1180
4b 50 x 5
1330
45 C
IP y 31
1b 50 x 5
630
2b 50 x 5
800
2b 50 x 5
1000
3b 50 x 5
1230
4b 50 x 5
1380
IP > 31
1b 50 x 5
630
2b 50 x 5
800
2b 50 x 5
960
3b 50 x 5
1130
4b 50 x 5
1280
50 C
IP y 31
1b 50 x 5
630
2b 50 x 5
800
2b 50 x 5
1000
3b 50 x 5
1180
4b 50 x 5
1330
IP > 31
1b 60 x 5
630
1b 80 x 5
800
2b 50 x 5
1000
2b 60 x 5
1230
2b 80 x 5
1380
40 C
IP y 31
1b 60 x 5
630
1b 80 x 5
800
2b 50 x 5
1000
2b 60 x 5
1250
2b 80 x 5
1430
IP > 31
1b 60 x 5
630
1b 80 x 5
800
2b 50 x 5
1000
2b 60 x 5
1180
2b 80 x 5
1330
45 C
IP y 31
1b 60 x 5
630
1b 80 x 5
800
2b 50 x 5
1000
2b 60 x 5
1230
2b 80 x 5
1380
IP > 31
1b 60 x 5
630
1b 80 x 5
800
2b 50 x 5
960
2b 60 x 5
1130
2b 80 x 5
1280
50 C
IP y 31
1b 60 x 5
630
1b 80 x 5
800
2b 50 x 5
1000
2b 60 x 5
1180
2b 80 x 5
1330
IP > 31
b
b
b
b
b
Horizontal link
Device
NS630b
Size per phase

I (A)
NS800
Size per phase
I (A)
NS1000
Size per phase
I (A)
NS1250
Size per phase
I (A)
NS1600
Size per phase
I (A)
202

25 C
30 C
35 C
IP y 31
IP > 31 IP y 31
IP > 31
IP y 31
1b 60 x 5 1b 60 x 5 1b 60 x 5 1b 60 x 5 1b 60 x 5
630
630
630
630
630
1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5
800
800
800
800
800
2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
2b 60 x 5 2b 60 x 5 2b 60 x 5 2b 60 x 5 2b 60 x 5
1250
1250
1250
1250
1250
2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5
1560
1430
1520
1430
1480
IP > 31
b
b
b
b
b
System P
Characteristics

Withdrawable NS630b to NS1600
Connection
Device

25 C
30 C
35 C
IP y 31
IP > 31
IP y 31
IP > 31
IP y 31
I (A)
630
630
630
630
630
I (A)
800
800
800
800
800
I (A)
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
I (A)
1250
1250
1250
1250
1250
(1)
I (A)
1560
1430
1520
1430
1480
IP > 31
1b 50 x 10
630
1b 50 x 10
800
1b 50 x 10
1000
1b 50 x 10
1210
2b 50 x 10
1380
40 C
IP y 31
1b 50 x 10
630
1b 50 x 10
800
1b 50 x 10
1000
1b 50 x 10
1250
2b 50 x 10
1430
IP > 31
1b 50 x 10
630
1b 50 x 10
800
1b 50 x 10
1000
1b 50 x 10
1160
2b 50 x 10
1330
45 C
IP y 31
1b 50 x 10
630
1b 50 x 10
800
1b 50 x 10
1000
1b 50 x 10
1210
2b 50 x 10
1380
IP > 31
1b 50 x 10
630
1b 50 x 10
800
1b 50 x 10
960
1b 50 x 10
1110
2b 50 x 10
1280
50 C
IP y 31
1b 50 x 10
630
1b 50 x 10
800
1b 50 x 10
1000
1b 50 x 10
1160
2b 50 x 10
1330
IP > 31
1b 50 x 10
630
1b 50 x 10
800
1b 50 x 10
1000
1b 60 x 10
1210
1b 80 x 10
1380
40 C
IP y 31
1b 50 x 10
630
1b 50 x 10
800
1b 50 x 10
1000
1b 60 x 10
1250
1b 80 x 10
1430
IP > 31
1b 50 x 10
630
1b 50 x 10
800
1b 50 x 10
1000
1b 60 x 10
1160
1b 80 x 10
1330
45 C
IP y 31
1b 50 x 10
630
1b 50 x 10
800
1b 50 x 10
1000
1b 60 x 10
1210
1b 80 x 10
1380
IP > 31
1b 50 x 10
630
1b 50 x 10
800
1b 50 x 10
970
1b 60 x 10
1110
1b 80 x 10
1280
50 C
IP y 31
1b 50 x 10
630
1b 50 x 10
800
1b 50 x 10
1000
1b 60 x 10
1160
1b 80 x 10
1330
IP > 31
b
b
b
b
b
Horizontal link
Device

I (A)
I (A)
I (A)
I (A)
I (A)

25 C
30 C
35 C
IP y 31
IP > 31
IP y 31
IP > 31
IP y 31
1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10
630
630
630
630
630
1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10
800
800
800
800
800
1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1b 60 x 10 1b 60 x 10 1b 60 x 10 1b 60 x 10 1b 60 x 10
1250
1250
1250
1250
1250
1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10
1560
1430
1520
1430
1480
IP > 31
b
b
b
b
b
203

Horizontal, fixed NS630b to NS1600
System P

Horizontal, fixed
DD381466
Characteristics
horizontal, fixed Compact NS630b/NS1600, taking into account the ambient

Device

I (A)
I (A)
I (A)
I (A)
I (A)

25 C
30 C
35 C
IP y 31
IP > 31
IP y 31
IP > 31
IP y 31
2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5
630
630
630
630
630
2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5
800
800
800
800
800
2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
3b 50 x 5 3b 50 x 5 3b 50 x 5 3b 50 x 5 3b 50 x 5
1250
1250
1250
1250
1250
4b 50 x 5 4b 50 x 5 4b 50 x 5 4b 50 x 5 4b 50 x 5
1600
1510
1560
1470
1510
IP > 31
2b 50 x 5
630
2b 50 x 5
800
2b 50 x 5
1000
3b 50 x 5
1170
4b 50 x 5
1420
40 C
IP y 31
2b 50 x 5
630
2b 50 x 5
800
2b 50 x 5
1000
3b 50 x 5
1250
4b 50 x 5
1470
IP > 31
2b 50 x 5
630
2b 50 x 5
800
2b 50 x 5
1000
3b 50 x 5
1090
4b 50 x 5
1360
45 C
IP y 31
2b 50 x 5
630
2b 50 x 5
800
2b 50 x 5
1000
3b 50 x 5
1170
4b 50 x 5
1420
1b 50 x 10
630
1b 50 x 10
800
1b 50 x 10
1000
2b 50 x 10
1170
2b 50 x 10
1420
40 C
1b 50 x 10
630
1b 50 x 10
800
1b 50 x 10
1000
2b 50 x 10
1250
2b 50 x 10
1470
1b 50 x 10
630
1b 50 x 10
800
1b 50 x 10
1000
2b 50 x 10
1090
2b 50 x 10
1360
45 C
1b 50 x 10
630
1b 50 x 10
800
1b 50 x 10
1000
2b 50 x 10
1170
2b 50 x 10
1420
IP > 31
2b 50 x 5
630
2b 50 x 5
800
2b 50 x 5
1000
b
b
50 C
IP y 31
2b 50 x 5
630
2b 50 x 5
800
2b 50 x 5
1000
3b 50 x 5
1000
4b 50 x 5
1360
IP > 31
b
b
b
b
b

Device

25 C
NS630b Size per phase 1b 50 x 10
I (A)
630
NS800 Size per phase 1b 50 x 10
I (A)
800
I (A)
1000
I (A)
1250
I (A)
1600
1b 50 x 10
630
1b 50 x 10
800
1b 50 x 10
1000
2b 50 x 10
1250
2b 50 x 10
1510
30 C
1b 50 x 10
630
1b 50 x 10
800
1b 50 x 10
1000
2b 50 x 10
1250
2b 50 x 10
1560
1b 50 x 10
630
1b 50 x 10
800
1b 50 x 10
1000
2b 50 x 10
1250
2b 50 x 10
1470
35 C
1b 50 x 10
630
1b 50 x 10
800
1b 50 x 10
1000
2b 50 x 10
1250
2b 50 x 10
1510
1b 50 x 10
630
1b 50 x 10
800
1b 50 x 10
1000
b
b
50 C
1b 50 x 10
630
1b 50 x 10
800
1b 50 x 10
1000
2b 50 x 10
1090
2b 50 x 10
1360
204
b
b
b
b
b
205

Prefabricated connections for
Top or bottom front connection
System P
Characteristics
DD382460

vertically mounted
prefabricated connection between a vertical Compact NS630b/NS1600, fixed or
withdrawable, and Linergy busbars depending on the ambient temperature around
Fixed
Device and Cat. no.
NS630b 3P cat. no. 33642

4P cat. no. 33643
NS800 3P cat. no. 33642
4P cat. no. 33643
NS1000 3P cat. no. 33642
4P cat. no. 33643
NS1250 3P cat. no.33642 + 33644
4P cat. no.33643 + 33645
NS1600 3P cat. no.33642 + 33644
4P cat. no.33643 + 33645

25 C
IP y 31
630
IP > 31
630
30 C
IP y 31
630
IP > 31
630
35 C
IP y 31
630
IP > 31
630
40 C
IP y 31
630
IP > 31
630
45 C
IP y 31
630
IP > 31
630
50 C
IP y 31
630
IP > 31
b
800
800
800
800
800
800
800
800
800
800
800
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1250
1250
1250
1250
1250
1250
1250
1200
1250
1150
1200
1600
1550
1600
1500
1550
1450
1500
1400
1450
1350
1400
Withdrawable
Device and Cat. no.
NS630b 3P cat. no.33642

4P cat. no.33643
NS800 3P cat. no.33642
4P cat. no.33643
NS1000 3P cat. no.33642
4P cat. no.33643
NS1250 3P cat. no.33642 + 33644
4P cat. no.33643 + 33645
NS1600 3P cat. no.33642 + 33644
4P cat. no.33643 + 33645

25 C
IP y 31
630
IP > 31
630
30 C
IP y 31
630
IP > 31
630
35 C
IP y 31
630
IP > 31
630
40 C
IP y 31
630
IP > 31
630
45 C
IP y 31
630
IP > 31
630
50 C
IP y 31
630
IP > 31
b
800
800
800
800
800
800
800
800
800
800
800
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1250
1250
1250
1250
1250
1250
1250
1200
1250
1150
1200
1560
1480
1520
1430
1480
1380
1430
1330
1380
1280
1330
206

Prefabricated connections for
Top or bottom front connection
System P
Characteristics
DD382461
Masterpact NT06 to NT16,

vertically mounted
prefabricated connection between a vertical Masterpact NT06/NT16, fixed or
drawout, and Linergy busbars depending on the ambient temperature around the
switchboard and the IP value.
Fixed
Device and Cat. no.
NT06
NT08
NT10
NT12
NT16
3P cat. no. 33642

4P cat. no. 33643
3P cat. no. 33642
4P cat. no. 33643
3P cat. no.33642
4P cat. no.33643
3P cat. no.33642 + 33644
4P cat. no.33643 + 33645
3P 33642 + 33644
4P cat. no.33643 + 33645

25 C
IP y 31
630
IP > 31
630
30 C
IP y 31
630
IP > 31
630
35 C
IP y 31
630
IP > 31
630
40 C
IP y 31
630
IP > 31
630
45 C
IP y 31
630
IP > 31
630
50 C
IP y 31
630
IP > 31
b
800
800
800
800
800
800
800
800
800
800
800
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1250
1250
1250
1250
1250
1250
1250
1200
1250
1150
1200
1600
1570
1600
1520
1570
1470
1520
1420
1470
1370
1420
Drawout
Device and Cat. no.
NT06
3P cat. no. 33642

4P cat. no. 33643
NT08 3P cat. no. 33642
4P cat. no. 33643
NT10 3P cat. no.33642
4P cat. no.33643
NT12 3P cat. no.33642 + 33644
4P cat. no.33643 + 33645
NT16 3P 33642 + 33644
4P cat. no.33643 + 33645

25 C
IP y 31
630
IP > 31
630
30 C
IP y 31
630
IP > 31
630
35 C
IP y 31
630
IP > 31
630
40 C
IP y 31
630
IP > 31
630
45 C
IP y 31
630
IP > 31
630
50 C
IP y 31
630
IP > 31
b
800
800
800
800
800
800
800
800
800
800
800
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1250
1250
1250
1250
1250
1250
1250
1200
1250
1150
1200
1560
1480
1520
1430
1480
1380
1430
1330
1380
1280
1330
207

Connection transfer assembly for
horizontal fixed Compact NS630b to
NS1600
System P
Characteristics
DD382462

horizontally mounted, fixed
prefabricated connection between a horizontal, fixed Compact NS630b/NS1000 and
Linergy busbars depending on the ambient temperature around the switchboard and
the IP value.
Connection transfer assemblies

Device and Cat. no.
NS630b
3P cat. no. 04483

4P cat. no. 04484
NS800
3P cat. no. 04483
4P cat. no. 04484
NS1000
3P cat. no. 04483
4P cat. no. 04484

25 C
IP y 31
630
IP > 31
630
30 C
IP y 31
630
IP > 31
630
35 C
IP y 31
630
IP > 31
630
40C
IP y 31
630
IP > 31
630
45 C
IP y 31
630
IP > 31
630
50 C
IP y 31
630
IP > 31
b
800
800
800
800
800
800
800
800
800
800
800
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
208
209

System P

DD382456
Characteristics
maximum permissible currents when making a front or rear customer connection for
a vertical, fixed NW08/NW32, taking into account the ambient temperature around
Connection to be made according to the busbar drawings supplied.
Customer connection
Devices
NW08
Size per phase

I (A)
NW10
Size per phase
I (A)
NW12
Size per phase
I (A)
NW16
Size per phase
I (A)

25 C
IP y 31
2b 60 x 5
800
2b 60 x 5
1000
2b 80 x 5
1250
2b 80 x 5
1600
IP > 31
2b 60 x 5
800
2b 60 x 5
1000
2b 80 x 5
1250
2b 80 x 5
1600
30 C
IP y 31
2b 60 x 5
800
2b 60 x 5
1000
2b 80 x 5
1250
2b 80 x 5
1600
IP > 31
2b 60 x 5
800
2b 60 x 5
1000
2b 80 x 5
1250
2b 80 x 5
1570
35 C
IP y 31
2b 60 x 5
800
2b 60 x 5
1000
2b 80 x 5
1250
2b 80 x 5
1600
IP > 31
2b 60 x 5
800
2b 60 x 5
1000
2b 80 x 5
1250
2b 80 x 5
1520
40C
IP y 31
2b 60 x 5
800
2b 60 x 5
1000
2b 80 x 5
1250
2b 80 x 5
1570
IP > 31
2b 60 x 5
800
2b 60 x 5
1000
2b 80 x 5
1250
2b 80 x 5
1470
45 C
IP y 31
2b 60 x 5
800
2b 60 x 5
1000
2b 80 x 5
1250
2b 80 x 5
1520
IP > 31
2b 60 x 5
800
2b 60 x 5
1000
2b 80 x 5
1250
2b 80 x 5
1420
50 C
IP y 31
2b 60 x 5
800
2b 60 x 5
1000
2b 80 x 5
1250
2b 80 x 5
1470
210
IP > 31
b
b
b
b

System P

DD382457
Characteristics
Customer connection
Devices
NW08
Size per phase

I (A)
NW10 Size per phase
I (A)
NW12 Size per phase
I (A)
NW16 Size per phase
I (A)
NW20 Size per phase
I (A)
NW25 Size per phase
I (A)
NW32 Size per phase
I (A)

25 C
IP y 31
1b 60x 10
800
1b 60x 10
1000
1b 60x 10
1250
1b 80x 10
1600
2b 80x 10
2000
2b100x10
2500
2b120x10
3200
Canalis connection
IP > 31
1b 60x10
800
1b 60x10
1000
1b 60x10
1250
1b 80x 10
1600
2b 80x 10
2000
2b100x10
2500
2b120x10
2980
30 C
IP y 31
1b 60x 10
800
1b 60x 10
1000
1b 60x 10
1250
1b 80x 10
1600
2b 80x 10
2000
2b100x10
2500
2b120x10
3150
IP > 31
1b 60x10
800
1b 60x10
1000
1b 60x10
1250
1b 80x 10
1570
2b 80x 10
2000
2b100x10
2500
2b120x10
2900
35 C
IP y 31
1b 60x 10
800
1b 60x 10
1000
1b 60x 10
1250
1b 80x 10
1600
2b 80x 10
2000
2b100x10
2500
2b120x10
3080
IP > 31
1b 60x10
800
1b 60x10
1000
1b 60x10
1250
1b 80x 10
1520
2b 80x 10
2000
2b100x10
2500
2b120x10
2820
40C
IP y 31
1b 60x 10
800
1b 60x 10
1000
1b 60x 10
1250
1b 80x 10
1570
2b 80x 10
2000
2b100x10
2500
2b120x10
2980
IP > 31
1b 60x10
800
1b 60x10
1000
1b 60x10
1250
1b 80x 10
1470
2b 80x 10
1950
2b100x10
2400
2b120x10
2730
45 C
IP y 31
1b 60x 10
800
1b 60x 10
1000
1b 60x 10
1250
1b 80x 10
1520
2b 80x 10
2000
2b100x10
2500
2b120x10
2900
IP > 31
1b 60x10
800
1b 60x10
1000
1b 60x10
1250
1b 80x 10
1420
2b 80x 10
1900
2b100x10
2320
2b120x10
2630
50 C
IP y 31
1b 60x 10
800
1b 60x 10
1000
1b 60x 10
1250
1b 80x 10
1470
2b 80x 10
1950
2b100x10
2500
2b120x10
2820
IP > 31
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
For Canalis connections, apply the appropriate derating coefficient K.

Devices
Derating
coefficient K
NW08
NW10
NW12
NW16
NW20
NW25
NW32
0.98
0.98
0.97
0.97
211

System P

connection
DD382458
Characteristics
maximum permissible currents when making a front or rear customer connection for
a vertical, drawout NW08/NW32, taking into account the ambient temperature
around the switchboard and the IP value.
Customer connection
Devices
NW08
Size per phase

I (A)
NW10
Size per phase
I (A)
NW12
Size per phase
I (A)
NW16
Size per phase
I (A)

25 C
IP y 31
2b 60 x 5
800
2b 60 x 5
1000
2b 80 x 5
1250
2b 80 x 5
1560
IP > 31
2b 60 x 5
800
2b 60 x 5
1000
2b 80 x 5
1250
2b 80 x 5
1480
30 C
IP y 31
2b 60 x 5
800
2b 60 x 5
1000
2b 80 x 5
1250
2b 80 x 5
1520
IP > 31
2b 60 x 5
800
2b 60 x 5
1000
2b 80 x 5
1250
2b 80 x 5
1430
35 C
IP y 31
2b 60 x 5
800
2b 60 x 5
1000
2b 80 x 5
1250
2b 80 x 5
1480
IP > 31
2b 60 x 5
800
2b 60 x 5
1000
2b 80 x 5
1230
2b 80 x 5
1380
40 C
IP y 31
2b 60 x 5
800
2b 60 x 5
1000
2b 80 x 5
1250
2b 80 x 5
1430
IP > 31
2b 60 x 5
800
2b 60 x 5
1000
2b 80 x 5
1200
2b 80 x 5
1330
45 C
IP y 31
2b 60 x 5
800
2b 60 x 5
1000
2b 80 x 5
1230
2b 80 x 5
1380
IP > 31
2b 60 x 5
800
2b 60 x 5
1000
2b 80 x 5
1160
2b 80 x 5
1280
50 C
IP y 31
2b 60 x 5
800
2b 60 x 5
1000
2b 80 x 5
1200
2b 80 x 5
1330
212
IP > 31
b
b
b
b

System P

connection
DD382459
Characteristics
Customer connection
Devices

25 C
IP y 31
NW08 Size per phase 1b 60x10
I (A)
800
I (A)
1000
I (A)
1250
I (A)
1560
I (A)
2000
NW25 Size per phase 2b100x10
I (A)
2500
NW32 Size per phase 2b120x10
I (A)
3000
Canalis connection
IP > 31
1b 60x10
800
1b 60x10
1000
1b 60x10
1250
1b 80x10
1480
2b 80x10
2000
2b100x10
2350
2b120x10
2730
30 C
IP y 31
1b 60x10
800
1b 60x10
1000
1b 60x10
1250
1b 80x10
1520
2b 80x10
2000
2b100x10
2420
2b120x10
2920
IP > 31
1b 60x10
800
1b 60x10
1000
1b 60x10
1210
1b 80x10
1430
2b 80x10
1950
2b100x10
2210
2b120x10
2650
35 C
IP y 31
1b 60x10
800
1b 60x10
1000
1b 60x10
1250
1b 80x10
1480
2b 80x10
2000
2b100x10
2350
2b120x10
2820
IP > 31
1b 60x10
800
1b 60x10
1000
1b 60x10
1180
1b 80x10
1380
2b 80x10
1900
2b100x10
2130
2b120x10
2550
40 C
IP y 31
1b 60x10
800
1b 60x10
1000
1b 60x10
1210
1b 80x10
1430
2b 80x10
1950
2b100x10
2280
2b120x10
2730
IP > 31
1b 60x10
800
1b 60x10
1000
1b 60x10
1140
1b 80x10
1330
2b 80x10
1830
2b100x10
2060
2b120x10
2480
45 C
IP y 31
1b 60x10
800
1b 60x10
1000
1b 60x10
1180
1b 80x10
1380
2b 80x10
1900
2b100x10
2210
2b120x10
2650
IP > 31
1b 60x10
800
1b 60x10
1000
1b 60x10
1100
1b 80x10
1280
2b 80x10
1760
2b100x10
1980
2b120x10
2400
50 C
IP y 31
1b 60x10
800
1b 60x10
1000
1b 60x10
1140
1b 80x10
1330
2b 80x10
1830
2b100x10
2130
2b120x10
2550
IP > 31
b
b
b
b
b
b
b

Devices
Derating
coefficient K
NW08
NW10
NW12
NW16
NW20
NW25
NW32
0.98
0.98
0.97
0.97
213

Fixed Masterpact NT06 to NT16
Rear connection
System P

Fixed
DD382455
Characteristics
maximum permissible currents when making a customer connection for a vertical,
fixed Masterpact NT06/NT16, taking into account the ambient temperature around
Customer connectionFlat busbars, 5 mm thick

Devices
NT06
Size per phase

I (A)
NT08
Size per phase
I (A)
NT10
Size per phase
I (A)
NT12
Size per phase
I (A)
NT16
Size per phase
I (A)

25 C
IP y 31
1b 60x5
630
1b 80x5
800
2b 50x5
1000
2b 80x5
1250
2b 100x5
1600
IP > 31
1b 60x5
630
1b 80x5
800
2b 50x5
1000
2b 80x5
1250
2b 100x5
1570
30 C
IP y 31
1b 60x5
630
1b 80x5
800
2b 50x5
1000
2b 80x5
1250
2b 100x5
1600
IP > 31
1b 60x5
630
1b 80x5
800
2b 50x5
1000
2b 80x5
1250
2b 100x5
1520
35 C
IP y 31
1b 60x5
630
1b 80x5
800
2b 50x5
1000
2b 80x5
1250
2b 100x5
1570
IP > 31
1b 60x5
630
1b 80x5
800
2b 50x5
1000
2b 80x5
1250
2b 100x5
1470
40C
IP y 31
1b 60x5
630
1b 80x5
800
2b 50x5
1000
2b 80x5
1250
2b 100x5
1520
IP > 31
1b 60x5
630
1b 80x5
800
2b 50x5
1000
2b 80x5
1250
2b 100x5
1420
45 C
IP y 31
1b 60x5
630
1b 80x5
800
2b 50x5
1000
2b 80x5
1250
2b 100x5
1470
IP > 31
1b 60x5
630
1b 80x5
800
2b 50x5
1000
2b 80x5
1200
2b 100x5
1370
50 C
IP y 31
1b 60x5
630
1b 80x5
800
2b 50x5
1000
2b 80x5
1250
2b 100x5
1420
214
IP > 31
b
b
b
b
b

Fixed Masterpact NT06 to NT16
Rear connection
System P
Characteristics
Customer connection
Devices
NT06

25 C
30 C
35 C
40C
45 C
50 C
IP y 31
IP > 31
IP y 31
IP > 31
IP y 31
IP > 31
IP y 31
IP > 31
IP y 31
IP > 31
IP y 31
IP > 31
1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 b
Size per
phase
I (A)
630
NT08
Size per
1b 50 x 10
phase
I (A)
800
NT10
Size per
1b 50 x 10
phase
I (A)
1000
NT12
Size per
1b 80x10
phase
I (A)
1250
NT16
Size per
1b100x10
phase
I (A)
1600
Canalis connection
630
630
630
630
630
630
630
630
630
630
1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 b
800
800
800
800
800
800
800
800
800
800
1000
1b 80x10
1000
1b 80x10
1000
1b 80x10
1000
1b 80x10
1000
1b 80x10
1000
1b 80x10
1000
1b 80x10
1000
1b 80x10
1000
1b 80x10
1000
1b 80x10
1250
1250
1250
1250
1250
1250
1250
1250
1180
1230
1b100x10 1b100x10 1b100x10 1b100x10 1b100x10 1b100x10 1b100x10 1b100x10 1b100x10 1b100x10 b
1570
1600
1520
1570
1470
1520
1420
1470
1370
1420

Devices
NT06b
NT08
NT10
NT12
NT16
Derating
coefficient K
0.98
215

Drawout Masterpact NT06 to NT16
Rear connection
System P

Drawout
DD382454
Characteristics
vertical, drawout Masterpact NT06/NT16, taking into account the ambient
Customer connection
Devices
NT06
Size per phase

I (A)
NT08
Size per phase
I (A)
NT10
Size per phase
I (A)
NT12
Size per phase
I (A)
NT16
Size per phase
I (A)

25 C
IP y 31
1b 60x5
630
1b 80x5
800
2b 50 x 5
1000
2b 80x5
1250
2b 100x5
1560
IP > 31
1b 60x5
630
1b 80x5
800
2b 50 x 5
1000
2b 80x5
1250
2b 100x5
1430
30 C
IP y 31
1b 60x5
630
1b 80x5
800
2b 50 x 5
1000
2b 80x5
1250
2b 100x5
1520
IP > 31
1b 60x5
630
1b 80x5
800
2b 50 x 5
1000
2b 80x5
1250
2b 100x5
1430
35 C
IP y 31
1b 60x5
630
1b 80x5
800
2b 50 x 5
1000
2b 80x5
1250
2b 100x5
1480
IP > 31
1b 60x5
630
1b 80x5
800
2b 50 x 5
1000
2b 80x5
1230
2b 100x5
1380
40C
IP y 31
1b 60x5
630
1b 80x5
800
2b 50 x 5
1000
2b 80x5
1250
2b 100x5
1430
IP > 31
1b 60x5
630
1b 80x5
800
2b 50 x 5
1000
2b 80x5
1180
2b 100x5
1330
45 C
IP y 31
1b 60x5
630
1b 80x5
800
2b 50 x 5
1000
2b 80x5
1230
2b 100x5
1380
IP > 31
1b 60x5
630
1b 80x5
800
2b 50 x 5
960
2b 80x5
1130
2b 100x5
1280
50 C
IP y 31
1b 60x5
630
1b 80x5
800
2b 50 x 5
1000
2b 80x5
1180
2b 100x5
1330
216
IP > 31
b
b
b
b
b
System P

Drawout Masterpact NT06 to NT16
Rear connection
Characteristics
Customer connection
Devices
NT06

25 C
30 C
35 C
40C
45 C
50 C
IP y 31
IP > 31
IP y 31
IP > 31
IP y 31
IP > 31
IP y 31
IP > 31
IP y 31
IP > 31
IP y 31
IP > 31
Size per
phase
I (A)
630
NT08
Size per
1b 50 x 10
phase
I (A)
800
NT10
Size per
1b 50 x 10
phase
I (A)
1000
NT12
Size per
1b 80 x 10
phase
I (A)
1250
NT16
Size per
1b100x10
phase
I (A)
1560
Canalis connection
630
630
630
630
630
630
630
630
630
630
800
800
800
800
800
800
800
800
800
800
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
960
1000
1250
1250
1250
1b100x10 1b100x10 1b100x1
0
1430
1520
1430
1250
1210
1250
1160
1210
1110
1160
1b100x10 1b100x10 1b100x10 1b100x10 1b100x10 1b100x10 1b100x10 b
1480
1380
1430
1330
1380
1280
1330

Devices
NT06
NT08
NT10
NT12
NT16
Derating
coefficient K
0.98
217

Fixed Compact NS630b to NS1600
Rear connection
System P

Fixed
DD382453
Characteristics
Determining the size of the copper bars and the maximum permissible currents when
making a customer connection for a vertical, fixed Compact NS630b/NS1600, taking
into account the ambient temperature around the switchboard and the IP value.
Customer connection
Devices
NS630b
Size per phase

I (A)
NS800
Size per phase
I (A)
NS1000
Size per phase
I (A)
NS1250
Size per phase
I (A)
NS1600
Size per phase
I (A)

25 C
IP y 31
1b 60x5
630
1b 80x5
800
2b 50 x 5
1000
2b 80x5
1250
2b 100x5
1600
IP > 31
1b 60x5
630
1b 80x5
800
2b 50 x 5
1000
2b 80x5
1250
2b 100x5
1550
30 C
IP y 31
1b 60x5
630
1b 80x5
800
2b 50 x 5
1000
2b 80x5
1250
2b 100x5
1600
IP > 31
1b 60x5
630
1b 80x5
800
2b 50 x 5
1000
2b 80x5
1250
2b 100x5
1500
35 C
IP y 31
1b 60x5
630
1b 80x5
800
2b 50 x 5
1000
2b 80x5
1250
2b 100x5
1550
IP > 31
1b 60x5
630
1b 80x5
800
2b 50 x 5
1000
2b 80x5
1250
2b 100x5
1450
40C
IP y 31
1b 60x5
630
1b 80x5
800
2b 50 x 5
1000
2b 80x5
1250
2b 100x5
1500
IP > 31
1b 60x5
630
1b 80x5
800
2b 50 x 5
1000
2b 80x5
1200
2b 100x5
1400
45 C
IP y 31
1b 60x5
630
1b 80x5
800
2b 50 x 5
1000
2b 80x5
1250
2b 100x5
1450
IP > 31
1b 60x5
630
1b 80x5
800
2b 50 x 5
970
2b 80x5
1150
2b 100x5
1350
50 C
IP y 31
1b 60x5
630
1b 80x5
800
2b 50 x 5
1000
2b 80x5
1200
2b 100x5
1400
218
IP > 31
b
b
b
b
b
System P

Fixed Compact NS630b to NS1600
Rear connection
Characteristics
Customer connection
Devices

25 C
30 C
35 C
40C
45 C
50 C
IP y 31
IP > 31
IP y 31
IP > 31
IP y 31
IP > 31
IP y 31
IP > 31
IP y 31
IP > 31
IP y 31
IP > 31
NS630b Size per

phase
I (A)
630
NS800 Size per
1b 50 x 10
phase
I (A)
800
NS1000 Size per
1b 50 x 10
phase
I (A)
1000
NS1250 Size per
1b 80x10
phase
I (A)
1250
NS1600 Size per
1b100x10
phase
I (A)
1600
Canalis connection
630
630
630
630
630
630
630
630
630
630
800
800
800
800
800
800
800
800
800
800
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
970
1000
1b 80x10 1b 80x10 1b 80x10 1b 80x10 1b 80x10 1b 80x10 1b 80x10 1b 80x10 1b 80x10 1b 80x10 b
1250
1250
1250
1b100x10 1b100x10 1b100x1
0
1550
1600
1500
1250
1250
1250
1180
1230
1130
1180
1b100x10 1b100x10 1b100x10 1b100x10 1b100x10 1b100x10 1b100x10 b
1550
1450
1500
1400
1450
1350
1400

Devices
NS630b
NS800
NS1000
NS1250
NS1600
Derating
coefficient K
0.98
219

Withdrawable Compact NS630b to
NS1600, rear connection
System P

Withdrawable
DD382454
Characteristics
maximum permissible currents when making a rear customer connection for a
vertical, withdrawable Compact NS630b/NS1600, taking into account the ambient
Customer connection
Devices
NS630b
Size per phase

I (A)
NS800
Size per phase
I (A)
NS1000
Size per phase
I (A)
NS1250
Size per phase
I (A)
NS1600
Size per phase
I (A)

25 C
IP y 31
1b 60x5
630
1b 80x5
800
2b 50 x 5
1000
2b 80x5
1250
2b 100x5
1560
IP > 31
1b 60x5
630
1b 80x5
800
2b 50 x 5
1000
2b 80x5
1250
2b 100x5
1430
30 C
IP y 31
1b 60x5
630
1b 80x5
800
2b 50 x 5
1000
2b 80x5
1250
2b 100x5
1520
IP > 31
1b 60x5
630
1b 80x5
800
2b 50 x 5
1000
2b 80x5
1250
2b 100x5
1430
35 C
IP y 31
1b 60x5
630
1b 80x5
800
2b 50 x 5
1000
2b 80x5
1250
2b 100x5
1480
IP > 31
1b 60x5
630
1b 80x5
800
2b 50 x 5
1000
2b 80x5
1230
2b 100x5
1380
40C
IP y 31
1b 60x5
630
1b 80x5
800
2b 50 x 5
1000
2b 80x5
1250
2b 100x5
1430
IP > 31
1b 60x5
630
1b 80x5
800
2b 50 x 5
1000
2b 80x5
1180
2b 100x5
1330
45 C
IP y 31
1b 60x5
630
1b 80x5
800
2b 50 x 5
1000
2b 80x5
1230
2b 100x5
1380
IP > 31
1b 60x5
630
1b 80x5
800
2b 50 x 5
960
2b 80x5
1130
2b 100x5
1280
50 C
IP y 31
1b 60x5
630
1b 80x5
800
2b 50 x 5
1000
2b 80x5
1180
2b 100x5
1330
220
IP > 31
b
b
b
b
b

Withdrawable Compact NS630b to
NS1600, rear connection
System P
Characteristics
Customer connection
Devices

25 C
30 C
35 C
40C
45 C
50 C
IP y 31
IP > 31
IP y 31
IP > 31
IP y 31
IP > 31
IP y 31
IP > 31
IP y 31
IP > 31
IP y 31
IP > 31
NS630b Size per

phase
I (A)
630
NS800 Size per
1b 50 x 10
phase
I (A)
800
NS1000 Size per
1b 50 x 10
phase
I (A)
1000
NS1250 Size per
1b 80 x 10
phase
I (A)
1250
NS1600 Size per
1b100x10
phase
I (A)
1560
Canalis connection
630
630
630
630
630
630
630
630
630
630
800
800
800
800
800
800
800
800
800
800
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
960
1000
1250
1250
1250
1250
1210
1250
1160
1210
1110
1160
1b100x10 1b100x10 1b100x10 1b100x10 1b100x10 1b100x10 1b100x10 1b100x10 1b100x10 1b100x10 b
1430
1520
1430
1480
1380
1430
1330
1380
1280
1330

AppareilDevices
NS630b
NS800
NS1000
NS1250
NS1600
Derating
coefficient K
0.98
221

System P

Horizontal, fixed
DD382473
Characteristics
horizontal, fixed Compact NS630b/NS1600, taking into account the ambient
Customer connection
Device

25 C
30 C
35 C
IP y 31
IP > 31
IP y 31
IP > 31
IP y 31
I (A)
630
630
630
630
630
I (A)
800
800
800
800
800
I (A)
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
IP > 31
2b 50 x 5
630
2b 50 x 5
800
2b 50 x 5
1000
40C
IP y 31
2b 50 x 5
630
2b 50 x 5
800
2b 50 x 5
1000
IP > 31
2b 50 x 5
630
2b 50 x 5
800
2b 50 x 5
1000
45 C
IP y 31
2b 50 x 5
630
2b 50 x 5
800
2b 50 x 5
1000
IP > 31
2b 50 x 5
630
2b 50 x 5
800
2b 50 x 5
1000
50 C
IP y 31
2b 50 x 5
630
2b 50 x 5
800
2b 50 x 5
1000
1b 50 x 10
630
1b 50 x 10
800
1b 50 x 10
1000
40C
1b 50 x 10
630
1b 50 x 10
800
1b 50 x 10
1000
1b 50 x 10
630
1b 50 x 10
800
1b 50 x 10
1000
45 C
1b 50 x 10
630
1b 50 x 10
800
1b 50 x 10
1000
1b 50 x 10
630
1b 50 x 10
800
1b 50 x 10
1000
50 C
1b 50 x 10 b
630
1b 50 x 10 b
800
1b 50 x 10 b
1000
IP > 31
b
b
b

Device

25 C
NS630b Size per phase 1b 50 x 10
I (A)
630
I (A)
800
I (A)
1000
1b 50 x 10
630
1b 50 x 10
800
1b 50 x 10
1000
30 C
1b 50 x 10
630
1b 50 x 10
800
1b 50 x 10
1000
1b 50 x 10
630
1b 50 x 10
800
1b 50 x 10
1000
35 C
1b 50 x 10
630
1b 50 x 10
800
1b 50 x 10
1000
222
System P

Characteristics
223

Device connections
System P
Characteristics
Flexible copper bars with an

insulating sheath
Switchboards that comply with standard IEC 60439-1

It is imperative to use the values indicated below that have been validated for the
installation of devices in Prisma Plus switchboards.
The parameters determining the size of flexible bars are:
b the environment in which the devices are installed:
v position in the enclosure
v dimensions of other conductors in the circuit
v ambient temperature around the switchboard
b the characteristics of the connected devices:
v device heat losses
v the type of installation (horizontal or vertical)
v the type of device (fixed or withdrawable).
Only the equipment manufacturer with in-depth knowledge on:
b the characteristics of the installed devices
b the configuration of the installation in the enclosure
can provide the correct sizes of flexible bars for a given permissible current.
Insulated, flexible bars make for easy, fast and flexible implementation up to 630 A,
but higher ratings require sizes that cancel these advantages.
For high Isc values, it is advised to use rigid bars which require fewer supports.
Insulated flexible bars are better than cables, they offer:

b better insulation temperature withstand (125C for bars, 105C for cables) and a
larger exchange surface for an equivalent size, i.e. a smaller size for a given current
b greater rigidity offering better electrodynamic characteristics for short-circuit
currents
b no intermediate parts (lugs) for a direct connection between the device and the
busbars therefore less temperature rise and less risk of error
b fast implementation of prefabricated connections already cut to length, formed and
drilled.
Technical characteristics
b thickness of the insulation: variable depending on the bar size, 2 mm on average
b maximum withstand temperature of insulating material = 125C.
Connection
In all cubicles with IP y 55

b the switchboard internal temperature is 60C
b the withstand temperature of the insulating material is 125C.
If the withstand temperature of the insulation is only 105C, use the next largest
flexible bar.
The bar sizes indicated below take into account the derating curves of devices.
Connection of devices and distribution blocks to busbars

Device
S (mm)
Device
S (mm)
INS125
INS160
INS250
20 x 2
NS250 (1)
20 x 2
NS400 (1)
20 x 3
NS630
20 x 3
32 x 5
32 x 8
INS320
INS400
32 x 5
INF250
ISFT250
24 x 5
INS500
INS630
32 x 6
INF400
ISFT400
32 x 5
NS100 (1)
NS160 (1)
20 x 2
INF630
ISFT630
32 x 8
20 x 3
(1) The values for circuit breakers apply to contactors with the same ratings.
To connect a Compact NS250 to Powerclip busbars, use a 24 x 5 mm flexible bar

(04746).
Device
S (mm)
Multiclip distribution Polypact distribution Polypact distribution

block (200 A)
block (3P)
block (4P)
20 x 3
32 x 6
32 x 5
Disconnectors, terminal blocks, connections, busbars to

busbars
I max. (60 C)
S (mm)
200 A
20 x 2
250 A
20 x 3
400 A
24 x 5
400 A
24 x 5
480 A
24 x 6
520 A
32 x 5
580 A
32 x 6
224
660 A
32 x 8
System P

NS100 to NS630
Characteristics

Insulated flexible copper bars
Devices

25 C
30 C
35 C
40 C
45 C
50 C
IP y 55
NS100
TMD-TMG
NS125
TMD-TMG
NS160 (1)
TMD-TMG
NS250 (1)
TMD-TMG
NS100
STR
NS160
STR
NS250 (2)
STR
Size per phase

I (A)
Size per phase
I (A)
Size per phase
I (A)
Size per phase
I (A)
Size per phase
I (A)
Size per phase
I (A)
Size per phase
I (A)
20 x 2
100
20 x 2
125
20 x 3
160
20 x 3
250
20 x 2
100
20 x 3
160
20 x 3
250
20 x 2
20 x 2
20 x 2
20 x 2
20 x 2
97.5
95
92.5
90
85
20 x 2
20 x 2
20 x 2
20 x 2
20 x 2
122
119
116
113
100
20 x 3
20 x 3
20 x 3
20 x 3
20 x 3
156
152
147
144
140
20 x 3
20 x 3
20 x 3
20 x 3
20 x 3
244
238
231
225
198
20 x 2
20 x 2
20 x 2
20 x 2
20 x 2
100
100
100
100
100
20 x 3
20 x 3
20 x 3
20 x 3
20 x 3
160
160
160
160
160
20 x 3
20 x 3
20 x 3
20 x 3
20 x 3
250
237.5
237.5
225
225
(1) For a withdrawable NS160 or NS250 equipped with a Vigi or an insulation-monitoring module,
multiply the In values by 0.9.
(2) For a withdrawable NS250 equipped with a Vigi or an insulation-monitoring module, multiply
the In values by 0.86.
Insulated flexible copper bars

Devices

25 C
30 C
35 C
40 C
45 C
50 C
32 x 5
400
32 x 5
400
32 x 5
400
32 x 6
630
32 x 8
570
32 x 5
400
32 x 5
390
32 x 5
390
32 x 6
615
32 x 8
550
32 x 5
400
32 x 5
380
32 x 5
380
32 x 6
600
32 x 8
535
32 x 5
390
32 x 5
370
32 x 5
370
32 x 6
585
32 x 8
520
32 x 5
380
32 x 5
360
32 x 5
360
32 x 6
570
32 x 8
505
32 x 5
370
32 x 5
350
32 x 5
350
32 x 6
550
32 x 8
490
IP y 55
NS400N/H/L
fixed
NS400N/H/L
with Vigi
NS400N/H/L
withdrawable
NS630N/H/L
fixed
NS630N/H/L
Vigi or withdrawable
Size per phase

I (A)
Size per phase
I (A)
Size per phase
I (A)
Size per phase
I (A)
Size per phase
I (A)
225
System P
Characteristics

Horizontal mounting
Device
NS100
TMD-TMG
Incoming connection block via the top

via the bottom
Power supply block
NS100STR Incoming connection block via the top
via the bottom
Power supply block
NS160
TMD-TMG
via the bottom
Power supply block
via the bottom
Power supply block
NS250
TMD-TMG
via the bottom
Power supply block
via the bottom
Power supply block
NS400N/H/L Incoming connection block
fixe
Power supply block
NS630N/H/L Incoming connection block
fixe
Power supply block
226

Incoming connection block
and power supply block
on Powerclip busbar
Determining the permissible current of NS100 to NS630 connection and power
supply blocks as a function of the ambient temperature around the switchboard and
their IP degree of protection.
25 C
30 C
35 C
40 C
IP y
IP >
IP y
IP >
IP y
IP >
IP y
31
31
31
31
31
31
31
04066 100
95
100
92
100
90
97
04067
04060
04066 100
100
100
97
100
95
100
04067
04060
04066 160
152
160
147
160
144
156
04067
04060
04066 160
160
160
156
160
152
160
04067
04060
04066 238
213
231
207
225
200
219
04067
04060
04066 250
219
245
213
238
207
225
04067
04060
04076 400
360
390
350
380
340
370
04070
04076 570
520
555
505
540
490
525
04071
IP >
31
87
45 C
IP y
IP >
31
31
95
85
50 C
IP y
31
92
IP >
31
b
92
100
90
97
140
152
136
147
147
160
144
156
193
213
185
207
200
219
193
213
330
360
320
350
470
510
450
495
Designing connections with

cables
System P
Characteristics
Cables
Practical guidelines
Schneider Electric provides cabling recommendations according to the rating of the
circuit breaker.
The size of cables must be selected according to:
b the level of current
b the ambient temperature around the conductors
b the degree of protection for the switchboard.
The tables below take into account the installation conditions for each type of device
(permissible temperature at connection terminals, etc.).
They follow the temperature derating values for installed devices in all cubicles with
cover panels rated IP y 55.
b switchboard internal temperature 60C
b connections using copper cables.
For System G, the volumes, ratings and connection lengths are low.
Select the values in the "Cables tied together" column, according to the IP.
Connection of circuit breakers
Size of
cables
(mm)
1.5
2.5
4
6
10
16
25
35
50
70
95
Connection of other devices
Size of
cables
(mm)
1.5
2.5
4
6
10
16
25
35
50
70
95
Connection of NS100 to 630 A
Device

Cables tied individually
IP y 31
IP > 31
16
25
32
40
63
90
110
135
180
230
275
14
25
29
39
55
77
100
125
150
190
230
14
22
28
36
55
80
100
125

Cables tied individually
IP y 31
IP > 31
13
23
28
36
55
80
100
120
165
210
250
NS100
Cable tied together

IP y 31
IP > 31
12
21
26
35
50
70
90
115
135
176
210
Cable tied together

IP y 31
IP > 31
12
20
25
32
50
72
90
110
NS160
12
20
24
33
50
70
93
120
10
19
22
30
46
63
84
103
NS250
Size (mm)
25
50
95
Note: .Schneider Electric recommends connecting NS400/630 circuit breakers with insulated
flexible bars or rigid bars.
see page 224.
227
System P
Designing the PE
protective conductor
Power circuit
Characteristics
Size of PE protective conductor
DD381471
The conductor must be sufficiently sized and securely installed in the switchboard to
accept the thermal and electrodynamic stresses of the fault current.
It must be connected to the exposed conductive parts of the switchboard.
It must be accessible to enable connections both in the factory and on site.
Optimised calculation method

Use the calculation equation indicated in standard IEC 60439-1.
2
I t
S PE = ---------k
b SPE : cross-sectional area of PE in mm2
b I : value of the phase-to-earth fault current = 60% of the value of the phase-tophase fault current (IEC 60439-1 8.2.4.2)
b t : time the fault current flows in seconds
b k : coefficient that depends on the type of metal, k = 143 for a copper conductor
with PVC insulation.
Simplified method (based on the equation above)

Use the table below to determine the size of the PE conductor as a function of the
device Isc.
Size of PE conductor
Isc y 40 kA
Isc y 65 kA
Isc > 65 kA
All Schneider Electric devices

1 bar, 25 x 5 mm
Linergy 630
1 bar, 50 x 5 mm
Linergy 630
1 bar, 50 x 5 mm
Linergy 800
Schneider Electric prefabricated solution

For all Schneider Electric devices for an Isc up to 85 kA: see page 122.
228
Designing the PEN conductor

Power circuit
System P
Characteristics
Size of PEN protective conductor
The size of the PEN is determined in the same manner as a neutral conductor, i.e.:
b for copper single-phase circuits or sized y 16mm, it must be the same size as the
phase conductors
b for copper three-phase circuits sized > 16 mm, it can be:
v the same size as the phase conductors
v smaller on the condition that:
- the current likely to flow in the neutral during normal operation is less than the
permissible current for the conductor
- the power rating of single-phase loads does not exceed 10% of the total rating.
The conductor must be accessible to enable connections both in the factory and on
site, as well as checks on the tightness of connections.
DD381655
Implementing the PEN protective

conductor
According to standard IEC 60439-1, the practical guidelines for implementing the
PEN are the following:
b at the entry to the assembly, the PEN connection must be next to the phase
connections
b within the assembly, the PEN does not need to be insulated from the exposed
conductive parts (except on sites where there is a risk of fire or explosion)
b the size of the conductor must be at least equal to that of the neutral
b the size must remain constant throughout the main busbars
b the change from a TNC to a TNS system must take place at a single point in the
switchboard, via a marked neutral-disconnection bar that is accessible and can be
dismantled to facilitate the impedance measurement of the fault loop
b after the TNS creation point, it is forbidden to recreate a TNC system.
The PE and the neutral must meet their specific requirements.
Linergy PEN kit

see page 123.
229
Enclosure characteristics
General
System P
Characteristics
Standard IEC 60364-5-51 listed and codified a large number of external
influences to which electrical installations can be subjected, including the
presence of water, solid objects, shocks, vibrations, corrosive substances,
etc.
Standard IEC 60529 (IP code, February 2001) indicates the degrees of protection
provided by an enclosure for electrical devices against access to hazardous parts,
against penetration of solid foreign objects and against penetration of water.
These standards do not apply for the protection against the risks of explosion or
conditions such a humidity, corrosive vapour, fungus or vermin.
The IP code is made up of two characteristic numerals and can include an additional
letter when the actual protection for persons against access to the hazardous parts
is better than that indicated by the first numeral.
The first numeral characterises the protection provided against the ingress of solid
foreign objects and the protection of persons.
The second numeral characterises the protection provided against the ingress of
water with harmful effects.
Degree of protection IP
1st numeral
2nd numeral
230
DD381963
DD381961
DD381962
DD381964
DD381965
DD381962
DD381962
Dust tight
Protected against
splashing water from
all directions
Protected against
water jets from all
directions
Protected against
powerful water jets
from all directions
Protected against the

effects of temporary
immersion in water
Protected against the

effects of continuous
immersion in water
DD381966
Protected against
access with a wire
DD381967
Protected against dust

(dust protected)
Protected against
spraying water up to
60 from vertical
DD381968
Protected against
access with a wire
DD381969
Protected against
solid foreign objects
larger than 1 mm
Protected against
vertically falling water
drops when enclosure
tilted up to 15
DD381970
Protected against
access with a wire
DD381971
Protected against
larger than 2.5 mm
Protected against
vertically falling water
drops (condensation)
DD381972
Protected against
access with a tool
Protection against ingress of water
DD381973
Protected against
larger than 12.5 mm
DD381959
Protected against
access with a finger
DD381959
Protected against
larger than 50 mm
DD381960
Protected against
access with back of
hand
DD381961
DD381962
Protection of persons
Protection against ingress of solid

objects
General
System P
Characteristics
Additional letter (optional)
Protection of persons against access to hazardous parts.

Designation
Protection
A
B
C
D
Protected against access with back of hand

Protected against access with a finger
Protected against access with a tool
Protected against access with a wire
The additional letter is used only if the actual protection of persons is higher than that
indicated by the first characteristic numeral of the IP code.
If only the protection of persons is of interest, the two characteristic numerals are
replaced by "X", e.g. IPxxB.
Example
Protected against solid foreign objects
larger than 2.5 mm
No protection
IP30D
Remarks on the degree of

protection IP
Degree of protection against

mechanical impacts IK
Protected against access with

a tool 1 mm in diameter
b the degree of protection IP must always be read and understood numeral by

numeral and not as a whole.
For example, an IP31 wall-mount enclosure is suitable for an environment that
requires a minimum degree of protection IP21. But an IP30 wall-mount enclosure is
not suitable.
b the degrees of protection indicated in this catalogue are valid for the enclosures as
presented. However, the indicated degree of protection is guaranteed only when the
installation and device mounting are carried out in accordance with professional
standards.
Standard IEC 62262 defines an IK code characterising the capacity of products to
resist mechanical impacts from all sides.
IK code
Impact energy (joules)
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
0.14
0.2
0.35
0.5
0.7
1
2
5
10
20
Recommendation
In terms of the risks of impacts, selection of the IK code can be summed up as
indicated below.
Site
Recommended IK
No risk of major impact
Technical rooms
Significant risk of impact that

Hallways
can damage devices
Maximum risk of impact that can Workshops
damage the switchboard
07
08 (switchboard with door)
10
231
Selection of enclosures according

to the premises
System P
Characteristics
The IP and IK degrees of protection provided by an enclosure must be specified as
a function of the various external influences defined by standard IEC 30364-5-51, in
particular:
b presence of foreign solid bodies (code AE)
b presence of water (code AD)
b mechanical stress (code not specified)
b capability of persons (code BA)
b ....
Prisma Plus switchboards are designed for indoor installation.
Unless the rules, standards and regulations of a specific country stipulate otherwise,
Schneider Electric recommends the following IP and IK values based on French
guide UTE C 15-103 (November 1997).
Using the table
1 Opposite the relevant premises, read the recommended IP and IK values.

2 The b symbol indicates the enclosure or cubicle satisfying the criteria of the UTE
guide.
Any enclosure or cubicle with a higher degree of protection can also be used.
3 If several degrees of protection are possible (refer to the standard for more details)
and the v and b symbols are indicated (e.g. 24v/25b), enclosures that correspond
to the higher degree of protection (b) are suitable for the lower degree of
protection (v).
Example:
Selection of an cubicle for a ironing room.
Minimum degree of protection: IP21/IK02
A cubicle with a door (plain or transparent), a IP30 cover and a gasket offer IP31/
IK08 degrees of protection and are therefore suitable for this application.
Type of premises
Cubicle
with fixed frame
Min. IP/IK
required
IP
IK
Domestic or comparable premises or locations
Porch
24
07
Bathrooms (see washrooms)
Bicycles, motorcycles, tricycles, etc. 20
07
(premises for)
Water, sewer and heating
23
02
connections
Laundries
23
02
Cellars, garages, furnace rooms
20
02v/07b
Bedrooms
20
02
Trash rooms
25
07
Halls in cellars
20
07
Courtyards
24v/25b 02v/07b
Kitchens
20
02
Shower rooms (see washrooms)
Indoor stairways and alleys
20
02v/07b
Outdoor stairways and outdoor alleys 24
07
without roofs
Outdoor alleys with roofs
21
02
Attics (roof space)
20
02
Garden shelters
24v/25b 02v/07b
Latrines
20
02
Dustbin rooms
25
02v/07b
Ironing room
21
02
Access ramps to garages
25
07
232
IP30/IK07
with door + IP30

cover
IP30/IK08
with door + gasket

+ IP30 cover
IP31/IK08
IP43/IK08
with door + IP55

cover
IP55/IK10
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b

to the premises
System P
Characteristics
Type of premises
Cubicle
with fixed frame
Min. IP/IK
required
IP
IK
Washrooms, rooms
volume 0
27
02
containing a bathtub or volume 1
24
02
shower
volume 2
23
02
volume 3
21
02
Lounges, living rooms, etc
20
02
Drying rooms
21
02
Basements
21
02v/07b
Covered terraces
21
02
WCs
21
02
Verandas
21
02
Crawl spaces
23
02v/07b
Commercial premises and adjoining areas
Gunsmiths (storage area, workshop) 31v/33b 08
Laundries (wash room)
24
07
Butchers
shop
24
07
cold room
23
07
y -10 C
Bakers, cake shops (kitchens)
50
07
Coffee roasters
21
02
Coal, wood, oil
20
08
Delicatessen (production)
24
07
Sweets (production)
20
02
Shoe repair shops
20
02
Dairies
24
02
Hardware stores (storage areas for 33
07
chemicals and paint)
Wood workers
50
07
Art galleries
20
02v/07b
Florists
24
07
Furriers
20
07
Fruit and vegetable merchants
24
07
Grain shops
50
07
Bookshops, stationers
20
02
Motorcycle and bicycle repairs and 20
08
accessories
Messenger services
20
08
Furniture shops (antiques, second- 20
07
hand)
20
07
Glass and mirror merchants
(workshop)
Wallpaper shop (storage area)
21
07
Cosmetics shop (storage area)
31
02
Chemists (storage area)
20
02
Photographers (dark room)
23
02
Plumbers (storage area)
20
07
Fishmongers
25
07
Dry cleaners
23
02
Hardware stores (without paint,
20
07
chemicals, etc.)
Locksmiths
20
07v/08b
Vintners, spirits (cellars and storage 23
07
area)
Interior decorator (carding)
50
07
Tailors, clothing retailers (storage
20
02
area)
Pet care
35
07
IP30/IK07
with door + IP30

cover
IP30/IK08
with door + gasket

+ IP30 cover
IP31/IK08
IP43/IK08
with door + IP55

cover
IP55/IK10
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
v
b
b
b
b
b
233

to the premises
System P
Characteristics
Type of premises
Cubicle
with fixed frame
Min. IP/IK
required
IP
IK
Buildings open to the general public

halls
L
Lecture halls,
meeting rooms, stage areas
auditoriums,
scenery storage
halls used for
rooms
several purposes
costume rooms
M
Retail premises, sales premises
shopping malls areas for storage
and handling of
packing
N
Restaurants and cafes
O
Hotels and boarding houses
P
Dance halls and gaming parlours
classrooms
R
Teaching
establishments, dormitories
holiday camps
S
Libraries and documentation centres
halls and rooms
areas for reception
of equipment
and merchandise
bedrooms
U
Healthcare
establishments incineration
operating rooms
centralised
sterilisation
pharmacies and labs
with more than 10 l of
inflammable liquids
V
Places of worship
W Administrative premises, banks
halls
X
Indoor sports
facilities
premises containing
refrigeration facilities
Y
Museums
PA Open air facilities
CTS Marquees and tents
SG Inflatable structures
PS Covered parking lots
storage rooms
Shared premises of
buildings open to the packing rooms
general public
archive rooms
film and magnetic
media storage
linen rooms
laundry rooms
misc. shops
kitchens (large)
T
Exhibitions
234
IP30/IK07
20
20
20
02v/07b b
08
08
20
20
20
07
08
08
20
20
20
20
20
08
02
07
02
08
20
21
20
02
02
07
20
21
20
24
02
b
07v/08b
07
b
02v/07b
with door + IP30 with door + gasket

cover
+ IP30 cover
IP30/IK08
IP31/IK08
IP43/IK08
with door + IP55

cover
IP55/IK10
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
v
21v/23b 02v/07b
20
20
21
21
02
b
02
b
07v/08b
08
20
25
44
44
21
20
20
20
20
02
b
08v/10b
08
08
08v/10b
08
08
02
b
02
b
21
24
21
02
07
07v/08b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b

to the premises
System P
Characteristics
Type of premises
Cubicle
with fixed frame
Min. IP/IK
required
IP
IK
IP30/IK07
Technical premises
Battery rooms
23
02v/07b
Lifts (machine rooms and pulley
20
02v/08b v
rooms)
Electrical rooms
20
07
b
Control rooms
20
02
b
Workshops
21v/23b 07v/08b
Laboratories
21v/23b 02v/07b
Air conditioning washers
24
07
Garages (used exclusively
21
07
for parking vehicles)
of an area not exceeding 100 m2
Machine rooms
31
07v/08b
Water pressurisers
23
07v/08b
Boiler houses and adjoining premises (power in excess of 70 kW)
Boiler rooms
coal fuel
51v/61b 07v/08b
other fuel
21
07v/08b
electrical
21
07v/08b
Fuel
coal
50v/60b 08
storage areas
oil
20
07v/08b v
liquefied gas
20
07v/08b v
Cinder tips
50v/60b 08
Pump rooms
23
07v/08b
Pressure reduction rooms (gas)
20
07v/08b v
Steam or hot water facilities
23
07v/08b
Expansion vessel rooms
21
02
Garages and car parks of an area exceeding 100 m2
Parking lots
21
07v/10b
Carwash areas (inside premises)
25
07
Safety areas indoors
21
07
Lubrication areas
23
08
Battery recharging areas
23
07
Workshops
21
08
Public building (other than for the general public)
Offices
20
02
b
Libraries
20
02
b
Archives
20
02
b
Computer rooms
20
02
b
Design offices
20
02
b
Rooms containing reprographic
20
02
b
machines
Sorting rooms
20
07
b
Refectories in restaurants or
21
07
canteens
Large kitchens
Sports rooms
21
07v/08b
Barracks
21
07
Meeting rooms
20
02
b
Waiting rooms, lounges, halls
20
02
b
Medical consulting rooms, not fitted 20
02
b
with specific equipment
Demonstration
20
02v/07b b
and exhibition rooms
with door + IP30

cover
IP30/IK08
with door + gasket

+ IP30 cover
IP31/IK08
IP43/IK08
with door + IP55

cover
IP55/IK10
b
b
v
v
b
b
b
v
b
b
v
b
b
v
b
b
b
b
v
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
235

to the premises
System P
Characteristics
Type of premises
Enclosure or cubicle
with fixed frame
Min. IP/IK
required
IP
IK
IP30/IK07
Farm premises or locations

Alcohol (storage)
23
07
Closed cattle sheds
35
07
Laundries
24
07
Wood storage rooms
30
10
Threshing floors
50
07
Distilling cellars
23
07
Vat rooms (wine)
23
07
Courtyards
35
07
Poultry barns
35
07
Stables
35
07
Fertiliser (storage)
50
07
Stables
35
07
Manure heaps
24
07
Haylofts
50
07
Haystacks, forage (storage)
50
07
Granaries, barns
50
07
Straw (storage)
50
07
Greenhouses
23
07
Grain silos
50
07
Milking rooms
35
07
Pig sties
35
07
Chicken houses
35
07
Miscellaneous installations
Fair facilities
33
08
Water treatment facilities
24v/25b 07v/08b
Thermodynamic installations, air-conditioned rooms and cold rooms
Height
from 0 to 1.10 m
25
07
above
from 1.10 to 2 m
24
07
ground
21
07
above 2 m under
evaporator or water
drain pipe
ceiling and up to 10
23
07
cm underneath
Temperature y -10 C
23
07
Compressor room
21
08
integral unit located
34
08
outside or on a terrace
236
with door + IP30

cover
IP30/IK08
with door + gasket

+ IP30 cover
IP31/IK08
IP43/IK08
with door + IP55

cover
IP55/IK10
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b

to the premises
System P
Characteristics
Type of premises
Enclosure or cubicle
with fixed frame
Min. IP/IK
required
IP
IK
Industrial facilities
Slaughter houses
Batteries (manufacture)
Acid (manufacture and storage)
Alcohol (manufacture and storage)
Aluminium (manufacture and
storage)
Livestock (raising, fattening and sale)
Asphalt and bitumen storage
Wool beating and carding
Industrial laundry
Wood (processing)
Meat packers
Bakeries
Breweries
Brickworks
Rubber (production and processing)
Carbide (manufacture and storage)
Ammunition factories
Carton board (production)
Quarries
Celluloid (manufacture of objects)
Cellulose (manufacture)
Coal (depots)
Pork products
Boiler-making works
Lime kilns
Rag (storage)
Chlorine (manufacture and storage)
Chrome-plating
Cement works
Coking plant
Adhesives (production)
Bottling lines
Liquid fuels (storage)
Fats (processing)
Leather (tanning and storage)
Copper (ore processing)
Paint stripping
Detergents (manufacture)
Distilleries
Electrolysis
Ink manufacturing
Fertilisers (manufacture and storage)
Explosives (manufacture and
storage)
Iron (production and processing)
Spinning mills
Furriers (beating process)
Cheese factories
Gas (production and storage)
tar (processing)
Seed production
Metal engraving
Oils (extraction)
Petroleum products (manufacture)
Printworks
55
33
33
33
51v/53b
08
07
07
07
08
45
53
50
23v/24b
50
24v25b
50
24
53v/54b
54
51
53
33
55
30
34
53
53v/25b
30
50
30
33
33
50
53
33
35
31v/33b
51
31
31
54
53
33
33
31
55
55
07
07
08
07
08
07
07
07
08
07
07
08
07
08
08
08
08
07
08
08
07
07
07
08
08
07
08
08
07
08
08
08
05
05
08
05
05
08
51
50
50
25
31
33
50
33
31
33v/34b
20
08
05
05
05
08
05
05
05
05
08
08
IP30/IK07
with door + IP30

cover
IP30/IK08
with door + gasket

+ IP30 cover
IP31/IK08
IP43/IK08
with door + IP55

cover
IP55/IK10
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
v
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
v
237

to the premises
System P
Characteristics
Type of premises
Cubicle
with fixed frame
Min. IP/IK
required
IP
IK
Industrial establishments (continued)
Dairies
25
05
Public wash-houses
25
05
Liqueurs (production)
21
05
Halogenated liquids (use)
21
08
Inflammable products
21
08
(storage and workshops where they
are used)
Magnesium (production, storage and 31
08
use)
Machine rooms
20
08
Plastics (production)
51
08
Cabinet makers
50
08
Metals (processing)
31v/33b 08
Combustion engines (testing of)
30
08
Ammunition storage
33
08
Nickel (ore processing)
33
08
Household waste (processing)
53v/54b 07
Paper (production)
33v/34b 07
Paper (storage)
31
07
Perfume (production and storage)
31
07
Pulp mill
34v/35b 07
Paint (production and storage)
33
08
Plaster (processing and storage)
50
07
Gunpowder factory
55
08
Chemicals (production)
30v/50b 08
Oil refineries
34v/35b 07
Salt preserve factories
33
07
Soap (production)
31
07
Saw mills
50
08
Metalwork shops
30
08
Grain or sugar silos
50
07
Silk and artificial hair factories
50
08
Sodium carbonate (processing and 33
07
storage)
Sulphur (processing)
51
07
Spirits (storage)
33
07
Sugar mills
55
07
Tanners
35
07
Dye works
35
07
Textile and fabric (production)
51
08
Varnish (production and application) 33
08
Glass works
33
08
Zinc works
31
08
238
IP30/IK07
with door + IP30

cover
IP30/IK08
with door + gasket

+ IP30 cover
IP31/IK08
IP43/IK08
with door + IP55

cover
IP55/IK10
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
v
b
b
b
v
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
v
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
239
System P
Characteristics
Merlin Gerin enclosures comply with standard EN 50298 for empty enclosures.
The sheet metal used for Merlin Gerin enclosures receives an anti-corrosion epoxy
electrophoresis treatment and a coating of a thermosetting, polyester-resin-modified
epoxy powder for colour and appearance.
This two-coat system provides excellent finish and corrosion protection.
The characteristics of this coating are much better than those of traditional epoxy
powders:
b improved colour stability
b wider operating temperature range.
Mechanical properties of
enclosures
Mechanical properties of powder
coated surfaces
Static load on doors, cubicles

Cubicle
Cubicle door
400 kg
12 kg
Test conditions
Test piece made of 1 mm thick steel sheet, degreased, iron phosphated, final
rinsing with 100000 cm DI water, 15 microns of anti-corrosion
electrophoresis treatment and 35 microns of powder paint.
Adhesion (cross-hatch and pull-off)
class 0 required
(ISO 2409)
> 1 kg/50 cm
(ISO 6272)
Impact strength (1)
Mandrel bending test (2)
< 10 mm
(ISO 6860)
Persoz hardness
300 s
(ISO 1522)
(1) No cracking of the paint film after dropping a weight of one kilogram on the test piece from a
height of 50 centimetres.
(2) Film cracks over a length of 10 millimetres maximum.
Artificial ageing test on powder

coating
Test conditions:
Two tests carried out on the same 1 mm thick steel sheet test piece.
b cyclical damp-heat test:
v as per standard IEC 68-2-30
- six 24-hour cycles at temperatures higher than 40C
b continuous resistance to neutral salt mist:
v the tests were carried out over a period of 400 hours, far more than the 48 hours
required by the standard for indoor installations
v as per standard IEC 68-2-11 and ISO 7253
- 400 hours without blistering for normal surface on test piece
- 250 hours for a scratched surface.
Evaluation of corrosion as per ISO 4628:
b adhesion: class y 1
b blistering: degree 1 dim.1
b rusting: Ri 1
b cracking: class 1
b flaking imp. 1 dim. 1
propagation of corrosion under scratch with respect to the scratch axis: 3 mm max.
240
System P
Characteristics
Chemical properties of powder

coating
Tests carried out at ambient temperature on phosphated test pieces coated

with a 150 to 200 micron film.
Test duration (months)
Acids
Acetic
Sulphuric
Nitric
Phosphoric
Hydrochloric
Lactic
Citric
Bases
Soda
Ammonia
Water
Distilled water
Seawater
Tap water
Diluted bleach
Solvents Petrol
High alcohols
Aliphatics
Aromatics
Ketones, esters
Tri-perchlorethylene
10
12
Concentration
20 %
30 %
30 %
30 %
30 %
10 %
10 %
10 %
10 %
Film intact.
Film damaged (blisters, yellowing, loss of shine).
241
Thermal management
of switchboards
General
System P
Characteristics
A switchboard is designed for operation under normal ambient conditions.

Most devices do not operation correctly outside a temperature range of -10 and
+70C.
It is therefore important to maintain the switchboard internal temperature within this
temperature range by:
b correctly sizing the switchboard during design
b correcting the temperature using suitable means.
Cooling
There are a number of way to dissipate heat from the switchboard.
The drawings below present the various means.
DD381482
Forced-air ventilation
DD381483
DD381484
Convection
IP y 31
IP > 31
Ensured naturally in Prisma Plus

enclosures
IP y 54
IP y 54
Using fans, it significantly increases the

thermal capacity of an enclosure.
Forced
convection and
cooling
DD381921
DD381920
Forced-air
ventilation with
air-air exchanger
DD381481
Management of the internal

temperature
IP > 31
On special request.
IP > 31
For these extreme cases, many installers prefer to set up the switchboards with other
electrotechnical and electronic devices in air-conditioned electrical rooms.
Heating
The means employed to raise the internal temperature in a switchboard is a resistorbased heater, used to:
b avoid condensation by limiting variations in temperature
b ensure that the switchboard does not freeze.
242
System P
Thermal management
of switchboards
General
Characteristics
DD381401
Calculation of the internal

temperature
Calculation of the temperature is the means to check that the enclosure can
evacuate the dissipated power of the installed devices.
Important note
Correct thermal management of the switchboard depends on compliance with
the installation requirements for the distribution system (power circuits).
Incorrect installation will have major consequences on the connected device, but
almost none on the internal temperature of the enclosure.
Once the circuit has been correctly sized, it is necessary to check whether the
assembly (devices + distribution system + cables) have a level of dissipated power
P(W) y the P(W) that the enclosure can handle.
Method defined by IEC 890 technical report
This IEC guide for switchboards proposes a calculation method to determine three
levels of internal temperature, depending on the dissipated power of the devices and
distribution blocks installed in the switchboard.
Users can consult this document when it is necessary to determine precisely the
internal temperature in view of optimising the switchboard.
DD382422
DD381350
On request, Schneider Electric can carry out a thermal study to check that the
installed assembly and the thermal capacity of the enclosure are compatible.
Comparative method
A number of qualified and tested configurations serve as the basis for indicating the
thermal capacity of Prisma Plus enclosures.
This is en empirical means to check whether the dissipated power of the desired
configuration is close to that of a tested configuration.
Method using charts taking into account enclosure characteristics

To speed up calculations, Schneider Electric produces charts based on the
company's experience and a number of assumptions on the installation.
They can be used sufficiently precisely to determine the variations in temperature
and the dissipated-power levels for the different types of wall-mount enclosures,
floor-standing enclosures and cubicles.
For details on the calculation of the dissipated power in the device zone, see
page 245.
243
Thermal management
of switchboards
Comparative method
System P
Characteristics
Comparative method
Two cubicles with busbar compartment, 800 mm

wide, 1000 mm deep, two 300 mm wide ducts, IP30
Diversity factor: 0.7
Ambient temperature around the switchboard: 35C
Cubicle 1 : P(W) of device zone = 880 W
244
DD382649
DD382650

wide, 400 mm deep, IP30
Diversity factor: 0.7 and 0.8
You will have no problems with your switchboard if:

b the volume of the enclosure is greater than that of the tested enclosure with a
similar assembly
b the P(W) of the installed assembly is less than the P(W) of the tested configuration
in the same size enclosure.
For details on the calculation of the dissipated power in the device zone, see
page 245.
Thermal management
of switchboards
Example
System P

wide, 1000 mm deep, two 300 mm wide ducts, IP30
Diversity factor: 0.7
DD382421
Characteristics
Application of the diversity factor
In the configuration below, the standardised diversity factor (K div.) for a total of 14
outgoing circuits is 0.6, i.e. 60 % of In for each outgoing circuit.
Merlin Gerin prefers a more conservative approach and therefore divides the
installation into four main circuits:
b NS250
b 200 A Multiclip: 8 outgoers V K div. = 0.7
b Polypact: 4 outgoers V K div. = 0.8
b NS400.
1 NS250 + 1 Multiclip 200 A + 1 Polypact + 1 NS400 V 4 outgoers, i.e. a diversity
factor of 0.8.
As a result, the current flowing in each circuit is at least 70% and up to 80% of In.
Calculation of the power dissipated by

devices in the incoming cubicle
Dissipated power of the NT1600 indicated by the manufacturer: 460 W.

The power dissipated by the connections is approximately 30% of the device P(W):
0.3 x 460 = 138 W.
Power of circuit breaker + connections = 460 + 138 = 598 W at 1600 A.
For I (the Watts are proportional to the square of the current) at 1410 A (In of the
incoming device):
598
--------------2- 1410 2 = 405 W
1600
Dissipated power of the NS250 indicated by the manufacturer: 42 W.
Dissipated power of the connections: 0.3 x 42 = 12.6 W.
Power of circuit breaker + connections = 42 +12.6 = 54.6 W at 250 A.
For 200 A (the tested value):
54,6
------------2 200 2 = 35 W
250
Dissipated power of the Polypact and its four NS250 circuit breakers:
4 x 35 W (same calculation as above) = 140 W
Sum of the dissipated power in the incoming cubicle:
P(W) = 405 + 35 +140 = 580 W
245
Thermal management
of switchboards
Example
System P
Characteristics
DD382423
Once the dissipated power of the devices has been determined and the enclosure
with its IP selected, transfer the results (sum of the dissipated power and width of the
device zone) to the chart corresponding to the enclosure IP.
Draw a line parallel to the others on the chart and read the corresponding difference
in temperature.
For the given example, the heat rise is 22C at mid-height in the enclosure.
The internal temperature= external temperature + heat rise
= 35C + 22C = 57C
57C < 60C stipulated by the standard, i.e. the result is acceptable for an IP3
cubicle.
This gives roughly:
Internal temperature = 60C at mid-height in the enclosure for a low IP value.
Internal temperature = 70C at mid-height in the enclosure for a high IP value.
246
Thermal management
of switchboards
Charts
System P
Characteristics
Test conditions: the cubicle is on the floor against a wall, the indicated internal heat
rise is that measured at mid-height in the enclosure.
Quick calculation charts

for internal temperatures
for System P
IP3X cubicle, 600 mm deep

DD382425
DD382424
For the enclosures not mentioned on the previous

pages, use the equation:
P
T = -------------SK
where:
T: internal temperature - external temperature
P: power dissipated by the devices, connections and
busbars (in Watts)
S: total free surface area of the enclosure
(expressed in m2)
K: thermal-conduction coefficient of the material
(W/m 2 C)
K = 5.5 W/m2 C for painted sheet metal.
DD382427
DD382426
IP55 cubicle, 600 mm deep

DD382429
DD382428

DD382431

DD382430
Note: The dissipated power of each device is provided by the

manufacturer. Add approximately 30% to account for the
connections and the busbars.
247
Thermal management
of switchboards
Ventilation
System P
Characteristics
The air enters the lower section via the fans and exits the upper section:
b through a ventilated roof
b or through a ventilation opening.
The air throughput of the fans is determined by the equation:
Switchboard ventilation
P
D = 3 1 ------- KS
T
The chart below can be used to determine the necessary throughput, based on the
dissipated power, the difference in temperature (internal - external) and the exposed
surface area of the enclosure.
Example
Consider an IP3X cubicle, 650 mm wide and 400 mm deep, containing components
(devices, connections, busbars, etc.) dissipating 1000 W.
The ambient temperature around the cubicle is 50C.
Given that the average temperature at mid-height should not exceed 60C, the
difference in temperature T is equal to 60 - 50 = 10C.
The exposed surface of the cubicle (non adjacent to a wall or other cubicle)
is 4.46 m.
(back = 1.3 m, front = 1.3 m, roof = 0.26 m, side panels = 1.6 m).
What is the necessary throughput of the ventilation system?
The throughput can be calculated as:
1000
D = 3 1 ------------- 5 5 4 46
10
DD381391
D = 234 m3/h.
In the range of Prisma Plus accessories, select a system with a throughput
of 300 m3/h.
Calculation data
P : power dissipated by the devices, connections and busbars (in Watts)
Pr : power of the heating resistor (in Watts)
Tm : maximum internal temperature in the device zone (in C)
Ti : average internal temperature (in C)
Te : average external temperature (in C)
Tm = Tm Te
T = Ti Te
S : total free surface area of the enclosure (expressed in m2)
K : thermal-conduction coefficient of the material (W/m2 C)
K = 5.5 W/m2 C for painted sheet metal
D: ventilation throughput (in m3/h)
Note: The dissipated power of each device is provided by the manufacturer.
Add approximately 30% to account for the connections and the busbars.
248
Thermal management
of switchboards
Heating
System P
Characteristics
Switchboard heating
The heating resistor, placed in the bottom of the switchboard, maintains the internal
temperature 10C higher than the external temperature. When the switchboard is not
in operation, the heater compensates the dissipated power normally emitted by the
switchboard.
The power of the heating resistor is calculated:
b using the equation: Pr = (T x S x K) - P
b or using the charts below, based on the exposed surface area of the enclosure and
the desired difference in temperature.
DD381789
Chart to determine the heating resistor for all types of cubicles
Calculation data
P : power dissipated by the devices, connections and busbars (in Watts)
Pr : power of the heating resistor (in Watts)
Tm : maximum internal temperature in the device zone (in C)
Ti : average internal temperature (in C)
Te : average external temperature (in C)
Tm = Tm Te
T = Ti Te
S : total free surface area of the enclosure (expressed in m2)
K : thermal-conduction coefficient of the material (W/m2 C)
K = 5.5 W/m2 C for painted sheet metal
D: ventilation throughput (in m3/h)
Note: The dissipated power of each device is provided by the manufacturer.
Add approximately 30% to account for the connections and the busbars.
249
250
Notes
251
252
89, boulevard Franklin Roosevelt

F - 92500 Rueil-Malmaison (France)
Tel : +33 (0)1 41 29 85 00
http://www.schneider-electric.com
As standards, specifications and designs change from time to time, please ask for confirmation
of the information given in this publication.
This document has been printed
on ecological paper.
http://www.schneider-electric.co
Designed: C.R.T. / Ameg

Photos: Schneider Electric Industries SAS, M. Bougot, Headlines, 3D Vision
Printed: Imprimerie des Deux Ponts
ART960003
05-2004
DESW016EN 2004 - Schneider Electric - All rights reserved.
Schneider Electric Industries SAS

Prisma Plus System P

Hochgeladen von

Dokumentinformationen

Copyright

Verfügbare Formate

Dieses Dokument teilen

Dokument teilen oder einbetten

Freigabeoptionen

Stufen Sie dieses Dokument als nützlich ein?

Sind diese Inhalte unangemessen?

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

Prisma Plus System P

Hochgeladen von

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

Prisma Plus LV Switchboards

Certified for more safety

Current distribution and accessories

20 M4 clip-nuts for DIN rails

Adjustable modular device rail

Mounting plate for horizontal fixed NS250 with

Multiclip distribution block, 4P, 80A, 1 row

Support for lateral vertical Linergy busbars

Bottom support for lateral vertical 5/10mm busbars

Framework, W=300mm, D=400mm

10 self-adhesive label sheets for common symbols 99

Electrical switchboards up to 3200 A

Cat. no. selection

Typical configuration with catalogue numbers

Masterpact NW08 to NW32

The Prisma Plus functional

Switchboard design is very simple.

Functional units are arranged rationally, one on top of another.

Advantages of Prisma Plus

A dependable electrical installation

Prisma Plus enclosures

An upgradeable electrical installation

Polypact distribution block

Prefabricated connection between Linergy

Prefabricated connection between an

Fixed Compact NS1000, front connected with

Connection transfer assembly for connection

Supply of a row of Multi 9 devices by a 200 A

Two vertically mounted Compact NS250

A device supplying a group of outgoers

Terminal block for Multi 9 devices in the cable

Cubicle, W = 650 mm, D = 400 mm

Polypact distribution block

Polypact distribution block

Polypact distribution block

The functions of an electrical

See page 124

Device compartment, W = 650 mm

Connection compartment, W = 300 mm

Connection compartment, W = 400 mm

See page 108

See page 106

The functions of an electrical

Hinged front plate support frame

Cat. no. selection

Typical configuration with

Framework, W = 800, D = 400

08407 See page 86

14 Front plate for vertical NS630b/ 03690 See page 31

Framework, W = 300, D = 400

08403 See page 86

15 Connection for fixed NS630b/

04486 See page 31

Side panel, D = 400

08750 See page 89

04424 See page 32

Rear panel, W = 800

08738 See page 89

Rear panel, W = 300

08733 See page 89

Roof, W = 800, D = 400

08438 See page 89

Roof, W = 300, D = 400

08433 See page 89